PRACTICAL LESSONS
IN

ENGLI S H

G RA~f lVIAR
AND

COMPOSITION.
FOR YOUNG BEGINNERS:

..01 I NTR ODUCTION TO "THE PRIJ>CI PLES OF KNOLISH
GRAMMAR ," WITH COPIOUS EXERCISKS, A ND
DIRECTION S FOR TrJEm US E .

BY HEv. PETER BULLIONS, D. D.,
.A L'"TllOn. OE' THE SKRlltS OJ! ORAM.MARS, E>..GLts H, L.ATf:"' 1 A..'ND

ORE EK, ON THK SAM.E PLAN .

l

I
I

;r

[A NEW EDIT ION ltEVISED A :"ID COHRJ·:1,;n:n.1

NEVI

Y OH.JC :

PRATT, WOODFORD, FA1U1ER &- BRA CE .
NO . 4 CORTLANDT S'l'HEET.

1 8 54 .

.,.

~i, L c. '\ 1 57 . S't . ) l//
./

PREF ACE .

E:'li" TY.1t1rn, nec<H1.li11g to A ct of Co nur c8~ 1 iu tli o Year On e Tlo11:-1unt.l

Jo: i;;!i t I l11ndrrJ auJ Fith·-thrcu. ov 1' n. l' ETER BliJ.LlOSS, D . D.,
in t lic ClcrJ.: 'n Oflico or \li e !\urt ncrn J) i"Lrict of 1\e w York .

Tux general character of this little work ia correctly descri bed in tho
title page. It is a series of "Prncrical Lesso ns on En[!l ioh Grammnr
dnd Composilion, for Young Beginners ." It owes it.3 origin to n wish
s trongly expres~c<l . from various quarters, which the author is bound to
respect , to have a erna!I work on Grumn1ar, s uited by its sim piicny to
the capacity o f children at an earlier nge than that at which the s tuJy
of Grommnr is u8unlly com me nced, ant! ans wering in it" pra ctical character, to the improved me thods of teachi ng Grammar, us wcl: as other
brn nches in the more j uvenile departments of Academies and Com111on
S chools.
The work is di vided into Lessons, each of whicli is devoted to S{lme
one topic . T he a rrange ment in ench Lcsrnn is the same tli ro11ghout
excep t that t he Qu es tio ns on each Rule of Syntax nrc left to he lromc<l
by the teacher. Tha t orde r is the following: First, tl1e Dcfinit ion R a nd
RulcMbclonuing to tho L~f'8on , and inten ded to be commi tted to mem ory,
are placed first in lar<•c t Y\'~ Next to theRe, nny s ubordinate mn tter regarded OS rope r foj FD bn e ; s 0mpend, is euhjr,incJ in a smnJ ic r type,
to be cnre uily rcn nn:J Bill < 1ed with tho CS$On.
,
,
Qu estions so frnm r d thnt correct answers w ill bring out nll rh c lca<l int:;

facts contuino<l in the preceding te.'\'.t.

And lastly, practical E.'l: crcises

are s ubjoined, for the purpare of reducing im111 ediately to prn ctice tho
knowledge acquired, nnd fixing it in the easie•t ant! nwst e ffo
I man ·
ner in th e unders1nn din g.

T he Excrci f:es, in

n 1o:.; t

of the Lessons,ure capn l,:c

n

v ariety of wny s ; and n111plc <lircc ti ons nrc gi ve n in ::u n

to the mann e r in which th ey are intended to be '"c
i11:expericnce<l tea c hers and others may be a t no los:.o:; to con{
of very you ng pupils th ro ugh a prolituble i11i1ia tory course of
S.rammar.
In Etymology , " lLT.LSTRATJO::-;s" are O\ C-;'1Qi onally tlirrn-\'n in .

M

10

~ he

1n wh at mann e r i1np vrlarit pri n cip les i n Gr:nnnrnr m~1r h., i-: n;plifird to

·"

th e .n •t1n!! J ~: 1 rne r; :1 nJ 111 ~ y nt:t., , n pia:n rt !Hi i;111l ..i.1r:. ;" Exr1.>.xAT io;o.:'
i ~ ru i.>j f)1 ned to

cuc n

J~ule .

f...ir the 8ame purpv~e .

;.~

l

PR EFA CE.

~

]1 is of g reat i111por1nnC'c 10 kee p th n ncrJ11isi1il) ns o f pnpils nlrcndy
m :-uJc ohq1ys at hn11d, n11d to i111prf'~~ 1!1r111 i11df·ld1ly on th<:ir mi 11 d:'i by
rercnrcJ rev iews of pn: viow~ L es.. .: on .~ ; n11d iL will be scc 11 thaL Ji rcc 1io1111
nre given ni the Lcginuing of ea ch Lesson, !Ur carrying 1his useful pracd
1ice in to etlccl.
An other featu re in this worlc , -nnd I mny suy peculia r to ir,-iP, thnt

CONTENTS.
L K!HJ OH

l

2

cnrnct on toget he r .

Di rcc1 iv11s for 1rn-rsing ea ch

port of speec h, w ith OC('0 111pa11ying cxatnplcs fur prn ct icc , ore g iven os
soon os it hus been trear nJ uf: And in like 111 a1111e r the proper me thod
of comO in ing words !Vr die purp1J!"e of expressi ng our it.le ns. is poinreJ
out, and E,\: c rci~c.s de visr d, a s soon as rh ..~ pupil ha s b e~ n made acquaint·
ed wi th 1h£:: cl:i s~ ('S uf wu nb c;.1pnl.t!c vf hl'ing- con1 1Ji ned . One £xcrcisc of
this kind, someti mes ni orr , is c...-innec tt:d with nli nost eve ry Ru le of Sy ntax, as nt once m1 exerci~c on the Itulc nn<l n pra xis on Corn position.
As Orthogrnphy heloni;s more s1ri c1ly to 1he Spellin1: Book , ond
P rosody is n study for moro ndvnnced pupils than those for whom this
w ork is in1end ed, 1lo r y nrc in1 rodu ccJ here o nly fur the Enke of form,
and of course little is saiJ n ·s pec ting the m.

'I

!
I

PREFACE TO TlJE JtEV JSED EDITION .

I

I

I
11

II·1

'iII
ji

I :
'I

:I

!I
'°'

'
I

i I
1

I 'I

This ed ition has l>•·en r e vi sed aml corrected to correspond with
th u new ,.,\itio11 of "The Prin c ip le; of Engli sh Graniurnr," an< l
with the " A nalytical and Prnctic1tl Grn mm 1\I' of the E nglish

L n11g 1rngc 11 rece n t l y pnbJi , hcd. 'l'houg l1 t liiswork is nut int e nd ed
to !Jc u co mplc tP trc11lisc o n Eng lish Grnrnmar, no pains irnvc
been ~p:trcd t o rc1Hk r it u scfn l its fa r as iL g0e ~ . H con tains as
ni ucli as nny work of i1s !i'ize, prcscn 1cd in n neu Lond perspicuous mnn ..
n cr ~ an d moreover, po~ses~cs some new ond pe culiar features, which
clui111 Il ic candid u11e 1Hio n 011d cxu min n:i on of ull wl10 feol un int erest
in F<in 1p!i fyin g the process o f ed ucation lu the youthfu l mi nd . un<l doi ng
the most good in the ~h or tc8 l tii ne, in the simple.s t nrnJ m os t pleasi ng
mu1111t.. r, a t the c-a rlic!-<! p<'ri"d , a11 d nt !111 : lt.:as t C'xpc11~c .
T ho1;1e wh 11 C O llJ!l l (' ll<'..(' tlu~ !'; /11d y or Gni 111n 111r 11 r / (· r rhc ngc nf twel ve
or fnur11· c n , )';ta nd Ill no 1lP1; d or 1hi R work . They ~ho11l d (' 0 11lrt1('11Ce ut
wliwh t:t HH1ti 11g 11 e1 111 1plctt: co 11 n ;c of Eugh~ h G rom11 nl.r, wit! 1ont :111y oilier l11 1uk , 1111 d is ~ uffi 1 ·i 1-· ud y s i111plc lu r pupil ~ ofthn.
ogc . B ui yuun g µupib, by goi ng tlin1u g h this wdl cnrt:r, even uc a n

I
I
l
I

I

Pngtl.

7

Concern ing Le tt.'''"" und Syll1tbles,. ... ... .. . ... ... ..... .

7

l ' AH'!' 1:'1 !( :;;'J'. -

:~~~~~W;ijl~~~iilili4i~~~illi!ililii&IJl.lii~~8
urn

. . .
DJ\' 1!-' 11111 , .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

#...

D t finitin n nnd

OilTH OGH APIIY.

I' A RT S I•:COND.-ETYMOLOGY.
3 Div ;,ion of IV on ls,. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • .
4 Of No nn•, ............ . . . .....•. .. .. . ....... . .. . . . ..
5 O f l')c rs•,n. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . • . . . . . . . .
.6 O f <l<: nd er,.. ... ... .. ...... . . . . . . .. . . ... .. . . . . . . . . ...
7 or N"11111 IJ,· r, .. . . ...... .. .... . . .•......•. . . .. . . . . .. ..
8 or the Ca . : (';-1 (If N 1 1un~ .. ...... . . ... . .. .. . ...... .. . ... .
'.l O f tlJc Arti<:l.- ,.. . .... . . ... . . . . . .... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
JO Of 1h c Adjec 1ivc,. ...•.. . •. . . ... . .. .... .. . · . · .. · · · · · · ·. · · ·
] l Comp:n ison of A djective ~, ....•.. . .• . ··.· ·· · · ····· · ·· · · · ••
12 Of the Pronou n,. . .. .. ... . · ..... ... .. . ... ·· · · ··· · ··· •·· ···
13 Of ftclulive P ro noun•,·· . . · ......... · .. ·· · · · · ·· ·· · ··· · ··· •
14 Of Adjec1i vc Pronouns,. . . .... . . . . . . ..... . . · ····· ······· ..
15 Exer ci se ~ on Ar1ides Nouns , Adjectives, an<l Pr o nou ;·1 ~,. • · · •
1

16
17
18

Of Ver bs ,. . . . ·· . · . . . ·· ··· · ··•· · ······ •· ···· ···· ··· ·· ··•··
IJivision of V.-rlos,. . ...... · .. · . . ... · · · · · · · . · ·. · ·. · · · · · · • • •
J nflcct io 11 or \ ' ,•rh:-1, . . • .• . ......• . ..•. . ... •.•.• ...... . •.• • •

JQ Of 1hr ~lood , ..... · . .. · · · · . . · .. · · · · ·· · · · · · · · • · ·. · · .. · .. . ·
20 or Tcn "c:-:, nr IJ i? ti ncti l)ll S o f . 'l'in1e ••..•. .. ••••• •. . . • • .•. • ••
2 1 () f Nu r11 l1t •r n 11rl 1.,c rsnn , . .• . .. . . ... . .. •• ·· · ·· · ··•··• . .. .. .
22 01 1!1r- r>11 r l 1{·\11 !c-: , • •••••• • •• •• ••••.•.••• • •• •••••••• ••• • • • •
23 Of dH': Cnnjngution of Vcrhs, .... . •.•.•.. . · · · · . .. · · · · · · · · · ·
2·1 N cg ati,·c f11ri 11 of tlic Ve rh, . . .... .. ... .....• . ... ... .. •• . . ..
25 J nte rrog-ati\'C fnrin of the Verb, . • : . .. . .... . . .... ··• . • ... .. •

\l

10
11
l~
15
lS
~v

2l
23
25

29
3'2
35

35
3S

41
4;;
41
~7

1\l

51
57
59

26
27

·1 he Vc rl 1 " TO uE." .. · .. · · · · · · .. · · · • · · · · • · • • · · · • · · • · • • · • · •

f,()

Prog- res:sive Funn of the Active Voi ce, .·····•······ ··· ···· ··

23
29
30

Pa s~ ivc V1.>icc . .. ••. · · • · · • • · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · • · • • · · · ·

64
G5

:JJ
32
33
31

on1 ·n \\1th rlii.:: 11tlwr,

35

eurlicr pcnud, on the study of the !urger Gramma r with arent 11dv11ntoiie.

30
37
38

Of I rrc£;11la r

y,.,1, ~ ,.

..... · ... . .. . . .... . .... ....... . ..... . .

Defc c1ivc 0110 l 111pc rso nol Ve rbs,. .. · · · . · . . ·· · ····· ·· · ·•···.
Of Advcrl'"· · · . ... · · · · · · · ·. · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · .. · · ..
C>f Prrp osi 1 i on ~ ,. ·. · · · · · · · · · · • · · · · • · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · ••••

or lnl t· 1j1 ·c l 10!1 :\ •.••.•••.••..•..••.....•...•.••. . ••••••..
or Co 11j unctio 11 ~, ... . . .... . . .. . . ............ ....... ... . .. .
I l o w to tlis tin g ui;_h th e P nrts l>f S11ccch,. · • • · ·· · • · ·• · · • • · ·· •
l.., ar:-;in !!, .. ..• . ..... ... . · · · .. ·.... .. · . .... · · · ..•.. ·. · · •... ·
1\I odel "f t.::1yrn oJ 1 ,:.; i ~ 1 d Parsin g, •.• ··········· ·· · ······ ··· · •
J~xe rc ise s i;1 Pa r3i11 g, . · · • · • .. ... •.. · · · · .. · · · · · · · · · . .. • · • · •

69
7">
76
79
fl!
82
83
p.~

87
88

VI

..

<.:ONTENT8 .

PART T1IlH.D.-8Yi"TAX.

39

G nnernl Principies of

~yntux! . ....•....

. . ... .. ........•.. ,.

~J

40 Pnrts •1f Syntax,. .......... ...... .... .. .. .. . .. . . . ..... . ... !J2
41 Huie I.
A Verb anJ its Nominative,. .... . ........... 02
II.
A Transi1ive Verb nnd i1s Objec t,............ 94
42
43
III.
A Pn•posi1ion u nd i1s Ol •jec1,.... . • . . . . . . • • • • 95
IV.
T wo or more Nouns tnk cn in co nn ex ion, ..... 96
44
45
V.
Two or more Nouns 1nl; cn sepan11tlv, .. . .. . .. 97
46
VI.
T wo Nornina1i ves of Jillerent Pc rso~s,....... 97
47
VII.
A collective Nonn,... . .. . . ... .. . ........... . 98
49
VI II.
A djcc1ive nn<l S11b"rnn1i"" ·..... . . . . ... . . . ... 90
49
5€

IX.
X.

' Vhe n two Pct;'l:o11 s o r tl1 11 1J"S .. r e c o ntra sted, . .
P roi; ouns, ........ ............. .......... . ..
H.t·lativo ~nrl A11 t<·c-cd c 11I:· ••• •• • •••••••.•• • •
SuL"ta n1ive" in A ppo"si1ion , ..... ... .....••.••
Th e s nme Guse n rtc r a Verb ns before it, ..... •

100
101

Th e f'rf':-:pnt raniriplr- 11PP.f n.::i n Nn11n1 ' ' ••••

106
106

51

XT.

52

XII.

53
l>1
55

XI II.
XIV.

103
The Possessi \'c .CU'e, ..... ... ... . .... .... . .. 104

xv.
x \'I.

'l'l 1c 1' rc'-{ ·!1t: 1 ' ~ 1pj,·q·: 1_· '. \11! 1 tL,_· Ar 111 · ~1_· i<1_' l•1rc

~G

57

58
5'.J
GO

61
G2
63
6-1.
65
66

xvrr.
x vur.

XlX .

xx.
xxr.
x xrr.

xxm.

it 1

102
103

GlLDUIATI .

LESSON I.
Defim'.lion and Division .
(Comm it Dcfinit ionfi a11d Hules acc ur,111..· ly to m ;: mory.}

Ema. ts 11 G llAM o l.~ lt is tli e art of ~peaki ng an J
writin g the English Language wit\1 l'n'pricty.
It is di\'id e.! into f'our p arts; 11;111 1\·ly, Orili"graJ>!iy, Etymology, Sy11/1u, nnil .l'rosud•;.

'riw 1'1 r11·'"l T': irri,·i:·i "

:1fi1 · r ! IA\·; , ;111d ni:, . ... , JU7
Th e I ::!i n itl vc ·''l ond, ... .. ...... . .......... . . 108
Th e ~~i.i!.j;1ndi v.: ;\L,.,,l , ..... ........ ..... .. • 109

PART FIJlST.-ORTllOClL\PHY.

C'nnjunc 1i o110, .. ...... . . .•. . •• .•••• • ••.••• • •• 1 JO
Corrr~pondine Conj1 1n c 1ion ~ , . ....••• ......•• 111
Tho Coin parat ive D1'gTCC
H2
Doul1]u Cornpnn1tivlJt3 an<l Superlative~, •••• .• . 113
1 ••• •

LESSON JI.
Conccrn,i11g Lellers u111/ ,•-:_,;! !ubl cs .

•••• •• • •••• • •••

XXlV.

/1dvcrbs ..•... .. ...... ... ....... ... .. •.•.•• 114
Posi tio n of 1\dvC'rl1~ , ...• .. ••....•.••••••.•.• 115
XXVI. Ncgati'""' · ..... . ................. • ... . •.••• 1!6
67
XXV!T . Prcpo,itions bdine n ames or places, ..••..•••• 117
68
XXVJIJ .
or1e r ccrtni n \\"Ords an d phrn scs,.. 118
69
XXTX . Synwx nf the Tenf.ieFi, ... .... ............. .. . Jl!J
70
XXX .
A member of 11 Ee ntcnce referring to two clauses 120
71
XXXT. The Nomi native nbsoiute and independe nt, . . 12 1
XXXTI . The 1\ rticle, .....•........•.....•••••••• • ••• 122
72
73
XXXITI. An E l! ip•is admissible, .•• •.. . . .•• • ••••••• •• • 123
74
XXXIV. An E li ip,;s not adm issible, .......•.•.. • .•.•• 124
75 111-rdcl ol Sy 111nctical Pars in g', .. .. ... .......•••.... .. .. . •. . 125
76 Prom i~c u o n .~ E ."<c rci!-=e~ on the Rules of Sy~tax, . .• ...••.•. .. 126
77 Of Punc tua tion , ........... .. ... .. ..... ... .... .. . ...... .. .. 127
7'3 Of the use of Cup i1111 lA.: ll rrR, ........... . . .. . .. . . . ........ . 128

xxv.

l'AllT FfJl lHTl!.- PllOSOJ)\'.

79

R~GLISir

Prosody.

Eloc u1io11 , \'crbific ation, .... ...... . .•.•...•• .•• • • 129

80 Of Composition •...

J~O

0RTJIOGR :\ PIIY \reals of il"lkr ~, a11.J ti1<" 111rn i1> nl
combinini:; them into syll:1bles :ind wnrrk

A

lv:TTER

is a character represe ntin g n parti cutar sonn<I of the

human voice.
Tlt~re are T wen t y. s ix letters in the English Alphabet.
Letters are eit her Vowels or Con s onant~.
A Vow e l is n letter \V hi ch repr e st ·11t ~ a 5implc i llur l ir 11lutt.
60tm J; nnd in a word or F.)'llaUlc 111:1y lJe ~ 11 u11tlt:d al one. T he
• vow c l:i are, a , r, i, o, u., tt[IJ w a11d y, no l l,d'vre ;.rnu t h•· r Vo\\·cl ~o urid1,;1_l

i11 l11t· ~iun e sy llalt!c.

A Cu11."!on:rn t i8 a letter which n·prt· ~ ·~ td8 rH1 arli··"l"LI'' fl11u11rl;
nnJ inn word 111' 8yllali1c i ~ never ~oun dL'd al1J11t.', l111L aiw;1y~ in con~
ncxiun wilh a vowel.
ti,

The cun~o n a n ts arc, b, <', d, /

p, q, r , 3, t, v, x, z. and

aaroc •ylln\.rlc.

tc

.' l • h.j, k, I, m ,
and y before a vuwd ~ v urn.lcJ in tho
1

.. .
~

:·...

8

l'RACTICAL LESSO:\"S IN

ENG LI SH

, \ Diphlhong is the union of l \\·o 1·owels in on e sound; •.is, ou
111 cul.

GRA~lll1AR .

PART SECOND. -ETYMOLOGY.

A proper DiphthoPg i> on e i11 wh ich bo th the vowels nre sound

~

I
I

i

I
i

I
I
I
~

i!
!1

·1

!:
ii
~

~
i

ed; ns oy in /Joy 1 ou in rounrl, oi in oil.
An im7no;1er Diphthon~ is one i n which only one of the vowd t
iS sounded ;: as , oa i n boal.
A Tri71hlhong is the uni on or t hree vowe ls in one sound; as:,
tall in beauty.
1\ Sf1 llu &lc is a distinct sountl f o rming the whulc uf u V'.' or.i;
a.s , fu.r; or so muc1 1 uf il as can he sv u 111lt..:1.1 u t on ce; ns,;-v. r ;A
fa rmer.

A Jlfonosylla.blo is a worJ of o ne syllaule; as, fox, dog .
A D·issyl/11ble is a won! of t wo syllab les; as, fa. r -1ncr.
ii.. T ris!Jil«Me ;,. n wort.! of three syllnh!Ps; as, br.tl- l er-J1g .
A l'oiy s ylinble is a word ot'. m n ny syllables.
SPELLING is
proper letters.

tl1e art of

expressing a w ord Lv

i·.s

QUESTIONS.
·what is E nglish Grammar? Into how many p:\p ts is 1t <liv idcd 1 .Mention them. What is orthogrnp hy1 W h nt h a le tte r1
How many letters are there i n E ngl is h ? How n re th ey di vided 1
What is a Yowcl 7_,,_ con sonn n!? Num.c t he vow".!ls . ·w h en a r c
wand y \'O \v<.:ls? "\V], en r~nsonan ts? 1Vl1 a t iR a di pl1 t hong ?-n
proper dip hth on'i'-a•1 iP1pro pcr <lipl'.th-:ine?- n triphthong?Whnt i ~" '.V\l:>hl.c • 1-l'hn\ in a wod of one sy llabic termed 1of two!~\ f fp·c~? - !J r f'"Jur er n1 c:- c 1 \\'~1:i. t i ~ F: pe llin g ?

LESSON III.
D'i vis·ion of Words .
[Review l ht'! prPci"di11g T.eswJ n s., f\1 1d 1 u1 ~wr r th e (JUl"f{tJons••

ETYMOLOGY treats of the dilreren t sorts of word,,
t h eir yarious 1 11od 1 ficatio1 1 s~ and th eir dn1,·a:ions.
vVoRDS a re cl'rlain a rticulate sounds used by comm on consent as signs of o ur id,t:as. TJ1ry nrc diYirl i:!d into d ifferent cla~s(·<:, callr.l

PAllTS OF

~PE!:C:if.

Th e par ts oi Speech in tl1c Enl~lish language :ire
n ine; viz., The lVoun, Arliclr~, ./ldjcctire, Pronoun,

Verb , .!l.dvcrb, Prcposdio11, lntc~jcctio11, :ind Conjunc/'ion. - Or tli e~e the Noun , Pr0nnun,~1ntl Verb arc
declined; tl1e rest are indecli nah le.
JI Subs/an/ire i; :i noun , or :i.ny won\ u'c<l ~s a noun.
Ons . A D eclinuble word is one "·hich un der~oes certain
cha n ges o f form. or term ination , to f' X pr l"~~ thP <~iff<~n·nr r<·1 nt ions
of g ender, rnindwr, C'1. Sf' 1 Jn -r:-:on, t~.<· ., 11....,11:il l y tc· ri 1H:d
mar Acc1nL."1 rs; :l s, 7iifl'll 1 rw:n; lo1 ·1·J f,, ,. ,,s .. fr r('{!.

i;1

Cra m.

1

Jln / ndec lina/Jle ' ''ord is o ne tvltid1 un1l c r ~O''S no diang '! of

form; as, good, snmr~ rcrhaps .

J>1zrsill ,!:.' is die l' t'S(Jivin!:.~ nC ~ ~cntcnc<' )1 :tn it~
elements or p:uts
speech, s t:t1lli c~ ilie /1cci. i.. 11:s
which jy~Jonc: to l':tcli word, and ] '" i11ti11:; ' 'lit its r" -

or

la tions to ot her \1·o rds wit h w hich it is connectcJ.

~

1,
1

r:
;1
4~:

~

QUESTfO~; s.

\ Vhnt docs E tym o:o~y t rea t ol'? \ Vl1at are \':ords? \\' !tn ! n.rc
th ey di vided into? \Vhat are t h t'"-C rb ... '-C S 1,:i!J ~,1 -~ !lq•s 1r w ny
parts of spccc:h are there? l\' amc them. \\.hie Ii n r~ r!(>('l inn hi'~ r
'Vhi ch nrc indecJ jn alde ? \'/hut is a <lcclinalik ,\·vrJ ?-an iH Jc .
c!ia1<ble~
WJ ,at is r:.rsini: 1

·-:,',-i

.{

1

10

11

F II ACTI CA L LESSONS IN

ll:NOLIS!l GRAMMAR.

L ES SON IV.

What is a noun 1 H ow many ki 11d Ho f nouns nrc th.~re 1 V:h;,t
is n co mmon n(1t: n 1 'Vhat jg a p rnpt' r nou n 1 \ \"L:1t p:i.rt of
spe c l'l1 arc na111 c.:; u f th i n g~ 1 ' Vha t i."'! a C•1ll l'c fi \' e n() u n ?- an
nlJ:.- l ract nou n '~-a ve rba l 11 0 1Jn 1 /\ n : t li•·.':\c nou n'I 1•n •pe r or c1Jm·
nwn l \Vhat A cc idents bclon[; to now1 .:; 1

Q UESTIO~S.

Of N 01m s.
[t~ e vl ew tho tw o prec erU ng Lc ~~o n ~ . nrttl a ns wer th e quest io n.".J

A NO U N is the name o f a ny pe r son, µlace, or
thi ng ; as, J ohn, L ondon, book .
No un s a re of two kin ds, l'ro11er 11nd Gamm on.
A P rop er N onn is the n a m e a ppli ed to a n individual on ly ; a s, TVa shi11g ton, Al/;an y , the llu dso n.
A Commo n JVon n is a n:lrn e appli ed to a ll things
of th e s a l\le so rt ; as, man, clw ii', table, boo!<.
OllSEHV A'rION ~ .
U fl <le r cnmm o11 no tu iR nn: usuall y rankc' d,
l. Cullrct ivr 11o u!1P., or 110uns of n rnltit lli.l c ~ l\ f'. 1 nrm y , p eople.
2. Ahstnict nouus, or names of qunl itic::i ; a ~, pi cty1 wi ckedness.
3. 11erbal n o un~. or names of ac tions ; us, reaJi uy, wn'. ti,,g,

sleeping.
H .J. STJl ATlON'.-E \'C ry tl1i ng of wh ic h n. porso n ca n ~Jleltk, h e:u , or think,
h l'l1' t'- n:1 mc : th n t na11 1c in gn11 nnwr b1 cu ll c 1I a 11111111 . Ntt11i d:i c; o 11rnw H lo ttll
!liln g:s u f t h o. " n 111 e s u rl, flr c l a::1~ 1 111•c cu ll ed Co ·11111t111L t1111ttis i zt s , .fllcw , t iJ U111 frn, duy ,

cit y. co 11.11l r !/.
N it1n f" ~ 11pplh:tl on ly to in1!i \·i d11 11 l~ of n s o rt or c b~!'t, it.n d 11 o t comm n n 10 ft l l.
it.ro cidl c 11 )'r op er tto1111 .!f : 11 .~, .lnltn, Lucy , F1 i1lii H, Th1111t1•s , L on do n , !·~ n::-la 11d.
Commun n o un :. , t hr n , d b l i 1i~ 11 \ 1 h :-i nrrs o r d rl !'li !- c ."I ; J1 ropc r no u n ~ d i~ 1 \n~ n i is il \11 ·
di\' icln al:f. T hus, the nonn " _l/au " is th e 1w 111 c "f a c ht ~S or !ipCt"i C:'!, ttnd I ~
11.p pll c il cq na ll y to 1tl l, o r ls co 11,ino ll to 1dl 1ho..1 i11 tli vidu 1d $ In that cl ns~ . But
"John " is n nu mc th n t be Ion cs on ly to ce rta in lncl iv h luul s of th at d ClSS, u nll nn t

r ir r: r ,

h1 uth c r:i ; \I \ !4 tht)rt'forc no t ' 'cmu n o11 !J u l f 'n1/1 t:1'. •
'J\. w o rtl tl utt m rt kct1 sen ~ l' n fla a n art icl e, (J r 1ho p hrn.:ie 11p ca l: 1{, 1 ~

ll

nuun ;

ts, A man ; l s pe ak o ( m1J ruy .

To ]\ ouns belong P erson, G en der, lYumb el', a n<l
Cas e.
• T he ,, ord " prope r" me irn ~ " n ot h ,:Jo n ;:i n l? to mor e, not co m111 o n; noting
ft.fl

lnfl i v lJ1rnl." - .1ohn1l'ln .

'

.,.,~~ ,1

EX EHCI SES.
l'd i nt out tli e no11 11s in th e f.1llowin g !'lentc n cc s; :-; ;q w h :,· they :l r<' rwlln'i . '1\•:I
w h t>t hcr tl1 P y h re pru pe r 1Jr co111111on , 111111 wh y . J : \1.:rci s e :ot •i f th\ :; k iu tl 111a y Ito
t a ke n fn•m 1111 y lmo k.

The t:i.li lc a11 J chairs in thi s ror1111 b elc11J g to f:<Jl1er t.
The hou ses and streets in Nc' w-\« •r k :u e Lu · ~ , .,- t h:in
those in Ail.J:rny. Th e pri ncipa l cities in the ~ t at.: 0f
Ne w-Yu rk , are 1\ l'\\' -Yur k, All1a11 y, Ltica, 1: .. ci1 1·,i ··r,
an d UutT tl o. \V li cat, co rn , rye , :i.n d 0:1ts, urP Pxtf'11,in·ly
cul t ivat <·<l. Appl es, pear$, clll' rri l·s, pli11 11s 1 a lill ul he r
fJ'llits a Lo nn d. G eorge is olde r t han J vh11 ; th,· y l,u th
stu d y n.riLhn1 c.:tic, anll g ra.1nrnar.

LESSON V.
Of P er son .
[P. cvlcw the tli rct' pr t'CC11in::;

l....css o11 ~.

n ut1Hn o; wc ·r 1h c ' lllC'\: ti<1 n ,c .J

PEn s oN, in g ra mmar, is th e r cL1 t ion of a no un or
pronoun to wh a t is snid in di sco m se .

T he persons are three, First, S r:co nd, :ulll T hirJ.
A nuu n is in tl1cjirsl person, 1,·! 1en it d < · n uk .~ the
speal; e r or \Hi te r; ns, "r Pwil li:1\' C wri1 11• 11 i t."
A 11 oun is i11 tli c s1·r01u/ pCl's"n, \\' l1 0 11 it t! c 1101e s the
pe rso n or tlii11 g adt!n; ssed :i s, "T h u 11, ( ;ut!, 'ec st
m e"- " lfail J, if.)r·r1y."
A noun is in tl1c third perso n, w he n it de no te s the
pe rson or th ing s po ken of ; a s, " T ru th is mi g hty ."
'

'· l,

';

ENGLISH GRAMMAR .

Ons. -Tbefirst and the second pernon can bel ong only to noun•
denoting persons, or things regarded as. such ; because p ersoos
only can speak or be spoken to. T he th.ird person may belong
to nil nouns ; be cause every obj ect, whclht: r p cr•ou or tbing, muy
be spoken of.

Nouns denotin g f emales are F em£n ine ; as, woman,
girl,-quecn, lioness.
Nouns de noting neithe r males n or f emales a rc
1Veuter ; as, book, house, field.

IL LUST H. 1\ T lON.- P cn!!ON 1111tkcs no c 4Jwi;o ei th e r I n th e me nnln,:: or tho
fonn of t\ nou n, !Hi t si m pl y Uc no tes th e 11muncr in \\' hi c h it h ust:tl; su tlrn.t Ih a
tHlln e 11 n 1111 , w lllw ut ch11 n ~c. lll fl }' ho l n t il e fi r:, l pcn11 111, or th o sec ond, or lhtt
third . a ccti n ling n~ It d i· ruHe~ th o spc u ke r , tl rn 1>c r:-on ~ lti•k e n

111,

or lh c

jl(; f :)Oll

l\l oreovc r, n ~
to,hs ~c ltl m n c xprossc d, ( th ~ prnnu un I o r llwu l1t·i11 g usc t1 in it~ s teud ,) u noun
l s: v ery 1'cltlurn in the first pl;;"rs1m, 11 01 often in th e isec1 rnd , nnd 1t l 1n o~ t never in
eit her, u nless it be n prn 1wr n111111, or a c11 n1111o n noun J1Cn<11 1ifi e1J. It se f'rn »
th crethrc n 11sclC!<~ w iu to 11f ti me to m enti on t he perso n of n 11u1111 in p:ir~ i ng,
unl e!\s It 1s In 1hc first or se<: •HHI penw n, wh ich wil l not lrnppen more lh tt n once
i nn th ou~n n i l times . For thil; rt n!<O n, th e m fmt l 11H c1 f p cr sun ns n prc11H! n y of
th e no un , rn tty Ue omi tted In pa r11lng, e xce pt w h en it I~ v f th e litst or scomid
person, nlwuy~ tilkln~ il fo r grn ute<l t\mt lt Is of th e third , unl c~s ulht: rwl s.~ me utioncll . Th e di!'! tin ctio n of nonu s Into proper 1wd c 11111111011,11111y also he n1111 tted,

or th i ng spok e u o f.

t h e n 11 111 c 11 f 1lu.1 speaker or uf tht1 1•e rgt 111 t1 JH1k e n

· t.cca usc no use is um<l c (Jf tho tfo tinc tion in th e co ninructl o n of n sentence.

I

I
I
·1

11

13

rnAEJTICAL LESSON!! IN

12

QUESTIOKS.
W bnt is person I How mnny pc r~on s nro th ere l Wl1nt doe¥
th e fi rst denote I- the second 1-the third I T o whnt sort of nou 11 s
do the fi rAt and the second person be long i Why I To wha t. does
the third bcl,,ng I Why I Does person mnk e any differen ce i11 Ibo
roenn i11g or the fonn of the noun l ·whn t lhe11 does it denote I Is
th c nan1e of the epcakcr, or the person spoken lo, often mentioned I
' YIint words arc used inst end of them I

LE SS O N VJ.

Of Gender.
(Re, •lew th e tw o preceding L ossonM, o.nd nnswer th e qne8 tlon e.J

is the di sti nction of nouns with rega rd to
Sex. T here are th ree genders, the llfasculine, Feminine, and 1Yc11te1·.
Nouns deno tin g males are Masculine; as. man,
boy,-ki11g . lion.
G E ND E R

There are three ways of di sti ng uishing th e se xes.
l.
J..fasc.
Bachelor
Beau
J3oy
Drnlher
Duck
B11ll
Drake
F ather
F riar
Gander

Dy Jiile re n t word s ; as

F em.
maid
bell e
g irl
sister
cloe
cow

duck
moth er
nun

goose

.H ase.
H art
H orse
Husband
King
Ma ster
Nephew
llurn, buck
Son
Stag
Uncle

F em .
rc10

m are

wi fe
q11 c(· fl

rni st rcsg

ni ece
e we

<l augh ter
hi nd
a un t

2. By a diflerence of T ermi n a tion ; as,
Fem.

},Jase.
Abbot
A ctor
Arbiter
Dnron
B ridegroom
D uke
E mperor
Enchant er
E xecutor
H eir
.Hero
H ost

Jf'em.
jewess

nct ress

!Jfa.1c.
J ew
Lion

nrbitress

P11tron

patroness
peeress
poetess
p rincess
Bhc plwrdcss

abbess

barn11 ess
bride
duchess
· em press
chchnntres•
cxer.u trix:
h l:il"l.:!'-.S

li C'roi11c

P eer

Poe t
Prince
Shepherd
Sorcerer
Tutor
V i:-:ctmnt
Wid owe r

li• 111 c~s

Rorcc r e ~ ~

tu tor es.-,
vi ~co 1111 f.e~s

widu w

h1)!':! tess

3. By prefixing an other wo rd ; as,
.!Jf asc.
A cock sparrow
Ah~ goat

F em.
A !tm •parrow
A she gout

; .1~.~

~··· .J

14

l

PRACTICAL LESSONS I N

Fem.

Ji{asc.
A man ecrnmt
A male c!JilJ

A ma id servant
A f emale child
F em ale des cc n<l un ts.

lifale desce11<lnnts

ODSERV .A TIO NS .
1. Some nouns nre eit he r masculine or f eminine; nR, parent,
6 ,.. rl'ant, 11 ei.1huo r.

Such arc sometimes said to Le uf !lie

I

LESSON VII.

Of Number.
(11.!!Vi t.•\\' the three precetl1 11 g L eiswn'I, and

2. Some nouns naturally neuter, nrc converted Ly a fi ~u re of
ept:ecli iut1> tlie ma~cu l111 c 11r thu fcmi11in o ; afl, whon we eay of t~ rn
11

Jlc i:; se tting;'' <if the moon,

11

G8~EHXL

She is cclipsell ;·' a11<l of a s lup

"S/11Jt ~nils.''
!J . Auirnals of inferior size, or whmm sex is not kn ow n, arc cifu~ n

spoken of as neuter.
crcn.turc.

Thus, of a cliild we may say,

" fl is

n lovely

Q lJESTIONS.

I
"

Whnt is gende r 1 How many g enders are there i What does
the mll•Ctili11 c gende r dcnole 1-tbc ieminine I-the ne 11i t' r I Wl11lt
nou ns nrc •aid to be mascul in e f 'Whal, femi nine i . What, 11c11ter i
] fow many ways nre th ere of dislingui;l1ing t l1e sexes I \\' l1at arc
thev 1 Wh e n n nou n de11olcs eithe r a male or a female, of w hnt
gti;Jt..'r j~ il ~onwl i111c'i !:laid to he~ )V la:n th e sex < f a1Ji11ia1 3 i8 11ot
knowll, of what ge 11d c r arc ll1cir 11anws ~
1

EXEl'-C ISES.
1. [n th e preceding Jbt"', tell the fc 1ni11ino of cnch nH\~cu lin o noun, anJ the
111nsc n llne of cnch fo 111 iniuc.
~ . T ell 1h <: p ·1rt nf s peec h nrnl gfHHler o f tho foll o wing wortl;;.: th us, Jw ust,

noun , IH!UlL•r; boy. a noun , 111 ascu lin e 1 &c.

IJ\)ll~ C',

o.
.

l111y, sl<1nc, Loot, co w, fath er, mr> lhcr, siste r,
Lrullicr, da11glitc r, au11t1 nephew, niceC', uncl e, sl1 e11l 1erd,
paper, pen, -i11k, parent, neighbor, fricml, li on, widvw,
bnro11, ncgru, hcru, house, tree, bird, mvuse, fly, &c.

ll u~ quc!!tiOn!! .)

·I

r

l

I

HULE.

The plural is commonly fun1 1cd by addi ng s to the
singn l:1r; ns, 1100 /.- , l1ook~.

I

11

Rfl'i\\' cr

Nu~rnJrn is that prope rty of a noun by which it
expresses one, or more th an one. Nouns kt \"C lico

numbe rs, the Singular and the Plural. The Singular denotes one; the Plural more tl11 u1 1111e .

cv111111 0 "

9c11dcr.

s u11 ,

15

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

~PEOIAL

H ULES.

('

l. Nouns ins, sh, ch soft, z, :i:, or o, funn the plu ral

by adding es; as, frliss, Jlliss cs ; Drush, brushes;
mritch, matches; .fox,Jo:ces; hero, heroes.
Exe. Nouns in co, io and yo, and i11 cit Roundi ng k, haves only;
/\ J.:o cirn 'o
h~~ rrt11fo,'f; l111l othl' I' 11rnrn~ i11 o nfter n COll1'l'•l1ant now co1n1n1" tly
1

a s c11111co, rmnrns; fdio,julio.'i; 1no11arc/1., ·m onarchs.

n<ld

es;

u."',

!lrotlo, grultoes; l,IJrO, l!Jroe.'f,

J:c.

2. Nouns in y afte r a consonant, chang e y in to
ies in the plural; as, Lady, lrzrlics.
Nouns in y after a vowel, foll o w the genC'ral ru le ;
as, Day, days .

3. Kouns inf or.fe, eh:1n ge .f or/c into
plural; a;;:, Loaf, loaves; life, li ves .

'l'cs 111

tlie

Exe. Dwarf, oca rf ; brief, chief, grief; kcrcJ,ief, handkcrchi t: f,
miscl1i cf ; gulf, turf surf; fife, stri ft! ; proof, ho1Jf, roof, re pro.if, follow the general rule. Also noun" in .if hnve l ht ir plural in s; a•,
muff, muffs; except •iaff, which Lao •omctimes 1tat>es.
1

·'··

...·:,·

17

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
PltACT!OAL LESSONS IN

16

'7. Some nou ns arc plural in form; but in construclion,cithc r
OBSE RVATIONS._
1.J.They nre lht. f"

I ar I)' .
1. Some nouns fo rm. tI 1c }JI urn I 1rrcgu

1owing:-

J'lural
teet h
gccBe

QUESTION S.

n1ice
l ice

\\'hn t is mcnul by number I Huw ma ny num be rs nre tli f' rc I
Wlia t d oea th e sing ular denote I-th e plural l l lov; i• the plur:1 l
commonl y fo rm ed ? \Vlien i~ the Jilural fon1H:d Uy addi11L;" n.?
1lo1w do 1wun:; in y after a con~una nt , 1~ irr n tl u.~ p lural ?-aftt;r n
vowel !-no 11 ns in /or/el When Ji;cvc prope r nan.,,. n plural !
What 11ou us arc moo tly sing ular I \\"h;c t nuu 11s nrc j1l urul o«ly !
What 11 01111• nre al ike iu l><> th nt11nbers 1 \\' ha t no11 ns arc l'l::ral

Sing ala r.

!\Ian

men

Woman

women

Guuso

children

.1l11l1 80

foet

J.f1U SC

Ox
Si11gular.
n r.. tl 1er (one of th e snm e famil y)
Brother (one of lhe 8ame soc iety)

tl1 0

pence

Pcrniy
Plural.
b rot hers
brethre n

sows or swine
cl ico
dies

Suw or swin e

D ie (for gnming)
Di e (fu r coi11i11g)

in form , liut eith t.: r sing ular or pl urul in C()J 1.-; tructio111

EX ERC I SES.

nid s-de-cnmp

Ai<l -dc-ca mp
Cuu rt-m nrt ial
Cui1 ~ i1 1 -gcr n1nn
. 1 . '·

courts -nmrtial
cou si1ls-gcrm an

fatl 1N• m-law, &c.

Fatl1 er·J11· H'\\ , o.:.c.
.
..
·w r ls from foreign Jnngungcs sometimes re tain the ir or< g1nal

9
- ·

(J

8. The a rticl e a ()r an before a t:1 i11i; ular nuun, is Jropped bcforo
pl ural; as, aiugu lur, a 1nan. ; plural, uun.

f::ii,,g11lar.
-.l'outh

I'lnral.

ChilJ
Foot

1

l

. ti

l

ll '

·· 1 As n rrcnernl rule, n<,uns in 1.an or ou 1av e a in ie I-' un ,
p I tllol. •
C'
' l
"
tlJ
bul i s, in the si ng ular, i~ changed in to es; ex nnd 'IX rn o 1ces;
into i; n~,

Si11 r1-

Plu r.

Arcnn11n1

nrcn111\

si n~

gular or plural; a~ , am e1ttb , 111 eu ns, n ew.,, ri c.:fte3, pa i1rs; a11J tlic
nn 111cs of sc i en ce~ ; a.il, matb ema t ic.'{, cth ic3, &c.

Sing.

Plitr.
crises
npi c~

auto matn.
Automr•lon
Axis
nxcs
},1 ag us
1n11gl
. P roper nnm rs h:.vc the plural , only · when they refe r to n rnce
3
or fttmil y; ns, the St ev-C1rts; or t o sevcra l per8·uns of the snme

nnrn c ; 38 , the twelve Cresars.
.
.
_
4-. N n1ucs of m etal s, virtues, v i ce~. nn<l lhmgs we1gh~d . 01
DJcasnred, nrc mos.Lly sing- ular ; ns, r;ol~, rruekues.~, le111pera uct, milk,
111gar, &c.

6. S0mc nouns are plur:tl only; aa, annals, d,1/a, bellvird, .ms-

I. Put tb c following: words lu the µlum l, nnfl gil'e the rule fo r f11n11in ~ il ;
lh u:-!. , " C!ta fr, pl ural ch a irs ." HuLw: , .. Th o plurtt l is co 111 111 0 n ly fu rmi:tl 1 " ,";(,c. ;
"F(! r, , plural, f uxr.s." It. 11 Non n!4 in s, s h ," &.c.

Chair, fux , talilc, cat, uC>g, hvrsc, house, lir111d , fi nge r,
:urn, b oy , girl; cl ish, c:: ht1reh , Lox, mi ss, sky, h otly, k t'_r ,

chy, t oy, leaf; kni fo, wi fe, lon. f. An ap pl e, (011~ . H,
nbvvc,) a pear, a c::h erry, r1 bu ~ li, a cht1 rn h 1 a IH'il.
2. V\'rlte or
;1rticlc :

~pell

the sl ngul1Lr of th e ((,Jl owj ng plurttls, nnd prefix

lit•~·

in dcfl-

11\1 0

}'"li es, Lox es, l eaves, brm,h es, kniv es, ma rshes , hays,

tables, lJ11 shcs, trees, dogs, du cks, geese, \\'i ves, <lu t ie$,
churd1es, rn atcli cs, mice, day s, k ey~ . st11,·c::s, &c.

6. Some nouns llJC

1
t
t
alike in both numbers; us, deer, ~ ieep, r01J •

;.~

:J . Tell th e pl ur1d of the follow in g irregul a r noun s :

}\fan, wom:rn , chii<l, ox , tooth, fo o t, goo~r, prnn ;-,
m ouse ; fo t,be r-i n-law , m ot he r -in-law, court-111ar tial , fi ,; her m an, was he rw o man, co usin -ge rm an, &c.
4. Tell th e gu11 dcr ani l n11111 l1e r nf th e fol\ owl 11 ({ nn11n'- ; g:ivc ti n~ pltirl\l :uu1

san, &c.

.· .:J

t} , ti ru! o fur 1;1ri11 !11 1-{ ii ; thus, "ll n11"'e," n 11o nn , 11 0 11ttr, isi n i:,: u liu; pl n r l\I~

hou se s.''

.•.;

"1-:...

•'I

"The plurtd i:'l con 1111on l y fo r111 c<l 1" &.c .

1almon1 die.
' I~

i i" : ;,

18

PRACTICAL LESSONS Il'f

ENGLISH GRAMMAR .

House, boy, stone, boat, fath er, king, kn ife, aunt,
empero r, governess, pen, lioness, baron, siste r, brother,
lord, box, bush, rush, goose, bachelor, doc, bride, fly,
loaf, study, conch, toy, mouth, watch, hero, d 111rch, tree,
\V:ty, \v ifi..·, l1aH: fi~h, t:tb1e, rnother, a11ple, eherry, ,\::c.

Proper names generally want the plural.
noun is parsed etymologicall y, by
telli ng its gen der, number, and case ; thus, Lady 's, a
noun, femini"ne', in the possessive singular.
PARS!NG.-A

OBSEHVATJON!'l.
I . 'Vl 1cn ihc nominati ve sing nlar c nd .i.; in S.'(,ur ldh., r qf{a l" imib r
~ound, tlie s after the a pos trophe is somcti!Ja~~ 0 1niltt'd, in or.J,_· r to
nYoid t oo close a l':IU<.'C eB~ i o n uf l1i s~ ing ~ o und 8 ; a<:i. "f,1r gi-,od n"~n·
e.akc ;" "for cnn rSt.: it·11 c e' tiU.kc.n This howev er is ~. d d 1 i 1 n done· , 1inh · ~A
the word follt1\\'i11 g lw:;i11a wi th s; tliu=-, w...: do JJ Ol ~ny " th e p riDco'

LESSON VIII.
Of th e C nscs of 1Youns.
(llcvi c \V the three pre ce ding L C' ssorn1, and a n3w c r tho QllCstio n:!..J

CASE is the state or conditi on o f a noun wit h respec t to the other words in a sentence.
Nouns haYe three cases ; v iz., the Nominative,
P ossessii:c, nnd Objective.
Th e 1'701ni n(l/ive ca se common ly expresses that
of which something is sa id, or declared; as, rr1i e sun
shin es.
The P ossessi·1:c denotes th at to whi c h somethin g
helon gs ; as, The lady's fan.
The Old ectivc den otes the obj ect of some act ion
or rclai_\on; as, James assists Th omas; th ey li ve in

I

rage> ," lll l'~\ll tl1 u
will be di ffcre"L

~ fune

L!:iee

t11 i1:g. Sornetiilli-'i\ bo\\.t! V<: r, tl 11 ~ mea11i11 g
Eng. Gr. SS, 3 : A n_ & l'r. Ur. l 7G J

QUES'1'10NS.
·wi.:it i" case ? How many caecs ha\'C 1101n·1"? \\"! 1n l Jo<'~ lhe
IJ om inati Ye cae.e c xp re~s ?- the pussc8sivc ?--tl1e ~·hji~ct iv c ? \\"lint
two ca se~ are alike? liow is th e posi:~.s;, i\"e si1 1g l:lar furrn ('d ~ ­
the pMsi>ssivc plural I

lC'\.KRCISEs .
Gender, ..."fumber, and Case.
T,·I! 1h e gen• kr, nu111 1Je r, nn<l c11se of f11 e fo!l11wi n g H11 1111s ; t'h 11 :!, "FuOier,"

Albany.

The nominative and o\,jc c tive or !101 111 S a re alike.
The posscssi1-e singular is forn 1ecl by adding an
a post roph e :ind s to the nom inat ive ; as, .lo/m 's.
\Vhen th e plur;ll ends ins, t he possess ive is fo rm ed
by add ing an apost rophe on ly; as, Ladies'.
KOUNS

Nom .
Poss.
Obj.

t

feather," bu t " the p rincc's feathe r."
2. The objective case, " .,. ith nf Lrfc )re it, i ~ g ct1 tra lly tq1:i\·a1 (' :i t
to the p0!)Sl'8:::iYe; thus, '' tl1e ra.g0 o.f the f.11ran t,'' a11.J ., t !IL' t,11rur1(.,

La•l .Y
Lady's
Lady

Al ~ E

Tll US DE CLINED ;

Lad ies
L ad ies'
Lad ies

J ohn
John's
Juhn

ll 110 1111,

*
:tn t,

In

ma:sculin(i, in the lltf1111uati ve !'.li11gula r . •

n ~ ing

th e above

ir th e pu pil lm

<~'l:e rcis o ~ .

tf11q..:l1t

to

l'11 r::-e the

1101111 :.c .

i t will snvn n1t1 c h lim e , wh id1

till}'

e v e ry

1lii11~ hc l 111· ~ i11~

:di i rnruirt ·
in tho
r1rd ,.r n:": 11 h r•W'.

to t h e

fowcs l w 1• rd :'l pc1s ~ ibl c ;a ud HI s11y th e m h )w rt ys in l h (l ~ ;1111 e

j..;

111H11 1

Fn r t h e SHll lO rt· 1tson , tl1•.: 1!1 !'-it in c tinn o f nnnn" i n 1., 1 1r n p~· r hnd c " t1;r11 11 n lP l•Y Im
<•lllitt c d . .t\o tl n "' p+_-r :oH• ll l1u?J nn!h lng to do w ith tht· f 11 rr.'I. .. 1 ll 11 1.•un , hut o nly
wifh its U$t; 1t n (f n ~ noun~ 1u'u Hlrnos t & lw u;: ~ of tlu! 1liird pe r.':l1tn, rh c 11 w n: i.,1t

of person

t111ly

be ondlfcd; !Ju t wh e n th e nou n is i n th e first or tf1 e

"O tt, it s h ould IJe

rn e nti u n ~ d.

s 1~ co n d

tlf' r ·

It wil l al so he a prnfilnble ex er ci :h: f 1ir ld1n to
fl.!~i g n a reaso n l( ir e v ery p1t rt of his de ... rrip li on; \ltu:s, J.'r.A tlt cr , n 1101111, l ~C1 l\ls e
the 11 ame of nu olij ec t; m<uculin e, hecf\ U! e il tl f:' note s the ffl(jle sr z ; tt i nf!l! la r ,
because it den(it e ~ !Jut one; pl urn I, fatlur6 . Rule," The pluml is c o1rnuonly
formed by tt.d<ling If to th e sing ul a r."

PnACTIC.AL LESSONS IN

20

21

ENGLISH GRAMM,\R.

~·

F ather. mother, si ste r's hu soand, Lrothcr's wifo, uncle\ lw11~f', T om's books, city, vi rtu e's rewarJ, brother's
wiJo\\', \V ns hi11g ton tb 0 li e ro, th e 8ta t cs m:m, ti n: fathe r
of his cn1111try , carpenter, farn1cr, bw yer's fe es, tt:ac he r's
rn :11111al , sd1nlar's nssi ;;ta11t, laJi cs' gloves, beans, peas,
p l 11 111s, c lH:rr ies, h ouses, land s, ri vers , rn ou11t.:1i11s, sun,

~ - An. i.~ u ~ed h1· forc a 11ou·t'l or sil1,11t /,; n:o, ~· In

3. A or an iH Wit·d lwfu rP. tli l! si119u!ar 11u111 1J \:r ti11\y ~ the, Lo..:ft•rC

l',H•HINt:. -Tlie arti c le is parseJ b,· stalitw \\' lietlier
it is Jdi11ilc or i11d di nite, am! n1e11-tiu11i11g'°t l1e 11 v11n
t o wlti c li it belu11µs ; thus ,

[ Rtn·lew the wholo thoron g ld y from Lh o l 1 egl nnln ~ . llnswcri11g nccumtel~· llll
the qu c~tio u ~ . J

Of I li e A r·ticlc.

AN A1tT1 c r.i:: is a ,,·ord put before n. noun, to show
the mann er in whi c h it is used .
The re :ire two arti cle s, a or an , and the.
A o r an is called the lndrjinilc Article, bec:rnse it
shows th a t the noun is 11 nt lirnit cJ to a pa rti cula r
p e r5o n ol thing; as, n lii ng, i . c. , any liin[i .
'[lie is c~il l c d th e ])1:Jln'ile Article, because it s li o,,·s
that th e noun is lilll ilcd to a particular p<'rson or
tl 1i 1ig; :1s. Ili c Kw g , i. t! . , .~o mc 7;ar l iculu r King .
A noun witltout :in Artic le is taken in its wiJ cs t
se nse; as, 1Han is n1 ortal; i.e., .All mankind : Or,
in an indefinite se nse; a~. T here are m en destitute
of all shame, i.e., some men.
'17ie is somctiin cs put bdurc a uoun denoting the s peci e~; as, tlie
oak,· th e lion.

OB SERVAT ION S.
1. A is u:o;ed Lcf11re n. co1 1 ~011ant; as, .11 book, a. lwuse, a tree.
sound as if Lt·g inn ing- wit h the con ~onnnt y; th ue,

..A 111til, a
e>dopy- pronouuced as if written, a y1mit, a y11se, a yeulvgy.

. A is

a1.1

nrt ic le, i11d di 11i tt• , and lJt'l1111g~ to " f1o ok

Q UESTlOX S.
'What i• an arl icle ? )Tuw many arti ck~ nre tlH'r<'? \\'lial i-( A
or An cal led 1 Why 1 \\' hat i; '/'h e rall l'd 1 \\' J.y 1 Jn ,d,at
SC'n~e i:-1 a noun will1 <1 ut :Hl articl e talH·n ? '\rli ilf i.-i . A ll :"(·<l h . :f•Jrt~ 1
What is An used bdu rc 1 llow is the arti cle par.<cd !

L ESS ON IX.

A h:o, lJefure word8 lwgi m1i11g wi th u long, und eo, lJccause

011 lt011r.

t:illn.: r tli c ::.ingular ur the t1lt1ral.

. .A_ hvok.

m oo n, stars, &c.

a;r,

they
a

tt.U ,

KXEJ~CJSl:S .

Is

it

Jiropt.:r tu .·m.Y a man ,

or nn

u apple, or a11

Jll an 1
HJ'Jil'~?

nnJ why 1
and wl 1y?

a JiuuSt\ or 1111 l wu~e 1 und wl1y?
a hour,

or nn hou r 1 and why 1

I'n· f1x ll H: i11 ddi11i lc nn id c in th e pr1111er

fo r111 ,

to tlic fo llo\v\ nc: w .. r,j ..,

Chai r, tal1k , linr sc, cart, ]J(1uk, ho uSl', gard,·11 , bir1],
o\-vJ, l'gg, e ar , l'} t', tree , cow, unit., u ~e , 0ld nian, ynu1 1g
Jllan, wur.J , b1ok , p<>l , Le1H:l1 , <•p e n wa g1>11 , r11t111 d qune,
o! J hat, renny t rumpet, ice h ouse, &c.
Corrrct tho li d/owing crrurl'I , nnd give u rnos on fvr th e chnu~ e; par.~{' :he :-ir:ir!t'.,

An cup, an <luor, a apple, an pear, an hat, an wi g, :'ln
eulogy, n honor, an crow, a ostrich, an pen, a ugiy
beast, an pretty ocast, an pretty thing, an huge m on~tcr,
a upper room, &c.

LESSON X.
OJ th e Adjective.
AN AorncTrVE is a word used to ci11alify a substan ti ve; as, A good boy; a square box; ten dollars.
He is poo1·. To lie is base.

i

r.

ENGI.l~H

PRACTICAL LESSONS JN

Arljectiv es denoting number, are called Numeral
adj ectives. Of th 'SC there are two classes; tli e Cardimtl anrl the Ordinal .
The Card,i nal are one, two , three, &c. and expres.<i
how many-written in figures, thus, l, 2 , 3 , &c.
The 0 1·thna! arc j1:rsl, secouJ, Lkird, &c., and express which one of a numb er-written in figures,
tlrns, 1st, 2rJ, 3d, 4th ,&<:.
1LLU:5TR AT10N .- A l'i fJU n , nr the name ut a t hin~ being menrioncct brings beR>rc lh e 1ninU th o idea of the lni uf: ilSClf 1'li11s1 tho word •· hcirsc/' for example, Sllb'"g~ts the idea or the animal so called. Uut if w e wi::; h lo d escr ibe or poi nt
ou t a punicular hor!-lc m on.: defi nitely and to di:)lingoish it from others of t he same
Hpcc i c~, '-\"6 cwtnc...: t w1 t ll Ilic nam e or nou n a w on t cJ enofing som e propeny o r
<(Ua/ity by w!iic h it m ay be kuow n o r di s!i1 1g11ish e tl i as, u u. lilfl~ li or~c i" "an
oVJ honie ;" "u b/ad;. hursc, 11 ~c . \ Vords u::;ctl fur this purpose ere called Afljec·
ti\' CS, because th ey acld 10 or cu 111 1ef t wit h ttie noun th o idea of so m e qulllity or
pmp~ rty Lcluc:;.;ii1~ 10 i i. f:on 11.:1J m i; ~ seve ra l of lh esc m a y be joined wi1h the
same nuu n ; n,q 1 when we f:ay , "a littlt old &lack horse ;" " a $71/.0ot h whitt round
Hlou e i " u the b't'Ctl old way."
Jn nny phf"J.Se f\f RC'n!Pnr.c, the ridjcc ri\·ca q u olify in~ n noun m ay gc ncn:UJy bo
fotuH.1 lly 11rc fb:ing ll1r. phrase, 11 \ Vhat k irul of, 11 10 tl1 c no un in 1he form ofaques.
tion; ns, \ Vh al kin .J o f a hor se 1 \V ha.t kin tJ of u. Hlone 1 \ Vl1J.l kind of a way 1
T he word conta in in~ th e an~wcr to Ill e queRlion is an adjecti ve.
lt may a~i st the " you ng br.ginn cr " al.so ro r1! ni emb er that f:l won l which
m akes sense w it h th e word lliiu.f! afl<'r ir 1 it-1 011 atljt~ cti vu; 1l1us, good, bacl 1 lil~e,
r on11rJ, may be a<lj cctin'ff, hec.:<J.u:;c wD can 1:1a.y 1 a good lhini;, tt bad th ing, a little
tlt1ng, ...~ c.

numeral adjec tives are there? Wh a t are th e c:i.rJinal numbers)
What do they ex press ? ·what are th e ord in ,d numbers l V{hat
clo they exp ress? \Yh en do nouns !Jeto me adj ectives 1 Are adjec tives ever used as nounli? Of wh a t numl.icr are th ey considered 1

EXER CISES.
I. In tl1c follo wing excrclse.lcl th e pupil first puir.t tiut tJ 1e uollll'1, anU the n UH?
a<lj ec.live$ i arnJ tell how he knuw,:j Llt (:m tv L>c so.

A round table, a pretty dog, a li ttle mouse, n low
chair, a s mall book, a sharp kni fe , wh ite paper, dirty
books , ugly fac es , a beautiful flo\\" c r,•n. rich man, fresh
fish, a wil<l horse, a s hort man, au old ha t, a fie rce dog,
a good pen, a wise kin g, a n h o n e~t man, ta me raLbits ,
a fin e day , a s weet apple, :t lo ng stic k, a littl e luw dso mc
old woman, a thi ck square boo k , a large white cat, a
n ew book, a cl ean . white frock, a full cup, an e mpty
m urr
:::» a warm roo m , a w et towel, a col d rainy ni g ht, a
cloudy sk y , windy weather, hard fro s t, d ee p. snow.
2. In th e aboYe Exercises, let th e pupil take each nQun a..n.J p refix to it as m 11.ny
adjectives as he can think of, so n.s to m ake sense: us, fo r exam ple, "La.hi e,"
/Jigh tatllc, Uno tat.tie , long table, &c. &.c. , a.rid in rec iting put tli e c mpl ul.818 on lhe

adjective.
3.

OB SERVATIONS.
I. Noun s become a1l ject ives, wh en th ey nre used before other
nouns, to express I\ quality or property belo11g ing to them; as, e
gold ring ; a silver cnp ; sea w a te r; a hay field; a flower garden.

2. Adjectives a re often used a s nouns; as, "God rewards th e
good and puni shes the bad ." "The virtuous are the most hap·
py. " Adj ecti ves thus used are rega rded as plural, because they
deno te more th a n one.

QUESTIONS.
Wha t is nn arl;cctivc 1 What are n<l jec tives denoting number
called1 What is n. uumornl adlective1 How runny clttseea o(

GRAMJ\IAI!..

'°

L•~ t

him lake e!\c.h odjcctivo1 and ndd to

It~,

man y nou ns

RS

h e can think of,

make Bense ; as, h ro11mf," n round ball, a round hol.e, a round 14CtUr. , a.
row1d cuke, etc. , e.ntl put the emphasis on the noun.
i\.:lt to

LESSON XI.
Comparison

ef

Jl.djecl'ives.

[Review th e preceding L e.soon, and ans wer the quest.Jons. ]

CoMPARISON is that property of the acljectivc by
which it exp resses quality in different degrees in ob·
jects compared.

24

PR ACTI CA L

LE S~ON :!

IN

Adj ('ci ivcs kl.Ye th ree d eg rl·cs of c0mpa rison;
thl· Posit-i i; r, Cu m1.1,,-r1/ivc, and SllF~ n'ativc.

ENGLISH GltAM MAil.

J/ti,L(i•;c.

Cu11111<u-ul iL1e.

:Stt)~:a t i're..

wise, wiser, w·isest.

Good
Bad , e1·il or. ill
Little
Mu ch or m:1ny
Late
Nea r
Far
Fore
Old

Adje ctives of more than one sy llable are usually
comparell by prdixi11g more 01nri most; as , beauti-

G. J/ ud1. i:-1 apuli 1·d {o ti1in g -< 11·· i:.1l11'd "I' 111 1' .r .::.i( r, -, f , 1n r111.~1 , t. ,
ihosc tliat arc 11w"I._,,.,.( .{ /. h'lu'(-r aJ1ti ,•/if, ~ l a1· ~ :11•11l11 ·d to ;•1 r .-:1;~1.,
0111y; old1 r and (1/dt ·.-·t, LJ t: it lier pr' P •1r1J •1r Oti 11~/ s .

Thel'o siti"e expresses the qu:di ty s imply;
The Com11aro.tive exp resses the quulity in n hi!ihcr or lower
Ueg rcc in one objec t tlinn in ano t he r;

The : fopcr lul ire C XJHT~ s es th e quality in tl1 e hig hest or lowest
degree in (Hl c o l1j1 T t ctn npan:d with two or ni o r c .

.Iii adj eel iYcs of one sy !lab le, the Corn para t i \' e is
usual ly fo rm ed by adding er to the Positi ,·c; an d !l it·

SupcrlatiYe, by adding est; as, sweet, sweet er, sweetest;

be tter
worse
!...·ss
m ore
lat e r
ll('arer
far iher
fo rm e r
older or elder

b(' :< t
\ '.'ur ;.:; t

k· :t :--;t

m ost
b tes t or last
I l f' ~ r e s t or next
fa rthes t
for e mus t or fir'5 t
«ides t or eld es t

1

f ul, more bcaut-iJul, m ost bwuhjul.
QUESTTOJ'\S.
OllSE ilVATIO NS.
1. D issyll a blcs in le nftcr n mu te, are gencm lly compared by
er and est; as, able , abl er, rtblest . A fter n co nso nant y is chnng·
cd into i before er nntl csl ; as, dry, drier, driest ; lwppy, hllppitr,
ha11piest; J3ut y with n vowel before it, is not chani::eil; as; -gay,
ga ye r , gcty e«I.

2. Some a<lj ccti \'CS form ll1 c ~ 11p e rlat ive by ntldi ng mnsl to the
of th e v;o rd; as, upper, uppermos t . :So, undermost, f oremost, hindmost , u t most.

ell<l

3. \Vhen tli c pos iti,·c c nt!s inn s imple co nsona nt prece<lc<l by
a s ingle vow el, the consonan t is doubleil before er anded · as, hot,
holl er, hottest .
'
4. Some adjectives <lo not admit of compari son, viz:
lst. Such as denote num ber; ns, one , two; third, fourth .
2d.
fi gur e or shape ; ns, circular, square.
3d.
posture, or posit ion; as, perpendicular,

hori zonl al.
4th. Those of an absolute or superlntivc significatioo; as,
i ntc, perfect, universa l , chief, extreme, &c.
5. Some 11djectives are com pared irregularly, u follovl'I:

'·

\\Th a t is r o mp n r i ~on ? If ow m:iny <l e ~rrcs of r ompari so o or e
t!1crc 1 \V liat docs the pos itive dcnot r:- ?- the enrnp :-i.ra 1i·•c 7-U1f'
supe r lative? 1 f OW are HllJll O ~ )'I J al.J 1· s C"IH p:nt:d ?- wurdf' of m o r e
thnn 0111• ~y l!u\tl f• ? -di :-:. !-'y !J abl c s in / e n t'tc r n 111\it.(· ( - 1n 1.J a l't•'J" tt.
consu nnrit? \Vh a t f:(lr t o f ndjcc t iYes d oulJIP tlt1: final c o H ~ mi:tnt
er nn d es t? \ Vhnt ndj <~c ti vP ~ are nut (..' oinpared t \\that
u..lj6: tin. ·s ar f' cn111;.):1r,,d irn·gu la rly?
11ef'on~

P .HlS ri\'c;.-J\ djl' clin:s are p~1rsetl hy sl a1in::; lli f' ir
(if nu nw r ;1l ~) , tl1 c de gree of cornpa r!son ,a nd
the n ouns wlii,·h th ey rpmlify . If not compared, it
sho ultl be so slated .

cla~s

EXEilCI SE S.
1. Poin t 011t lh•; mliN f ir ·f's in tl1r

f.,Jlu\\· j n ~ f'X •' fd"'•~

i p .1n-i e r!i ,.-.m ; roJ!l i';, ;-c

lli e ni; ll111 q. a ~ood fa 1 l1·~ r; '' ( ;, >l)d ." 11n il· lj " l' li\'1', p<1.-;i t [\' C d f" !! f ~<' 1 quul!Ll •·"'I "f.;l.

th r r 1 ' ' r o 1111 m.n ' d ilT• ',t!11! arl y , g1oo1 /. /1,.ffr r . b,.st .
~- l'oi nt u1"11 t!u··
Ctl..'if.'.

1 w 1111.s 1

lL'i dircdcd; tli 11.~,

awl par-:-u· 1!1(' 11"1 ti y t rt! in !! !l w ir ~1 · nrl ··r, ni u 11 l 11: r , :toil
a ne un, 1JM '.ie llln1 ~ · 1 iu tile 1H.1rni1 w1 i , · c .. 1 11 ~1i1 ;1 r.

11 li\lh c r.' 1

A good father , a wi ser man, a more beautiful fti.rl,
~

.~
'

!
I

I

Ir;
1

I
.1

:j

i!
i

i
I·

ENG L ISH GRAMMAR .

wild horses , young colts, a sweeter apple, the wi:o; est
pnnce, green trees, th e h o nes t far 11 1< : r ~ , tht: 111 u~ t \' irt u
ous people, th e ri ch er tradesman, tlw be tte r scho lar, the
ta llest g irl, th e fin er s h eep, large oranges , th e n1 e rri e ~t
fellows, th e old soldier, pretty du gs , a 11 ug ly ca lf, th e
tam es t rabLi ts, th e little mou se , the lon ges t s ti ck, a
wid e r tal,l e , a mo st e:velle nt thin g , th e hi g hes t h ouse ,
the mo s t fruitful g ~ird e n .

PEitSONAL PRONOUNS.

NuM£r.A Ls .-fo11r m en , th e fo11 rth day, s ix <lny s, th e
se venth day, 365 days, te n horse s , th e fir s t tim e, of four
hou ses th e first is of wood, th e second o f s tone , th e third
and the f.n1rth of urick.
3. Turn back ruh.I go ove r th e udjecliv c s in th e e.\" erdse, J. csSon X.. in the, same
wuy.
4 . In bolh ex,,.rci sc~.rh: rn ~ e f:iOL.~1 la r nouns info plural, nnd pluruJ inl o sin:! hl ar ;
give til e rnle for Iii•' pl u ral , a nt1 tl1e o rf' atl 1h e plira ...;i' so c liat1!,;Pt1 i thu 1-t, f 'atlu:-r,
pLfu1/1en1. 11 T hc plurnl ls commo11ly fonn ctl by uddmg B lo Liie ~ in i,:-uJar , " K°"'I

./al.hers

II

~
i
'•

~

Of the Prononn .

A PHo;:-;ouN i~ a w o rd use d i11 s t cad of' a 11 <11in ; as,
J ohn is a go od boy; lie is dili ge nt in his studi es,
Pro11ou 11s 1nay be d i \·idcd int o fo ur classes; P t>no11.ul,
Rd11fi v1· , /iifcrr ogati1: e, an d .fldjective.

,,11

CO!l H('f jlll ' ll tly di~ a,;! l"l.'i' itlile r··11111ir i1J11 of Ille lltJUIL S

ll .J. { !~' r HA'J'ION. - l' 1 : 0NorN~ IH'C 11 s 1· d ~i n11 1 ! y 1•1 U\'oid lhe f• >O frt•q•11·11r nrt•

!I

11

·'

I.

f1 1r

wl11 i.'. h tli ry S l <1 11d .

Tt11 1~

in <;tf•ad of !'ll)'ill!! , .ll1h 11 i 1~ a goud lf11y; J lJhll i s tllli!.!;1·11l in J oJi,. s s111dj, ·i-;; "''' 11 s.
U1e pr11nnnn. a nd"" ·\' a:-1 ah11\'t'. " .T nh11 i ~

.~

XII.

'I

•I

Pntso:s-AI. Pronouns are those whi ch disting\lish the
perso n by th ei r fo rm. They arc eitl1er simple or compound.

Th e s imple personal pronouns arc J, thou, h.e, site,
plurals, we, ye or you, tlt ey .

it; with their

I i:i of th e fir.:., ~ p c rsc,n, n11d <ltnvlc.3 the spuikf'r.

'l'lwu i ~ of llHJ f\l'C(i nd pt r~o 11 , a11J de11 0U·~ t l1c p f' r.'ifin aJdrl'.<;Sfrl.
1.ft\ she, it , are uf the thi rd p t:rson, a11d lkuule ll1 e pcrSOll or lli ing
spok c11 of.

The personal pronouns arc thus declined :
SINGULA R .
Nom.

I. m . or

2. m.

or

3. masc.
3. f em.
3. neut.

f
J

P rss.

Ubj.

/o.-om.

mme

me
thee
him
her
it

We

Thou

tl1in c

He
She
It

he rs
its

his

You

PL U RAL.
P oss.
Obj.

ou rs

yours
They theirs
They the irs
Th e y theirs

II S

you
them
them
them

OilSErtV ATIO NS.

LESSON

r

I

27

PRACT:CAL LESSO NS lN

;i l!Orn l h11y; Ii '!. i ~ d lltl! l ' lll i11 Jiix ,,:t ndh·~ . ' ·
ln 1/11• 11~,. 11 ( prnnn1111..:, 1· ;1 r•• ;o;.!111 1Lld bt' l ;\l\1·11 It , ttl'r:111g •: I lic r>c 111c1h: c i11 l:iUdi t
1
w ay ns 111 lea'""' ' d ·ub1 to whal 1101111 lht•y rf"f•• r.
Tiu~ lour cla s..,.j· ~ 01 1 iru11u1L11~ artJ u::cU ill tl1 1fercn t wnyR, as \\' tl1 be ooen lll1tl c1

'i')h.

I. ltl yself, l !tysc~f, hiitl.lielf, herself, itself, wi th th eir plurnls,
ourselves, yourselt· cs, l henvrnlves, nre en lied Comp ound 1urso11al
pronouns, u sed in the nominnti\'e and oujcc ti vc cases. Jn the
norninative, t hey arc emphatic, and nre added to tl1 cir respective
personal prono 11ns 1 or are u sed i nslefl<l o f them ; as, "1 my.flt !]
<lid it ;" "!ti msdf s ha ll come." In the objec tiv e. they rtre rrjlcxivc, shoi,v in g lh nt th e agen t is a lso tltc object of h is <Jwn act; a.e;,
"Judas went an<l hn n ged himself."
2. In proclamation s, c harters, e•litoriul articl es , and the like,
we is frequen tl y app lied to one person.
3. In address ing pt~ rs ons, you. is comm only pu t Uoth for the s ingular and tl1e plura l, and has a lways it plural veru. Tho" is
used on ly in addresses to tl1c Deity, ur nny irnporta nt object in
nat ur e; or to nntrk sperij d empha~is; or, in the lan ~ 11a gc of con·
tempt. The plura l furm, ye, is 11 uw Lut se\d,,m use d.
4. Tlie pron on n i/ 1 L c~ iLle s its use as tile neu ter pronoun of the
thlrd 11crson . is also usecl inde.finitelv with the vcrh to be in the

- , ..

~ ~~

28

PRA CTI C AL LESSONS lN
ENGLI SH GR AMMAR .

third rc rso n sin gu lar, fo r a ll genders, numb ers, und pers ons; hS,
It i~ l. it ·i• w e, it is you, it is I.hey; It u·as she, &c
5 Th e posscssi \'C ~nse of th e pronoun canno t, lik e the po~
sess i" e of the noun , be folio \\'cu hy the name of th e th in g pot1s4C!':scd. T h us, w e c:n n say , J1/riry's Look, Lut not 'l hers book ;"
a nd ye t we can s oy CIJually wel l, "It is 111ary's," or, "it is
hers." Jn both of th ese las t cxprcssio11 s, th e nnrn c of the thing
possessed is not ex pressed hul im pli cu. [~ c c Ur. A p. XIV. A 11. ~ ~ 1. J
G. llers , it s, our s, you.rs, the'irs, sho uld never be written her'•,
it 's, ou. r 's, you.r's, their's .

I

P ARSING .- T l 1e personal pronouns may be parsed
br iefly thus; I, the fir s t person'a] pronoun, rnasrnline ( or feminine), in the nominative singu lar.

. me tl1e pears you b ot1 0~ ht of !11.1n ,· [ lil;0- th r rn
G.1ve
bett e r than th e apple h e b on~ht; it was so •: t. Sh e
told us what we saiJ to li e r a11d they licar1l l11:r. l'ut
it on, will you? He lil; e~ them ucca 11S e th ey ;ire S\\'l'1't ,
Take the m to John . 1 g nve th e m lo li e r. \ Ye will du
iC if you ,,· 1· ~ !-i. 'I'I 1e ni eu :s ~u·J t JH·y \\- (J!t1' 1l (j(J i· •t • ·r::e
rrirl ~ aid she did not know them .

t>

knew th e m. You and I w ent wi th the m to 1n ec t h e r
aft e r she haJ see n him . He and i can du ii, th ou gh
tl1"t
lJuo k ,· i l is th erefore
yo u cannot. J arncs 1.u o u;::l1t
~
~
his, and not hers.
6. Tak e any cosy rcutl ing l ~sso n 1 an~l go

I'
"

Wh at is a pronoun? How are pronQuns <li vid eJ ? What 1s Ii
personal pronoun? WJ1y is it ca ll ed pcnon a l l Wh a t arc th ey ?
Dec.l in e the fir st-th e seco nd-the third. Of w hat per so n is I l th ou ?~he, she, i t ? Wha t docs the firs t person rl enote?- the
second ?-the third? To what class do my self, //, y sclf, &c . be.
long 1 fo what cnscs nre th ey used? How are tl1 ey appli ed iu
the nomi11 ntiv c ?-i11 the objective? How is you applied 'I - thou?
-it?

E XEllCISES.

E

I
~

O\·c r

it in th e sa m e way.

LESSON XIII.
OJ Relativ e Pro11.onns.
[R ev iew tli n prece ding l ,esso 11 1 anol an swf' r the

fJI H~~tions.)

1. A Jh:L\T! Vf: Pronoun is one tk1t r..:lat cs to, :rnd
con nects its clau se with, n noun or pronou11 l.Jcfon· it ,
called th e antec edent; a~," The ma~kr u Jf10 t;1 ug lit u;:."
T hc ·n nteccclc nt is co mm only n noun or prono un; •omc tim cs
clau se of n sentence; as,
The boy who reads;
He who docs well, will be reward ed ;
James is sic!c, wh ich accounts for his absence.

Cl

I, th o u, w e , me, u s, thin e , li e , him, she, hers, they,
th ee , th e m, its , th e irs, you , her, ours, yours , mine, hi~ ,
I , m e , th em, us, w e , th o u, th ine , ye , ours, yours.

U.J. ORTH. AT ION. - T hf! llr'Jp er u se of1\1 f' r•· lat1vu i~.lo cnnnr·1: t a rl<· fin !n!? cir llm(".laustJ wllh itn i'.ln teccd c 11\ 1i11U11 (Jr pr11nl)nn f(lr rli• : ptt'lJ"'!!C uf fa nh c r d~~c.rih­
ln:.! ir. T he r (' l111h·u c busc sc rvt"'i Ils e fJa J11 c p11rp(•::w i.l :i all a dJ•l t: lt \'tl cir 1H !wr tle-

2. Point 01 H !ht· pronrn 1r1 s in the fo llowinz rx crcific. Parse th em hy telllng tltoLr
i><'n:on, !{C11t.lcr1 nnmb,.r 1 and cn.;,;c ; thus , 11 m e," n pron. ll!lt. pcrs. m asc. sing. tht'!

fl/l!P n ·d.-n t <t r word des 1:rih••1 l.

ohj1•c11,·o.
3. Pni nt oul IJ ·1r nouns and par~ Ihem; !lie wJju rit:a n.nd pru'SO the m.

CoJn.

purr lhC'm.

'1. n ~·ad m·,.,r ··:tc h "'''llt <"n r.c 1u1d lei! whnt cnc h o f th o pro nouna "tlu;ds f<1r~
lh11 p1 nae ttt.nn d! fl ·r tli c tl p P:lko r ;· you for the per.on spoken ro. &c.

ltln~

t1ni ni.: wnrd, und t:nns1· q11 ..-. 11rl y mu st alw11ys s1;wd ill I ll e ~ a/ll (: s1:n1 t·11 cc wirt1 the
Jnd ct~d,

an adj1·c1ivc will

~ ·ir1 11 • !i111t'.~

hf· NJ1 1i \'a,..

lt ·n < ro 1h r> r<' l;i fi\·1 : an• l_ilf'I ..Jau~ o ; 1!1u:'l, " T hf' m a n 1rho ts g1111d Is happy : " 1rnd
u lli" K(~ri man is li app.v ." m r- an th e sa.rnr• thirig:.
is l!LM. )d," limi l8 ;,wd d 1· .-:c r ih1:s 1!1r- w ord

,..:,

IJ .. o • Ilic n ·la1h•1• claut'C, •• w ho

mtLH prec.e dir1~

tl.

Jr i::t llol 11ny utan, nor

e ..·~ ry m an, uor Ilic nd 1 m an, Lul lli c guud man, tlnll i't /1 appy.

2 . The r cla liYe pronouns are w!w, which., that, an d

,.

;

~;'-

'
"

,,
~

QUESTIONS .

l. Gu m·1·r :he l• )l!owin:..: li:-;r of 1'l'0 11 01 u1 s an d tcll 1Jicl r ]Jt.r801&.. Go over th em
u~n.l n 1t11CI 1r •I! 1!1•·ir 1;n1ili-r: :n.:a1n,a11 d rd l !hei r 1wm h1•r: ng ui11 1 0.m l tell tl1 cir caJtd:
0.111..l iat'I Jy, lt'il tl wir t:"11du 1 1111111/,f!r, anU case., to:;:ei her.

I

Tli c l•oy t!1o ugl 1l he

,. .,,
;

<':'

'i.

30

31

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

ENGLl!\H GRAMMAR.

what.
fflio ancl which arc alike in both munbers;
and arc ili us declim·cl :

port;" i. ('. ".Ill/ thi n;;s (without exc~pt.i on) u·ltich arc of good
rep ort. " (Sec G r. §:,'.), Ih d e lll. Au. & Pr. l;r. 7:J~ .]

N orn.

S in g . and Plur.

·w 1io
Wh ose
\ Vhum

Poss .
Obj.

l l"hic/:.. a11J 11h1tl nrc so metim es U:"Cd n ~ adj 1·..:ti\'es1 nnd

S

.C:in,r:. nn1l Plu r .

ha\·c a nnuu fo!Jqwin:.:; the m; us, "Tell me 1.clwt hoohs you a1e
r ca :l in~ i n " lrhi ch t li in ~s a re a n a11cgo ry. " ln t his sense, rt.:lii rh

Which
Whose
vVhich.

applies e it her to per s un s or thin i;s, anJ in m eanin g i.., cqui,·al cnt

to th is or these.
3. Jl ' ho, and al so w hich anti n·h al , with out

3. W/10 is applied to persons; :is, the b oy wlw
reads:

1\

th Jc 11 fol lMl"inr;,

arc su1ne ti1ncs used as in..lefuute pronouns; a s , I <lo not know
1ch o will Le our n e xt Pres iJ cnt.

And also to inferior animal s, nntl thin gs withnut life, ·when
tJ1cy nrc reprcsentctl us spcnking und aclinno like rutional bein"s

"

Of l11 le1Toga tive Pronouns.
In asking ques ti ons, who, w M ch , and what arc
call<:d IwrnnnoGATlVE pronouns.
/1s ill t err ogal i v <:s, who is ap p lil'1l 1.o p e rsons only j
w!i.ic/, an1l wlwt, cit.her to persons or tliin gs. What
admits of no var iation .

" .

4 . TV!tich is applied to i nfe ri or a nimal s,a ntl thin gs
with ou t life; as , the dog wlt iclt barks; the b o ok
wk ich was lost :
And nlso to collective noun s composed of persons; ns , "the
court of Spa in which;" "th e co mpany whi ch. " J\nt! Jikcwi'e
ofter th e nam e of n person 11'Ctl m erely ns a won! ; n~, "The
cow·t of Quee n Eliznbe tl.1 1 \~h i c h was but another nume fo r pru.
tlen ce nn1l economy."

PAnsINc.-Thc relative is parsed by stating . its
gender, number, case, and antec ed ent; (the gcnde r
anti nu1ubcr bc i11g al\\·ay s tlic sa me as tll ose of the
'
) l l 1u s, " · 1'.lie l 10)' \\' l ; l) . " - - - " II
'"!l(/ '' ·l S· a
itJllL l"Ctll'lil
rt:lal i\·c pronoun, 111 <ts1:ul in e , i11 tlie11 0 11 1in<1t i1·e sin gular, and refers to "b oy" as its a nteced en t.

. ll'hic!t ':'u' formerly appli ed to persons as well ns things, antl
is so usetl 111 the common vers ion of the Scriptur es .
r;

' T'I

.

f

.

0

u . J. rw t is o lc n 11 scd ;1s a r ·lat1v c, to pre vent the
too fr cqu<: nt rq H'titi on o f w!to o r wli i c/1.. It is in<leclinablc, and appli ed both to persons a nd thin g-s .
G. JV/wt i.· applied to tl1ings only, and is 11c ,·c r used

QUESTIONS .

b ut when the a nlecl'dcnt is omitted; a s, "This is what
[ wantctl"=tliat wlticlt I wa nted .

·what is a re la ti Ye pro noun? ·wh a t is th e w onl to wl1ich it re!aks calle1I? \Vhnt is the proper u se of th e rPlativ c pn>11 0 11 n 1
\\' hat n re tl1e re la ti1·e pronouns? '.Vh nt is who app li e1l to?
\\' hat is which a ppli cJ to? Wh.v is llial usi·il a s a rcl:dive 1 To
wh a t is it app li ed 1 \\1 Jiat sort of a r elati ve is t11hal 1 \Vlutl
dN" il in clude? 'Vhat su rt of wor:J s are u·hoei'cr , &c.? 'Vhen
u:h rc/i nn<l wl'.Ul n rc follow ed Ly noun ,, what part (• l >perch nre
the y I What a rc th e interro:;a ti ve pronoun s? \Vhy nre :hry
'"ailed intcrrogati1·r ? As nn inte rroga ti ve , what is u-lw nppl1c 1 I

OBSERVATIONS ON TIIE RELATIVE .
I. TV!toer er , 1r hosoere r, ·1rlw lcr er, nntl whalso eve1-, are al so
a sed as comp ound rel1ttives, a nti are equivalent to tl1e relative nnc!
n g eneral , or in<lefinit•! anteced e nt ; ns, "IV!tosoc vc r committeth
sin , is the s ervan t of sin ;" that is, " any one," or " every oni
who \.Ommitte th ~i n, &c ." "11·h11l soc 1·er th ings are of good ro-

f

r

,,

I

3'2

PRA CTI CAL L ESSONS IN

E NG !. ISH Gf:.AMMAR.

to1--which ?-what? I n parsi n~ th e r e la tiv e, whnt is m e ntioned 1 Jlow arc the gender and n u m ber of tlte r e ln t i1'e lrnown 1

possrssirm or rropcrty. Tl'" Y arc my, lliy, his, her
ou r, your, t lt .. ir, ·it s, own .
2 . The dislrilmti v1' p1·on ou11 s l'l '! Jl' L' 't'i ll .,]Jjl' l' h ~ IS

EXERCISES .

take n· scpa1~tlcly.
'l'licy arc cu clt, ~nry , rilher ,
n e'itltcr.
3 . Tl 1c demonstru ti1:c pronouns poillt 011t ohj .. ct s 1l cfin itely . They arc tMs and t/1.ut, \\ itli tlw ir pl urals,
th ese and those.
4 . The ind~fi.n·ite pronouns dl'not c p e rs ons or
thi wrs intle fm ikly . They are nnnc, 11m;, 11// 1 such ,
"' some, bot h , one, otha. Tlie l\Y o lasi an· dewliolc,
clined like nouns .

I. Is it proper to sn y-tl1e ma n wh o, or the mnn whic h?

w l1y ?
why?
t he tree who, or the tree wlt irh ? why1
the fam ily who, ort hefa 111i lywhi c!1? why?
tl1c <lo g- ' v ho , o r t he dug \\' li ic h?

2. In th o followln~ ;:.;c nfl' n !: rs , pvi: 1t out ti n~ nlatfre . <.u 1d tlt e word to w hic h It
r elaw1:1; al so t h ~ i11 tr- rroi.:afi \'1·~.

3. 'Nlut.t i.a LJ1c u.-;o of th e rebriYe in the first sc11ll'nce 1 iii ilie sec.:o nd 1 In th o
third 1 &c. (See Jllus1ra1ion, p. :!'J.)

The boy '"ho stud ies wi ll improve. I love the man
who tells th e truth, but all hate him w!to dea b in fal se·
hood . Do you r emembe r the man whom we met?
There is th e hook which }'OLl lost. It is the same book
that you bou g ht. Tha t is the laJy wlio has Lee n kind
to us, and wh ose l1and is e vr. r opr: 11 to t he poor. .It is
the ha nd of the d il ige nt that mak eth ri ch. He th a t
g ive th to the poor ]f:nclet h to the L ord. The temple
which Solomon bu ilt. "\Vlio gave yo n that book, wlii ch
you prize so much? 'l.Vhich house is yo urs ? He who
preserves me, to wh om I O\\'C my ]Je ing , whose I am .
an d wh om I sen·e, is eternal.

I

I

OBSE ilV AT!Ol\S.
J.

diikn·i itly. T he po :-i:-,L':-0::; 1\'I: pro1Hn111 11111 -. f ; 1 !'-"·a y~ h;'l_\·c a
n o un nrtc- r it , t he p o:-' S l'~~ i\' C cn ~e o f tlt e 1t1 · r ~ u1: ;1I , 111•v .. r, 11.'1 1l al.
\Vays r efers to a no11n pn.: vi 11u 5! y cxpres~ed; tliil~ ,

There a r e four so rls of AnJECT I VE pronouns; v iz .,

Thi~

T hi s is my Uook
Tha t is her pe n
Thi s is your lint
It is th eir hou se

I

i
f

'T l 1at p c n i~ h l'TS

Thi s lla t is yuurs
T he h ou;;e i> I ,, ,.jrs

add··d to a n r .!\1• · r \"'"~ " ~ :.in~
111.-• boy's nw u bu11k."

()u;n j-\
11

10 111 ;1\.; t•

it

(•1 1qd11· i 0 · ; ;:1 :-1 ;,

rny own;"

3. !lis arn1 her, l'olluwc d l1y a no u n. nrl' pP:-':' f· ~ ~i \·e pron oun ~ :
not f 1 Jll o\\· cd

4. Thal
nn:l

UJHl

Indefinite .
J. The 7ioss cssivc pronouns a rc such as <lenote

P us8rs:s i re C use.
lwok is m ine

I'os!H'.'>s ·irf' l' ro111 ntll .

1'° 0TE.

lllo\·tcw the two precedi ng I.c.C)sone, n.n d an swer Lhe qucs;tlons.J

hccnu se like ad jcr·.

\J ~t· tl

un wir ow n i 11

Of .JJ.cUcclivc Pronouns.

1

t lv cs tl lf'V e ith e r arc, or 111 11y h~ , followed hy n 11111m.
2. Pu~sC~'.'.'> i \" C pronon ns \1 ave the ~.;11111: 11H' l\l1ltl '..! i\~ 1h c ro~ .. e'-\Si \' C ea:''' uf t he pc r:--o n :t! pronoun s ti • w hic h tL1·y r1 ·!:it 1· 1 lint Jr~

LES SON XIV.

the Possessive, Distn'butive, D cmo1istralive,

Th ese pronouns nre call ed adj N·fitc

by a nou n. tht·y are

i s s- om ct i 111t' s a

ptr ~ona I p!"onnuris .

t!c rnt 111 s tra ti \·(· , ::;u1 11 l'tir11•.' S a rt·lati\·c,

sometimes a conjunction ; th us,
Dem . T hat book is m ine.
Rel.

It is the same th at I hout;h t.

Conj .

I r ead, flin t I m a y lenrn.

··-~

L

.~

~.

1

_·_

. h"

lit, .

. ·.,.·1

f;.J\

34

PT:A CTJ CA I. LE SS ONS IN

5 1\ mon g i nde fin ite~ may al s:o h e rcckonctl s uch \VOrd s ns n v,
.fe :t• , '"any , SCL'e ral , an rl th e like ;-thc com po unds whoever, w hata er, whichsoc ve r, &c. , ant[ wlro, wh ich , a nd wha t, in r espons ive
Bcntences.
,
6. None is used in Loth numbers ; l.iut it can not be joined ton
n oun .

P AH.s1_r.;r; .-A<ljectiYC pron o un s are parsetl by statin g th eir clas,, a11d the n ou n to wh ich th ey belong
In cl emonslratin·s, state also the nurnlH:r; t h us,
" l\!y book.''
"book."

JIJy is a po>scssi,·e ndject i,·e pron o un; refers to

QUF.STIOl'\ S.
'

How many sor ts of aJjecti ve pron ouns nre th ere ? Name th em.
Vvhy called adjectfre pronouns ? \ \T ha t is a possessiv e prono un ?
::->ame th e po ssess iv e pronou ns ? ·wha t is a tlistrihutive pronoun 1
Name them-A d" muns trati vc pronoun ? l\n mc them-A n indefin ite p rono un ? J\arnc them . In what arc possess ive pro.
noun s and the possess ive case of pcrsunn l pronoun s th e sa me 1
In w hat tlo th ey differ? Give an exa mpl e of t he use of each
JI ow is "own " used I ·wh en are his anti her poss e s~ives ·1~
wh en perso na ls ? In how ma ny differe nt W'1)' S is" lh tt l " useJ.t
How is " non e" used? H o w arc adj ec tive pronouns parsed 1

EX EllC fSES .
1. In the

fullO\\· in ~

Cx<•rd:lr, p-0 im out the adjectiYc pronouns,nncJ parse l11em ·

LESSON XV .
EXERCISES

On 1Vo1rns, .Articles, .11.djechves , and Pronotins.
l. In lhe foll owin g Ex e fci:ie, poin l out Lh c arti dt:,:j 1\.ml pa ~ th e m ;-U11! noUJL~
tlllf\

1·-

r

I

pari;;c Lli c m ;- lin: atl;c ·1i vt.:s a.ud pa.rse thew ;- th e prv11 uw1s a.n d panie th em .
1

I found mv ha t up o n y o ur taLl e ; but where is yours1
Who put th;t g Jo,·c in m y cap 1 Ha1'c y o u seen the
book whi ch m y faLh er gave to me? T hat rod of yours
is lon gE- r th an min e , Lut n ot so long as John's.. Those
trees .have los t th e ir lcaY eS. Every Luok on that shelf
is rnin e ; I \vi ll g iv e you a li s t of them . K eep this
knife fo r m y sa ke; it is a goo d on e . All men are mortal; tim e waits for no one; a wi se m an w ill im prove
e\"ery m.oment to so me u se ful purpose. An ~die m an
wi li co m e to poverty; but he that is diligent rncre ~se3
hi s s tore.. Th ev tltat walk with the wise ·shall be wise;
bu t a companio~ of foo ls shal l be d es troyed .
p.

ltc\' icw thoro ughl y fro m Lcs.-;o n X., ans ...,·eri n;; prom ptly and acc urately ill

016 questions.

I

'l

II

2. ll c\' ic w from the h~ginnin;; , reciting accurately nil 1he J cfi11 it1om' an<t rules,
r.n<l answering the questions. 'l'lils m ay requ ire two or three rt"c itallona.]

the nouns,a.nd parse thr: m :

l\'Iy book, h e r shoes , you r horse , th ei r fath er , his
b ro th er , every hour, th nt taL le , th ese quills. This is
m y Look; that Look is yours. \Vhcre is m y hat? These
o pples arc good ; g ive som e to yo ur bro th ers . I will
g iv e one to ea ch . l ltave gi \•e n th e m all away, eve ry
on e . Erc ry d;1 y try to do good to som e pe rso n . This
book will do a ~ we ll a s tl. at 011 e. Eve ry boy s hould
keep his o wn books. Do goo d to oll men-inj ury to
non e .

LESSON XVI.
Of

Verbs .

1. A VEHn is a "·ord u sc <l to express the act , being ,
or state of its subj e ct; as, I write; li e is; t im e jli c.s
2. Verbs are of two kinds; 1'rans·itivc an<l l1dra n·

sii'ive.
·~

\

36

:p

P RAC'T ICAL L ESSONS I N

3. A T RAKSiTIYE V Eim cx prl'ssrs an ac t d oi~ e hv
one p erson or thing ta another; as, J ames strikes th.c
tab1e ; T11c t;tl1l c is slr ucl,; by James .
4 . J\n ll'TilA/\SIT H T. V El\ll expresses the nr:ing, or
stal e of its suhject, or an act n ot done to another; as,
I am , he sleeps, yo u run.

2d. Eve r y t ra n sitir e n ctiv c r f' rl1 rn11 l1e char 1 ~c d i:1t11 the j i:'.l~s iv e
for m ; thu ~, "James ~ trikes the taUlc, " ean be cli n n~ L·,l into
"'l'Jie ta lilt: is ~trueli liy Jarn l'S . " Uul t.h1.; i11 1ra11 :-- iliv·~ Vt' r: ,
1·a nno t Lf· ~ ,, ch rrn ;.;:f'il; t ltus, r sm ile, ca nn ot be L'ii;n 1 ~·nl into I
a 111 smi/<·11.
3 Ll. 111 ti1 c..: u ~. c of tlre tr nn!--it i·: 1: \·1·d1 , t l11: rt: ;: r i· a l \\"<lj' S three thin ~:J

i1n.plicd; t h(' u cl01· , th•_; 11ci., a1;d t ht~ uf1jtt f a c k 1l u po:1 J n t h('.'
u se of t he int n.1n ~i ti \ ·r.. , tlicrc a re only t u·o - tl1e tJUl1j1_·c t or t i iin~
~poke n of, anJ th e slulr>, or act i on a ttributed t o i t.
lJ . l. U~TH.A 'l'l 0 :\1'. -T!ic

exp1 ··· ~s :1!1 a d1,r r.: l:i{ 1' in

:. :,~;:h::·, -.~~,:~;;~::h'~:l'~'.'.''..,;.~ ,L~i ~~:'

bl;, c .•

l.lW: ll•l•" 1

•

•

•

1\ trunsir. ive

J

tH;

l.J ulh

11 f lltf·u 1

\'f' I")' i rnp•_ll1;tJl(.

1

W f' l~ll {J'.~- U1;tl " w r if c :"

i ::i ;\

\ •·1l• , tw1 · ;,11 ::.c It t e!l.,,. 11 ·~ \\li~it '·.J, d.r1· ' d"1'-i: ; ri ,·1 t

1· :-;1 11.! y "
~ d"

i:> <L \" 1·r li, h•"«a1 1,.; .. tl l1 !!.:;: t t ~ wlL. 1t "the h,,_v :;" 11·•; a•pl 1:1. it i . ' ' il "' k ill ·
i:1 a vet l\ lic...: a u sn it lo' ils 11 ~ \\"li ::tt was dor1c to "lhr: d11;..: j" awl :-u llf oth• •rs.

~-

Th e :sc:eond tit in;; iR Iv l<ntl\\.' wht• r1 1\ vr·rll i ~ !r1Lns itir c cllid \\ lwn ir•irw •HiNtJw, whr' ll r!1c \'1.' rh !di s what 11 11 1' p f· r !'i' ill .. r !!1 111;..: d11·•;.i ( 11 a11 11thcr, o r what
il'l do1 1f' fo v11 •: 11•· r,..-u n Pl' t/,,.-,, f: h'J· a11.,i l1 r r. !lie 'r•1 h !-1 ! rc1n-.1\ir1'. T l iu-<, wl: ··n ll
ls1"o, 1i.i 11 .Lu1w1j t-;1 {"!-i :q ,1•i 1· ;-; ;" ·' \'" k nvw, fin;I , 1l1 :1r "c11t<1 . i-.; a v ,·J"li, 1... r.!1Js"it
ft·!!s \'.h ;lt Ja:1w:-1 d au ; ;:i n d 1;cc1 ir:d!y 1 l li at il Li /1, 1.• 1,-;itirt\ Lc1.' :\H :-:><' il 1.dl...; what

f irt.

J ames docs

in

the apples.

Jl 11t wh r: n rlwr wl1k l1 u p1'r.:;nn ,· ,r Jhin~ 1!., r :ci ,

i.~ n 0 ~

dt'ln"" tn nnn:tir r prr::nn nr

T l.i1s, i11 Ila: bt: Ot c n c. ·, 11 .Ja m l·S

n 11 1.-: 1" \\"11 \~!JO?;
ti11tt " n1n s " j9 a \' 1•rh 1 lH'• 'a11~<: i! l1· li .~ \\"hill .It1n11 ·:-; d11 r.~ ; and tli at it i,; ! :1 ~ra.11 ~ : ­

thing, tlic \'Cf'U is i11tra11s ilivc.

nnd

tiv <', li e(':\llSC wh a t Ja11H.' ~ ilof•:; bi nnt t\rm t' In an y o!lwr p1· f !"'o n or l hin~.
"J
Verbs th:it 1.Ji:nut 1: l ll"r• ·l v to bf! Of l'.n·11 ~, il.I'" ul ·. \· ;1_"~ i r i! r 1~11 r- ! 1 : '' '·

sometimes i n u n 111tn:\nsith·c sen se; t hus, tran ~ iti ve "Chnrit}'
thiu /1 elh no evil ; ~; iri1r:1n .;.;ifi v •·! •· Thi·1lt on r:i ••."
'

5. 'l;onn s it i1· c n nd ia t.rn.nsiti1·c \' Cl'b> ntay be di s ti n gni~hc il by
tl1 e sc n>c , :i s follow s :
l st. A tran s iti1·e n ct iv e v e rb rc·1p1 ircs a n ohj cc t after it to com.
pl t!tc th e sens<'; ns, Th e l1 o y s t11di(::; ~ra m mnr . .An intransitiv e ' 'erb r e<1uires n o o h je<:t ofter it , b ut the s e n se is complete
wlthont it; as. He .•ii.•, you rir/r .

J\ .' : W•· w1 ~ !1 ti>

J. T !1f• !ir-s l t/ii ll~ i.:J, ( t i 1!i :,i ir.• ;n1;--l 1 t!i •' \' <' Iii f1, ,m ••\"•TY 1't:l" r !'·t r. nf Sj'l' •" d l.
T !iis call c<.1 -; ily 11 1 ~ d1 1nc, 1f tl1L' pnp!I w il! 111dy r 1· nit·rn l e1 . rl..1 t t '\t 't')' wun! !!!al
[!•: !:< 11:-1 what a P·-·rt-iin Pf 1lii 11:.:; , J. 11 ·....:, ii r w l.a1. i.'I d .111•· lo :l p1 · r ...... :1nr1 !1 i11 f!. i.'I ~ 1 \1•r!1.
Tli 11 s, w!1 f' ll W•-~ :-:i!}' , " .!•'1111 wri11·;-;;" "rlw h•1 y:-. :;'11.t y; n '' tl1n d· io: w:1-.. !:ill ·· •I .''

i:d ll:c '" ii"" voice,

11 s~rl so m e tim es in

tl: c l n·iq in1 p 1 ni J !ll.

u f w;1 y-.: ; t! ~ 1'1"(':'" 11! 1 p:1·,: , r"11111 r f· 1 ac!11:d 1

e1m d 1ii1111 al i & 1·. , :-:.1> llw re b .' l L'ft.'<J l \·,lri · ·ly ,,f (., rn 1:-; a:-;,.,11 m1 '< ! hy tho
t: 1 11. : ,~ l hin::;z.; .
-It i:-1,tlu_·rcfi 1l'l' ,\ 0·1·v 1 i P1 · ·· ~ :-'1 :1·y f, 1r (),,. ;•upil
"' lw \\1· 1l :11·qt1 ,11: i1 • 1[.\\i t li rl :i ; I• ~1 l 1•f ;-- ;p·1·1:!1
.\t r ! .i~ ;,! . ~ ;;·· , !\\11 11iin;.;-> 111u s t bO

. 3. I nt ransi ti v<! \' 1•rli, n rc ~ometimes. r Pnd1_. . rc·d t r:ins iti v~. by r1 dJ1ng a noun of U1,-. ~a1nr 1 or sin1i hr ~ i ~ nifi c:1 ti o n \\"I th th c m :stdves ,
U!:; a n uUjt.:ct; tiw :i, iiltruli!-l iil\ l· , J run; lran si tir c, 1 run a race .
S>l m e vcrl •s arc

uil!f' n;

r::i"·• J \ ;.;. ridy

\·f'rl; ii i 01.,k r 10 1':q1 r .•:;....:

l nlrrcnsil i ve \'Crbs in cl11d f' ni l \·i:'rb s no t t rrrn~!tin: , \ \' la:thr: r th ey
exp r ess action or not; a nd t h ey Jmve o n ly o n e form; na m e ly , th a t ..
o f the ac ti ve vo ice; as, I am; yo u walk; the y rim . A few hnve
the pn ss ivc fo rm , bu t th e sense is t he snrne in bot h; ns, " f arr'
t:om.c/ ' and, i : 1 /.,, i ' ~ Cu th •; . · ·

4. The

;i

t11e m nst impn rt.tllt

r. o nlin i~" 1 1 t 1

us, th e uhji..:c t Jo \·ed , or ac ted u po n . 'l'lir~ same tliing- cru1 be expressed by an o th e r fo rm; l hll>, " \\"c :i re J.il'd i>y- i>i111." or
1

p ~ 111 nf ~jll'• ' t' li.
It i:-1 rt
\ Vi t lio nt ii, we ca n 111·iUwr ;dl l r rn ~1.-,r d•· n y,
11 \ Vas therefore ra1l 1·r! 1!ic: \"1 : 1rn 1 lhat !:•, !l ie

n u r l '.\":jlt" C·:-:.s ;u iy f.il"t tli' ll io n c: h !.
1r ord 1 liy w ay oi' 1' 1n illf' Jl .-i ·, <l l" 1,f ,di

2 . Tra ns itii·c l' e r hs inclu de all th ose 11·1ti c h ~xpre ss a n act t ha t
passes over Cr ai n tli c nc t<i i" to an u:1jcd a ct ed 11 pu n; as, J!c loves
tt ~·. IIerc. '' Ile" is t he actor , '' l ot cs" cx p rcss~s thG net , a nd

1

\"l~ rb b

ll l:' C•' s:.::\r)' w ord in 1_·\'1 •17 ~1·1 1 l1·11i'('.

l. The use oi t he verb in ~imp!c ~~n t cncc~ is, to nliirm or ucclare. Tha t of which it all ir111s o r ilecla res is ca lJ etl its rnbj ect ,
or nomin ati l'e .

QUESTIONS .

l

'

\\Th a t is n verlJ? If ow n1any cl asses of ''rrh~ n r c tl 1e re?
is a t ransitive vuh ?-a11 iu tra n sitivc? \ ~' hat is th e use
ve rb in s imp le se nte nces ? 'What is the s uhj ed of n verb?
docs the word lransilii ·c mcn n ?- intran s iti1·e ·1 !l o w runny
has t he transiti ve v c rL 1- t !ie i ntrnnsilive? How do you

\ Vliat
of t h e
\Vh~t

voic"s
kn0w
~:<
>

;; 't

",,}·

~

j

~.f>~:tt~·:\~

:.is

PRA CTIC,\!.

LE SS ON~

JN

which word in a se ntence is a 1·erli ? II ow tio you know whe t her
i t is transtti,·e or intran s iti ve ?
EXEllC ISES .
I. fn rl 1c· fi,!lo\\'iag- I'. .F ·n.:i~e~, p1 li11 t out 1t 1e vcrl1i a nd wll h•-iw YMI kuow lhc m
1
to ht• \' Prlis; rl1u s , ·· !car11 ' is a \' e rU, l 1cca11 s1~ il tells us wl11.1t '· boys" do i "rides"
l::i a "''. rb. he(•ti11 :sc it f1 ·1/s us w!tat "n 11ta n" du•::-.:, &.c.
:l. 'fl'll '\ld C'li ,·erlls arc lrvn... itirri 1111d wldch in frau..,,;;ifit•t', mi d how yo u kno''f'
l: 1" 1ll 10 "'.' sn; thtl ."" . '· J.--an1" h I r .11 1...:111 \ •'. l •1 ·1·.1u...:L' It 11'1 !:,, w/1ut llnys d u 111 !t:ssons ;
'· n il!-,;" IS 111 t r;u1.-i i11v •' , l.,1· c ;111 ... c \\' lt. 11 ·•a 111an" 1!.11·:-i, i.':I 11 ul douc 1r) uny Ptti t~ r

p c,-:;01 1 or

tli in~.

Boys learn lessons . A man ri<les . IV e read a book .
My dog barks. The fire lrnrns. The fi re burns me.
He touk th eir app l e~. You sa w them . \\'e touch ed it.
Th ey strike her. I tlirew a sto ne at hi s window . T h ey
kil led my rabbit . The h orses ea t th e ir co rn. Th e co ws
drink wate r. I can ri<l e well. A ride imp~ovos the
healih. That man walks fa s t. A long waik tires me.
I lo1·e tier an<l you.
111 the following Fic nr e nc e ~ , it take!'! /<.Cotnnd 1;omrlimes th rte tcurds ro make lhe
verb i auJ l hCA:C two or LJin:c arc al ways pa_rscd l og~t11c r ns one word.

I will wat er the garde n.

Jam es can wri te a let ter.
You may ri<le on my ho.rse. Rober t will g iv e a bouk to
yo n. Y es , h e will give you a book . You mu st ]i r•h t
the candl e. Yo ur father l1as so l<l his h orse. I h:ve
boug t t him. J ohn will brush your coat. He should
have bmslted it before. James will have writt en his
lett er before ni gh t. He may have writt en it alrea<l y.

LESSON XVII.
Division cif Verbs.
[ncvicw thorouglily the prcccUlng Lesson_]

,..

1. In resper.t of form, verbs are di videJ into Regvlar, Irregular, and D efectit-e.
·

:J'.·)

E NG L!SI! GRAl\IMAil .

2. /\ Ri::cl1 LAJt VERB is one tl1at. f'o nns ils Pr:st tense
in tlic I 11 d icali1·c adivc, and it s Past p11rfi ciplc by
a11d i11t; cd to tli c P resent; as, Presen t, lor .c ; Past,

Loved; Past parliciplc, loved.
3. An T1w i.:cu J. ,\lt v i::1w 1:; on!· tl 1at dot·s not form
its Pa st t en se in tlie lnd ica tiYc acti1'c, and its Pu s!
participle by adll i n~ cd to the Prest· nt; a,;, J>rl'SCll t,
wl'il e; Past, wrote; Pasl participle , 1cr iLtcn ,
A D 1:Fr:CT t\'E Vu:u i~ 011e in which snrnc of th~
parts nrc \\'ant i1 1g, 'l'<> tliis cla ~s lic lu11g cliielly
Auxiliary and l 111pasonal r c·rbs .
A UX ILI ARY VERB S.

The Aux1LIAllY, or h elping verbs, by the li clp of
whi ch verbs arc principally inflected, are the following, which, as auxiliari es , are u sed only in ll1e present. an <l t he past t cn <:c;

Yt Z :

Pru.
Pwst.

Do,

have,

sha ll,

Did,

had,

6ho:.i lil ,

will,
WOltid,

Tlicvcrlito/Je is used

asa11

may ,

r <ln,

am,

rn ii; ht,

t".uuld ,

Wt.u~,

n1ust

auxil.iary i ll:oi l itstcn c;c"< .

.Am, do , an J have, are also princi11:tl vcrl•s
on:-; F fl \ ' A TJOKS.
1. 1"'he auxiliary (or he \ pi n ~) verbs are f'O ca ih-.1 1 l 1e("ansl\ by
their he lp, th e ve r b is e 11a bJe,J to express Yarieties of time ancl
manner of at:ting or liein~ , whlch it coui<l no t tlo withont them .
The auxilia ry nlways st:tnJs hdi.Jre its verb, flncl the lll'u nre rcga nl c<l in par s i n~ ns one u·ordi us , I will u·ri lci he has u· rillen;

w e may write, &c,
2. Of t he auxil iaries, sha ll im pli es cluty or oblif;:>tion; 1c1ll,
pn r posc or resol u tioni may , liUcrty; can, nbility. Th e pn:-:t t~n :.;e
uf these verl,s is should, would, 111ii:;ht, co uld ; bu t s t il l they ex-

press t ime very indefini tel y.

40

P RACTICAL L ESS ON S IN

41

ENGLISH GRAMMAR .

3 In. nffirmnt1ve sent en ce~ . will, in the first p<:'rso n, i n timat e~

r esol ul.i un aud pru111i.:-;ini:;-; us, 11 1 wj/I

~o

;"

i11

th e St!Cond and

LESSON X V III.

tlti nl, it roo111HJnly forc tcl s ; ns, "You 1oil l Le liappy. "
Shall, in the first person, ouly forct e ls ; ns , " I sha ll go tom orro w ;"-in the seco nd a nd thinJ , it promi ses, comm nnd s , or
t h reatens; as, "Tho u sha ll not s tea l. "

Jnjlcction of Verbs .
[ll c\·i~w

How arc \'Cros d i1· idd in respec t of form ? Whnt is n r egu lar
vcr li ?--11n irrcg ul;i r verb ?-a dcfecti \'e verb? ' Vha t a rc th e principa l ucftctive verbs? Why ure nuxilinry verbs so cnlleJ 1
'V hnt verbs arc principal vcrlJs as w eil ns nuxilinry7 How
ure th e auxiliaries shall anJ w·i ll disting ui shed 1

the Pa.st tense 1111cl Pa~ !

OF VOICE.
01· ·}
L J<.: ··'. crL ' " l< jl..'.il
shows the relati o n
tlie subject, or tlitng spoken
of, to tl1c action expres~: <.;t\ by the v e rb .
In English, the \r:in ~ il iY c n'.rli kis al11·ays two
vo ices; the .llcl-ice al!d tl1e l ' as$t1;c.
VOICE

pa.nlciple:

I.
t
~

:Marked , protected , composed, favor ed, turned, hnt e J,
mix ed , bel ieved , wonnd ed , rn s hccl , p r crir.hc rl, hun ted ,
-::rushed , pren chrd, \\':un ccl , pleade d, loved , ended.
u.nd wl1y.

1·
fit

'

! ...

I
I

follo\~i11;! li. ·t ll:ll wldrh rrrb:i n.rc r"~ ti lar n.nd which are lneguJar ;-

Pracnt.

)'(I., /.

Spoi l
Go
Tak e
·writ e

spo iled
took
wrot e

P a.t Pnrliciple.
spoil ed
go ne
taken
written

Jiore

hoped

hop,,d

Run

ran

run

Freeze
Spy
Obey

\Vent

froze

spie d
obeyed

frozen
spied
okye d

'I

~~

'

~~

1. The AcTll' E VOICE n·prcl'f'll(S tlw s11\1'd or
the vcrL as ti eting upon some dJj<.:ct; :1~) Ja mes
strif~i;s tl1c Lt11c .
·1~ , " in tf .•c active \'oi c(•, in licn.te:J wh a t its
Hl're tl: c Yrr,l " s t.1 1c.cs,
"Jame s," 1! ue; lo tl1<_• ,,hj•,ct , l o/,/ .. .
.
,
1

suuj~c t,

2 Tile i) .\SSl\ i-: \1UtL rq1rcsc n ls tlH.: sulJ.1ccL oi
tli e .n :rh as ;1c\(' d u pon by ~orne }J LT~i\ 11 or tl1i• Jj..'. ; ;i~,
Thr' 1ahle -is sfruclz hy .J;,mc:-;.
· c"' inLlii:ates
1Iere the vcrU ''is slr u d\·," in the pa s~ ·1\·c Yo1c
• 1·,J·.,. . c·t , "/n& le' " bvJ .Tames.
. Jone to t 11c :su
what is
•

l

t•
i;;:

r""

r
l::.

~

Mm

I&

i::; a part icu Iar 1··orrn

or

F ea r, love, look, hope, sho w, ]e;:irn, m ove , was h, clean,
walk, des ire , r eturn , oblige, form , fo rce, puni sh, support,
turn, to11ch, di s turb, pince, try, <leny , c ry , <l e l;:iy .

3. Jn tho

L c~ns. l

T o the infl ect ion of Yerbs belon~ T'o ices , }\foods,
T cnfrs, ]{1onbers , :mil T'crsons;-a lso Parti cipl es .

QUESTION S.

l. Pul the follow ing rl'1:_!t1b r verbs Imo

th l.! two preceding

l,,.
I

·~

'l'hc

.
.iS
P<l~::,1. ,· L, \"(l~('C

t' Oi'I11Cl \

1

I, 1) · ·u\
·· 1t11 T
<' til l '
1 'h

i1: 1;.c

1·
t11ru1 H··h all
tllc auxt· 11;Hy
' . ci-1 J-i "t 0 Uc~~
' .
·,,
I
'
.,
XXVH
l
iis 11 1r1111l s :i 11 d ten ses. lScc L c::,son • •
··J
.
('..
4. Intr;i :1 >iti\'f' Y<'rhs li;n-.~ not a p;1 ssiYe \'Oll'C : •

'--·
l nr' icinle

...

10

L

..

1
•
few admit a passive form,
•Hl t no \ ''1. fl'l
'·~SI
· \'C. ·SC!l~C.
· '
tl 1us,. Tl..rr·m, come , wl1 ic h means th e same tbtng ;i~, l

/,are comP.

.,

,,

liNGLISH GRAMMAR.

43

LESSON XIX
Of the .Moods.
(H.t!Yic.w the prcccdi11g Les.so u, awJ .1.nswer th e qucsUons. 1

J\'Ioon is the mode or manner of expressing the
signification of the verb.
Verbs have five moo<ls; naniely, th e Indicativ.c ,
Polenliol, Sil~jwicl'ivc , Tm.perativc , and l njinilivc .
1. The IN 01c.aT1vE mood declares the facl rxprc:sst·rl
by th e verb simply, an<l without limitation; as, He

lov es ; He ·is lov ed.
2. The PoTE:\TIAL mood 1l eclares, not th e fact expresse d by the verb, but only its possibilil.IJ; or the
l'ibcrty, power, will, or obligat-iou, of the subject ;v ith

Q UESTIONS.
· fl cc t1o
· n of verbs? \ Vha t is m e ant by
VoiWhnt
ce ? belo
]- ngs. to the in
lo'v rnnn Jv vo ices.. 11 ~:;;
·1· ti ie l rn11 s1t1vc
. .
verb in F c:rl' I 1
Whnt nre th ey 1 JI .. 1
.. n,, •s'
.
ject 1 IT
I .
0'• 'uc.s t 11e a cl. l\"C voice repr ese nt its snb.'
o~v < ocs th e pa s~l\'C voice rl"presc nt it 1 H \ . .
P""'vc voi ce formed 1 \ \ii. l
.
.
.
o' is the
}:fave t} e r r ~
•
,
J, L
VOICC fi O..VC Jlltran sil.ive Vt!flJS 1
.
iye\lrapa~~ 1vclorm?Jhv , tl
.
' Vhc n i t
. .
.
. t l Cy ever n pn .;;s 1vc s en se 1
n. rans1~1\'C YCrlJs arc made tran si tive can tlic)r lie

.

the pass ive vuh:C?

'

. .1

\V lrnt if!

~nhl of . roJ1ri 1

A .

II

.

~l1 1d1ed
•

'ipokt.~n

l•l' .l n!i ii ."
~

•

dc:,·-iJ-11 /Jle, or contingent; as,

•

" H thy presence go not with us carry us not. np hence."-" 0

ui>F1.

U

I

~~: t l~ wo rt.I

•· .--

'I'Ji c

the a rk . .
b u~ <l i ~co v c r eJ

·~xprPS:i

1

, .

·'~

• t.•

entreats, or permit~; as,

studi es rcpre-

w11y fur thi s time .
f;. The INF11'1TIYL lll UO (l

fh u n!h c r .

Cti

r. C ain ~ l t• w Abe l. N un li bu ilt
lt'll
·i t 1iv. . Sl)lo111 0 11 • C U. I Ulll '"'
. ' pl c w as 1•Ju 1
Americn. Pride ruin s th ou ~ a nJ s . MosJ

men a rc g nvcni c <l hy cu stnrn .

Do thi s; Remember thy Creator; Jlcnr, 0 1ny peopl e; Gu thy

~iake

ltl ~ :s• 11l 1: n ce 111 llu~ li:.tlll c \\'<l Y us

I Jin,·e writkn n

!Pl.l<'r

t h:tt h e were wise !"
This mood is snhjoi ncd to another verb, and <lepcmknt on it.

4 . The IMPERATIVE mood commands, exhor\~> ,

<l . tlo~ed, Mi on the finrt,
:' k1 n of In this tiC ut cncel Ami..
he

,. . .
.
. A s nctin... 111 whnl vmco then is
c uico. Ch ~11;; e llic sen tr ncc s ..
111,antl
111•! si une 11u:!.iH111 n o as "t.o
i' gnftnAo dr;i, t'. . ,
-.· An :s.- Gra111 1rut.r i!J

:\11 :-i - A::f'v

mar'' thl' th lno.:

J. Th e S unJuNcTin: moo(1 repre:,;ents tli c fa ct ex-

prc~sr(l by the verb, not as actual, but as conditi:onol,

·'

ii:'"~,

ns.- Ji· Nt 111h c~
f:t:nl .h1h n as ac1ing,or ::i.s acred iu1011 i An d. .,

" .... 1r 1di,• :;i '' I

T l1c win<l. 11w.y blow; 11- c may walk or ride; I wn sieim; lie
wou.ld not sl ny ; Yun slwnld obl" y your parc.nts .

uscu 1n

l:XFH C1'.';ES .
Jn CJ\.Ch or th e followi ng scnrcncci.:, !11P pupil rn n
in lft t! fi11lmvin!! ma1111n: \\'ho i.-:i l it e 11·rsv11

Joh n.

respect to it; as,

t

t

t

exp resses a th"1n ~ i 1 1 ;i r.::1·,,.
era\ manner, wi thout any di;:;lin ction of nunil)(' r •·r
person, and commo nly has to Lefore it; a~:, 'J u l urr

41

I' RA CTI CAL LES ~ 0.'1!! lN

tinuin g, o r, as comph: tcd a t tltc ti ru c spvl-ien o f. 'I'lii'.'I gi •·t·:"t ri ~ "
t i) :' i \ 1r·n:-:f'::: 1 nn!y t"·n oi' ' r hic11 nr e 1• xpn: ~~s l'd i n F n~ l i:":> l1
l·y u
distinct form o r li1e 1·crh. The others are formed by th e aid of
nuxi liary verb s; thus ,

T Tl

.
Oll f.: ERVATIO;\'S .
JC ~nbJuncti,· c mo 11 1. .
° c JI11 ·. · r~.. fro111
tJ · .1·
cco11u and tlJird /)Cr•m,, . ·
.
JC 1nu 1cati \•e on ly in th~
"t b
..
s111 g u a r o/ rhe
o c" differs nlso in I
.
prescu t tc1"c. TJ1e ver b
'' T ' .
t ic I ;1 ~ t tense
-·
•le impcrati•·e mo o.I, s t1·it:tl -. 1· .. "
perso n, s1ng 11lar a nd p lur·· J· l . y S.)c.tl,ing, has on ly the second
e

,1

l1

&.c

JflC ...lll SC Jn COlnHlfl. r

r

an6 1wgc of nd<in:ss i . .~ .
i t 1ng, e xho rting,
er1ui\'alcnt to "r
s .tl\1.l)S used; t hu s, "Le t h im
p·
·
•
,et t/1 011 l1im J
"
l op er 1111p c rnti"e , a11d lnrc t h . . . . ove ; where L et is the
11
L Esso1' LY!JI. l, '.!.]
c " '" 1t 11·e g o l' c rneJ by it. [Sec
.

.i~

•l'

J

.

Jo ,·e,"

)

t'
.
uc Objec t aftf'r it

11

u ~ 11. ered as a v erbal noun
~uses, b11t uo t tJ1c posscs si\'c~
1 a s th e suhJcc t
f
'

J

••

L
o a no the r veru 'r·
F:S SO N x [ r s b
' I us
II . Oll s . ln t1'od.tuA11. &l'1:.(;,. "L;_," u :n u.le II .. and Lt:ss.
- . Ls.>. L\.\ I, ;:) ulJ-ruJ,.s J a11d ~.] .
-~

.

(S

°

"

Of

LElilSON XX .

'il'n.'~cs,

fl• (' \ ' lf'W

S Activ n cunt i nuing:

as, 1 sha ll or wil l lc1 Ye .

(A ct ion cumpletctl; as, I nl mll Jiavc lllV Ct L

>..J Ce

Wf1nt is mootl 1 II
. .
O\.V inn nv rn on<l s n .
1
I ncl1cntH·c
mood cx 111·c-s n • • .
. ' c t icre? I low docs the
S I.
.
.
, ' n •.tc t1on or st<·1 le 7 I
u Jjtinct11·c ?-the Imp e r t' ,
·
- l 1c Potc 11 tinl ?-the
1
do ti ,, ·
anc .-tlie ln liniti1·· 7 I
es re •'"''Jl.lnctivc d iffer J"
.
c·
n whn t part•
son · )
I
'om th e fri dw1tivr 1 Jr
s ins tic Imperative moo 11 1I
-_·
. uw many per.
J •
ow 1""Y tl1 e I nlinitivc m ood
be conRid cred? J\s a vc b
1
N. 1l r , cr" .
r. a llOun , wl1at ca ses fins it?
. .. c1srs on tlJ1 s nnil the f JI
.
.
!er understood nft,• r the
.
O\\'in g L esson will be betT'
· P 11 PI 1 lr as i::one ti
ney n r e tl1crrlor c omi1te<l h ere.
'
iroug h Lesson XXJII.

or Dist-inct·i ons
il1r; l\\'O

fir "' ..,

cc1. d i 11g

of

Time.

J.,. 56011 ~ - J

I J·:xscs arc cntain fo rms of the ''c1·b
to pom t o11t tic·
I di stin ctions oft'
' w l1id1 sen·<!
.

Act1:on con ri11ui 11f.( ; as. 1 lm· f' d, l diJ !twc , l wa::i ltJ\'in; .
) AcfHm com)!fctcd; h...~ I h:id J. ivcd.
1

Tlil' lenses in En;; Ii~h arc six ; ll<tllll' Iy, the 1' 1~­
sc11t., the Prcscnt-pc·1ject, the Past, the 1'usL-pc1fcc t,
th e Future, anll the Fut'llre-pe1jcct .

'-

•ay u» co _. 1

TENSES OI" 'l'l!E l'NDICA'l'lVE :'.IJOOD .

The l1Hlie<tli vc rnooJ has all tl1 e six \cn ses; they
arc used as follow s :
1. The PRESE!S T tense expresses what is going on at
the present time ; as, I love you.

QUESTIONS.

r·

PAST.
FUl' Ult li: .

in v111 g t/J c 11 01 11inrtti \·e nnti <)I ;
. _,
and hence it is ll!-icd <."tJ . . . ';ec tivc

r ~

~Actio n cr.mfinuint;; as. I low•l l do Jo ..·e1 T am lovin !!'.
( A ctiun cumplde.!, a::;, l ha\· f~ OVl'< I.

lS

3 . Tl1 c i11Ji11it il'c rnoo<l
.

XL

l'n K.SEN T.

1mc.

unc is 11 :1111r:tlly div iued i I
p
a111l a11 nctio11 ll1 't1· he "
" o
re< en t , Pu st, and P11tuu .
• •
. it presented, ci tlil'r '" 111 co rn ple 1u a 1Hl cu 11•

f

I

2. The P1u:s t:wr-rERFECT tense re presents nn action or even t as comple ted a t the presen t ti me; as,
"John has cut his finger.'' "I have sold my horse "
"I ha ve done noth ing this week."

3. The PAST t ense expresses what took place in
past time expressed or implied ; as, " God so.id, let
there be light;" " The sh ip sailed when the mail
arrived."
4 . The r AST-PERFECT tense rrpresents an ac tio n or
event as c01npletcll <1l or lH:fore a crrtain past time; a~,
"I lwd walked six miles tlmt day;" "All tl1e judges
Jiad taken their places before Sir H.ogcr came .))

,.

ENGL1Sll G!lAMMAlt.

4.(i

PRACrJCAL LESSONS IN

5. The FUTURE t ense expresses what will ta ke
place in future time; as, ''I w ill see you again, and
your he art s shall rej oice."
G. The FuTVItE- P E JtFECT intimates that an ac ti on
o r event \\'ill be compietecl at o r before a certain
tim e yet future; as, I ~h a ll ha ve got rny lesso n before
ten o'cl(lck to-morro\\'.
Norn. Th e lcn"c" i11flcctccl withnn l an aux iliary, nre called S rntenses i thtl/:-C wi th nn auxilia ry, arc cJ\ll cJ Co~1P OUN D l c n~cs.

l"L E

TEKSES 01r TDE

onrnn.

MOODS.

7. T he Potential mood ha s four te nses j the Prese nt,
t he l'rese nt-perf'cet, the Past, and the Past-perfect.
Tli c tt-·nse:'! i11 flt!..; Inl)')d indi cn.!e thv t if li(' , ll"l r.f u~l' acl ( ' Xj1! '•• ..::..:p, J
by ll1c vc1b, but of the l ibcrl11, J>Owcr, will, ur ubli,qalion, cx prn;c~cd

by the auxiliary or
1

Pig n of the tense ; tl1u~ ,

11

I may write," <loes

Hut exprc"3 th ci act of •1J1·i1;"!l as present, but only tlw li berty to
w rite, expre,,.,cd by the a uxiliary may.

]Jc.11ce th e time ~xprcsse d by th e verb in U1is m ood is less d e finit e,
and dcpeml g n•)t •o mu ch on t he te nse n.s on otl1cr wonls w ith whi ch it
Rf ands C(l11n ectc d.

I Sec Gr.§ 20, ./\11.

Thi~ is

the c a ~o eNpccinlly with tl1 0 Pust kn ~o.

& Pr. Gr. 1 ~8-132 .]

8 . T he Subjunc ti ve m ood, in its prorcr form, has
T he ved.J lob~ bas tl1e present a 11d th e past.
\J. Tile 1lllJ'erati \' C mood 111:11· "l" ·' y:i Lt.: 1 e;;.u dcJ
:is pre~t: nt; i. e. the command, &c. is present, thou g h
th e Joi ng of the act commanded i:.; future.
10. 'l'he Infini ti ve mood has tw o tenses; the Present and the Perfect.
11. J>a r tic iple,s have three ten ses; th o Prese nt,
the Past, and tltc I>erfect; as, Lov ing, loved, having
loved. See Analytical and Practical G1·ammar 4.55.

011ly th e prcsc11 t tense.

LL::-0:-:0U~ :\ ~l.
()( lYu. 111 /JPr and Pason.
·'

(P. "vi cw the

..

.

;. \ir l'C :m: r1· 1llng

1. Ev e ry ten se o

1· ti

Ll\:s~on~.

. I i!!W,~I'" 1hc qu~"tlnn·:
a1H i1 1 .
.

'·'·
-.

.

\·crh exc•".,l in till~ ]1.!1:11·

ic · ·

• ··

\·

·:

tive mood, has twn l\'u~1nERS, til e Si 1~gul:11· . ~111d,.'.::~
I'l ur ~tl and each of 1l1c'"' lias tltrc e l i:::.,11\,, <',. . - : '
in the mpcrative, which has only the S econd.

:;"

' .;~

.· ;:.·
"1 ' ..· ' :

. ¥.,.' ..
-J. ..~ ·.

r.

'· ·~,

'.

;

~

:.

48

!·1.ACTJCA L LESSONS JN

ENG L IS TI GRA MMA!t .

2 . The F msT j)(>rson asse rt s of th e pr rson sp eaki n~; its s uLject is ;:!ways I in t he s in g ul ar, and we
in the pl ura l; as , I write ; we writ e.

n u m lie•? \ Vhat moo1l has only th e seco nd p•·rso n ? or wli o111 ,]u:S
t1 1,.. firs t p r rs0 n n s:;;.e i-11· \\Th at
' i ··' it.~; ; ·s uhj en i 11 tlic ~ rn ~ 11lar?-tn
~
.
the 'l l u1·al"! 0r who1n J oes the secon<.l pc r sun US,f'll l \\ lia; !S
j
.
l ?.-m
.
t • • ··J ? nr \\lioin ur \\".i ;\t
itssuliject
i n t he s111guar
t 1e 11_ 1 11~.i.
.
' ' 1 ~ ~ .... t ·

3. Th e S ECOND p erson asserts of ll1 e pe rson spoken to ; its subj ect is ;-ilw :.i v~ t hou in llic silig ub r,
and ye or yon in t:i c pl ural,
, 'f'lw u· writest; ye or
y ou write .

does the t hi rd p er so n a s"Tt ? ' \' Iia t1 s· 1ts. .,"UhJec t '. . '··• · 1 ~ -Phr ....'>
. each tense n rc a 1·1·
p e r.son sinc:ula
r. 1urmln
i i. e,,. If o 'vi ~
. t h e second
,
.
. J.11·n t 1vc
. ?.- In
.
ti l C• 1•·1. .'.·t
\\ lw- n Is tlt
ed in t he pr c~c nt in
'i tc•11
- sc?
•
•
. e
ti . I 11ersu n si n,, ula r of the p rese n t inJicn t i \' C fo ri ned hy a•l drnf:
lUl
"'
. '. t f,urm '.,l w he n
e<
or elh !-When
Ly n dd i nf; s , or th ? 11uw is
t~t:.! verb e n LlS in y a Ile r a c0 11 so 11an ( 1

·1. Tl1c T 11rnD p e rson asse rt s of t he .rc rson or
th in g spoken of; its :o; uLjcc t is a ny n oun, or th e p ron oun he, she , ·it , or tlicy, use d ins tead of it; as, Jolin
reads; h e walk~ ; t licy run.

;l --';

EXER CIS E S .
1. T cll lhc second p~roo n sin~ular of the !i-llln wing ·•c rbs, an d li ow It ls f•>rm e<t.
2. T ell the 01i rJ pcnion1and linw il is fo rm ~.
.
.
u ,
~l. Pre fix: tlwu to Ct\ Ch \' Cf lJ , w/ ie n 1m l i n th e fll1--.co nJ pt•1-so11 !'l:~~.ll a r; ns,
UlOU

OBSER VA T Tnl'< S.

tdlP s~ .' '

lee. : :rnd hr, lo r·a ch ,

w l11:11

p11l

ii:

Ll1c thi rd; cu:, u Ju..: l<-11 :...

T e ll, speak, sleep , wal k, r ead, learn ,. smell , see , h.c ar,
taste, touch, hand le, write , pay , ca t, Jr rnk , wa rm, te,1ch,
go, do, fil l, play, stand, se ll, buy, s tud y, copy.
.

J. The fir st, scc011d, nncl th ird persons pl urn!, are nl waya like tho
firnt person singu lar.

2. The eccond prmm •ingulnr of the prc•e nt indica ti ve acliro
ends i n st or N;t ; u~, ihou lm:c#; thou reade.~t ; -of the rnst, g' l'n e~
rally iu oL; a~, tlJ u u lu;.:ca'lit. . AU tbo oiLe r persons i11 Ll(_1lh rHim bers in th is tense nre alike.

4. I n the foll1J win ir Wfl l"dP, ld l whkh arc in lfio
S(' co nd and wliy;-l n ll11~ 1)1 1r.!, :i n• \ w hy .
. G. Prefix.
'
to oac l1 w·rti , l 11 t) i t ., f• 1\l ( l \\"i !l'•~ li;o;t , t ho

numbo::!r as th o vcrhj as, /

3. Y crbs tha t end in s, sli., cit, z, x, or o, fo rm th e th ire! pcre.in
smgular of !he present inc!i cati1·e a ctive, by nd Jing e-1, o r, in th e
g rave sly it\ rth; n~, Jfo tcaclics, or teaclwt!t. All others add 11 ur
!!1.; n<t, Ile /v1;t:;, cir tv n 1i 1.

n~t p1·r.io11 1 IU H!

.
pn.tiOtllL OI

- .

!h e

wh y; ·--11 1 th~

, - . ...,.

.,

j
'l

li..' HIH , !•I L >Oll 1U 1d

l oH~ , th ou l ~vcar, ~ c.

I
st loves rnn s run n es t , slee p, tea ch, pre;-ich·
L
ove , ovc , .
• . '
~
._. . cr n i ·. ( r n t(·IJ
es tcachc!) t, ' vn te j , \V J'J lt: , en ts, go1_:-;,
"It, ~ l ,
'
• es , spcal.; s1 Tt_•a1 I ' .rc a J c~' t , .~., t.:\\
. ·~. ' .i.
T)" I\'
=,
teach
- ~ j()!Jl< , \\';1 1t-:~.
.
hop , sl·1·p
cricst, ~tu<ly , sl1t<l 1c s.
JUffip;
'· , lrrn
' ghs > sino-,
o crv,
J
i-.

4 . Ve r us i11 y wi tli :i conson~ 11 t ot forc it , cl1unge y into i before
the terminati ons est , cs, cth, crl; but no t ucfo rc ing; us , try,

•.

triest, tries , tr 'icth, tried , tr ying .
!J'

5. The infin itive mood, or u clause of a sentence , somet im es
ex presses tha t of w hich a pe rson speaks, and is therefore th e sub.
jec t of t he verb. When it does so it is n l\vr1ys rega rd ed us tho
th ird person , and a prononn sta ntling ins tca J of it is in the ne ute r
ge nde r; a s , To piny is pl c:tsan t ; ii prom otes health . [Sub-Rule
II., L Essor; XL!., 1\11 . aml P r. G r. L ess. LXVI. S. Huie I.]
QUEST IONS.
How mnny 1n1111bers hns ea ch te nse 1 ·what m oon hn s no d istinction of num ber or p erson 1 H o w mnny pen:ons urc in encl1

LESSON XXII.

:i,,: .f·

Of tlLe Participles.
.
I - ~ ns nnt, nnswcr pro lll ptl y NHl c orrec tly all th o
[Rcvie·w fo ur prcccdiJ1g .css' 'quc:nioHs.j

r

. _l which ' ·as· <l n·dJ,
c x pre >'~Cs
. ..
;1{ ·1 ject i ve, o11 a ld1cs a noun
a n aclwn or ~ , 1 , '
' ' · '
·
'
.
·
1•·
~1. ' l ,} .c
1 re is u !JnV (!ntz::nng l11n1sc i ;
or suu stant1 ve; ""'
,
f}

A

.

PARTICII'LE is a " 0 11
.
·t· le· and ·1s ·m
•

I'

>.~

.
fJO

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

PRA L"f ! CAL L E!iSONS IN

.Devoted to stu<ly he :;oo n became h:arnc<l; f:laving
jim:~iwd our task, we rn•1y pl<1y.
Verbs haYc three participles; the Present, the Past,
and the P erfect ; as, Loving, Loved, havin[( loved:Being loved, Loved, havi ng been lov ed.
OBSEilYATIONS.
1 . The P re"ent l'arlici1ilc :tdive ends nl ways in fog, 1uul Lus an
active sig11ificat i1.i1; as, Jani es ls buildi11g a h o use. Ju many
verbs, huwc\'cr , it has a bo a passi\·c ~i g nilkation; a 8, The h ouse
w as bu:ilding, ,.,. J,cn the mill ld l.
2. The P1tsl Partic ipl e l1a s !lie same form in both voiccM. In
the acti,·c vuicc, it s sig11if1 eation is active; as, lle bas co11.cealcd n
dagger unde r his cloak :-Iu tl1c p:iss ivc voicl', it s sig nificatio n is
passive; as, He has a dagge r concealed und er liis cloak.
3 . 'fhc P erfect participle is always componnd, ancl lrns an nctivc signifi cation in the active voice, and t~ pa~sive signifi cation in
lhe passi\'e voice .

4 . The participle in -ing is often used ns a verbnl or participial
nmm, Ji a,· in r; the nom inati ve anu objecti ve cases, but not the possessive. In this character , the participle of u transi tive vcr'o
may still retai n th e ovcrnmcn t of l11e vcrl.J 1 or it mny be divested
of it l.Jy inse rt ing th e preposition of after it, in which case an article or ndjcc tivo •lio11ld always prncc<lu it. (Soc cxnmples Gr.
Sy11l11x, \i (\.!; An.,\; Pr. O r. '1(i 2.)
5. Sonic participles, laying aside the itlcn of time, and simply
<1trnlifying u noun , beco me participial udjcc tivcs, un<l as such admit of comparison; as, An <l'l!UJ.sing-a more amusing-a most
amusing story. A most devot ed frieml.
0

LESSON

·i d i th l~ lc !~o n till he ls able to tell
rrhe pupil ahould l1e th oroughly On le '.t .
I '
'
to! the verb
eve ry µart at once and currectly-tLnd to gtve protnpl y nn} par

that mt\Y be required.]

t W•J

jtfuc. 1 ~ 1..' d 1 11~ lu Ll1c ucxl

or

thr ~c r1.• c.it ntl on ~.

L·.: SS<m review

thorou~hly

l

.

l. The conjugation of a verb, is the rcgu ar combination and arrangement of its several moods,

lenses numbers, antl persons.
2. in the active voice, most verbs have two_ furms;
; as,
t e C ommon ,. ,as , I read
· • and the Progressive
_

11

I am reading: See LEssoN XXVII., Note ..

.d these in the present :rnd the past indicative nct1ve, th~ re
B est es
•
I z
{ I did read 'l ho

. n tlii.rd form called the Emphatic ; a., 'o 1-cac '.
.
18
·
I ti ,., 8 , 1vc form ' arc rend 1 the progressive an< ie 1 ' .

other tenses, an a so
·
tl fi t
dcred emphatic hy placing n peculiar stress ~f vu1ce on i e rM
1ave rend-I am reading-it is read.
nuxiiinry ; 118, l
· ·
·t

'
3. In parsing,
a verb is conjugated by giving

principal parts, as follows : Prcsmt.

I ,ove,

.AurrvE.
p ASSIVE.

A nl 1ovcJ,

I

s

Pa st Par/.
Lo\'Ctl .
r ' vc J

Pa.,t.
Loved,

d
'" n..s lvvc '

1ccn JO

'. .

verb, lo love, in the cu111rnon form, is
4 , 'l'I l e i·errular
o
f" II • ·
.in fl cc t e cl tl11·ouirli
all
its moo<ls anJ ten ses, as ouo\' s .
o
ACTIVE VOICE.
PRlNCll'AL PARTS.

Present, love .

Past 1wrticiplc, loved.

Past, loved.

INlllCATIV1': MOOD.

QUESTIONS.

I•ILJr.SENT TENSE·•

Wh a t is u participle? How many participles are there? }fas
the parti ciple in ing c,·cr a pa,s ivc significa ti on? Give nn example. How is th e pcrl'cc t participle used? Describe the use of
the prc,ent partic ipl e us a verbal noun. How do participles become n1ljec ti vcs l What nrc s uch adjectives usually calledf Do
they ndrnit of comparison?
tlleforc

xxn-r.

Of the Conjugation of Ve rbs.

from

tt 1c bogim1.tua

Ir

Siagular .
1. I Jove.
2. Thou lovcst.
3. Ile loves (or loveth) ·
• PlU:SE N1' TENSE.

1. I Jo \~ vc .
'.!. 'fhou t\oAt lu\·c

3. l!o (\ •) C5 ot' doi h Iv·. e

Plural.

.. 1. ·we lov e .
2. You love.
3. They love .
(Empha tic Jor m)
1. \Ve
~-

1\iJ

l v \' c .

Yut1 du lo\'e.
Thev tlo ln·.-e .

.t
;tr

52

E~GLISH

PRACTICAL LESlONS IN
PRESEN;· PEJl PF.CT TENSE (PERFECT).

S ign,

hafJI.

1. I hn>c lo>cd.
2. Thou hast loved.
3. Ile has or hnth lo\•ccl.

PAST TENSE.•

1. Wo loved.
2. You loved.
3. They loved .

PAST-PERFECT T E NSE

POTENTIAL MOOD.

~~--·

1. '\Ye have Jovcu.
2. You hnve loved .
3. They have loved.

1. I loved .
2. 'fhou lovcdst.
3. Ile loved.

:g_·,il.-~.'"

(PLUPERFECT).

.

·~

Signs, may, Can, mult.-Infiect with encb.

Singular.
1. I may love.
2. Th ou mayst love .
3. Ile mny love.

Plural.
1. "\\' e may love.

2. You'.m ay love .
3. They n1ay love.

PllESEN'f-PEilFECT TENSE ( PEltl'ECT).

Sig ns: may have, ca" ltane, • mtut /Jat'e.-r11tl i.:c l with each.

1. I n;:iy have loverl.
2. Thou mayst have 10\·e<l .
3. Ile may have lo>cd

Sign, had.

1. I had loved.
2. Thou hadst loved .
3. Ile ltacl loved.

53

GRAMM.AU.

1. \Ve may have loved.
2. You may liave lo1·c<l.
"· Tlicy may !Jave Joyed.

PAST T ENSE.

1. We had loved.
2. You had loved.
3. They had loved.

Si g- 1L~,

might, could, 1001lld, 1/wuld.-Intlcct w il h each.

1. I might love.
2. Thou mightst lo1·c.
3. He might lo\•e.

1. 'l'' c

mi ~bt

lo\·e.

2 . Y{.•fl rnight

3. 'l'J1ey might

Ion~ .

lO\' C,

FUTURE TENSE.

PAST·!'EltFECT TENSE (PLUl'EHFF. CT ).

Sigrui, •hall, will.-Inflect with eoch.

Signs, might. !mu':, cvu1d hllm:, would liave , should /t(u:t.-l110cct '\\'ith cacb

1 . 1 5hnll lovo.
2. Tliou shalt love.
3 . Uc shall love.

1. \Ye shall lovo.
2. You shall love.
8. They shall love.

1. I migl1t li:n-c loved.
2. Tli .. u mi1'h1Rt have loved.
3. Ile might La m loncd.

1 . \\-e migl1t lia·•e loved.
2. You rni1'l1t l1an: loved.
a. 'l'licy n1iglit 11:no loved.

SUll.TUNCTIVE MOOD.
FUTORE-PRltl'ECT TENSE.

Signs, shall liave, will have.-Inflect with onch.

lt

1. I shall have loved .
2. Thou shalt lw.ve loved.
3. He shall brwc loved.

*'

~

1. ·we shall havo loved.
2. You shall have loved.
8. They shall havo loved.

rRESl:iN'l' TENSE

1. If I love .
2. if thou love
3. If he loYe.

• Can hat•t is not used in urrirmative scntence:s-

t The Prese nt sulij11 J1 cti\·e

~

"PA.SI'

I

!I

,, ff
'

rn,;sE .• (Emphaticform.)

l. I did Iovo.
2. Th ou clidst l o n~.
3. Ile diJ lovo.

1. ·we Uid love.

2 . You di1l k)\'e.
3. They ~lid lo\'C.

(Subjunctfoe fo1·m) .t
1. If we love.
2. if yo11 love.
3. If they love.

i~

he re g ive11 in tw1l

form ~ :

~·

1st in th e 8u'1j1airtfre

or elbpt.frol/1J1'm, used wlH:ll bot h co11ting c11cy a nd futtJrity urc irnpli1;d; nnd 2 =1,
th e itub'.0Ui1u form, uio c·tl wh e n contiu,.;ency only, und n<H fuiur!tr i-; imr1!ied. I n

pursi ng , the latter slwulti lie called the 1r i1hlicuti\'C used su1.j u 11c 1irc! y 1 • 1 bciog
th e inJicntive mood in form, u11J rend ered. subj1u1(;ti»e only by 1hc co n1u11clh\l1
prefixed. Thi~ i ~ true ii.l .'.!o of the other tenses m thi_.._ mood.
The e1nphu ti c tor111s of 1hc pre~e:nt are, If I 1ln lot:(. 1 ;! Oum do lo1:c 1 if he do
:ove , etc . ; of the pa1;t, If I did lotJe, if th ou diJL6l lorr., c1c. 1~ in the indicat i,·e

·,

~,;

\
~, .

'

I

i
I

?·
;

'

,•,_,:..

•.;.-.

54

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN
PRES ENT TENSE

F.NGL!5H

(Indicat ive form) .

I. If I love.
2. If thou lovcst.
3. If he loves (or lo\'cth) .

, 1. If we love.
2. If you Jove.
3. If tL cy love.

I 1 RE SE N'f-l'k:llFECT TENS }!. ( n: m ·r::cT).

1. If I have Jo,•cu.
2. If t hou hast loved.
3. If he has or hath loved.

1. If wo l1avc loved.
2. If you Jiavc loved.
3. If they have loved .

PA ST TENSE .

1. If I loved.
2. If thou lovedst.
3. If he loved.

1. If wo loved .
2. If you loved .
3. If they loved .

PAH S1:sc.-A \'erb is parsed by stating its k i11 J,
(i. e. wlidher transitive or intransitiv e,) its form,
(wlitthcr regu lar or irr('g t1lar,) co11jup;a/i11g it, an<l

telling in wl1:1t

f!>ns c, muod, ?' <l'icc, n11111/J cr ,

I. Ifwc had loved.
2. If you had loved .
3. If they had loved.

2. If tho u hadst lo\•ed .
3. If he had loved.

l'UT URE TENSE.

1. If I shall or will love .
2. If thou sl1al t or wilt love.
3. If he shall or will lovo.

1. If we shall or will love.
2. Jf you shall or will Jovo
3. If they shall or will lorn

FUTUH.E -J>ERli'ECr TEN SE .

1.Ifl shall ur will hnve lovetl.
l./fwo shnl\ or will hnve lovecl
2.lf tLou ,hrtlt or wilt have loved. 2.If you shall or will have love(].
3.Ifhc shall or will liave loved . 3.Jftheyshall orw illhavclovcd
IMPERATIVE MOOD.

Singular.
Plura l .
Common form . 2. Lo ve, or love thou . 2. Love, or love ye or you .
Emphatic form . 2. Do thou love .
2. Do ye or you love .
INFINITIVE MOOD .
PRESENT,

To love .

PERF.ECT 1

To have loved.

:rnd

per-

son, it is f'ou1 " l; ;.!so its sulijccl _; tl1u:-;,
"He loves ." Lures is n \·c rb, trnn ~ it ivc, re 4"11l a r; lovr 1 lov(·d,
loved; found i.n th e prese nt, in dicative, ucLi·• c,; thinl pen~on, sin
gular; and utiirms of its Frnl1ject, he.
N. Il. It is i1n portant jn pa rsi Hg tu s tate e ve ry thi ng bclorq;ing
to a word in as few wunls us pos:siLle, arn.l al Wu)':; in th e same

order.

QUESTIONS .

PAST· PERFECT TENSE (PLUPERFE CT).

1. If I had loved.

Gll.AM~IA.R .

What is the conjugntion of a nr!J? ITo"· is a wrh ronj11g;,.•ed./
Conjugate the verb loi·c in tLe activ e voice . S;1y tli c in1 iicat i,·c
p resen t-past-future -the prese nt-pe rfect - the p:1st ·J>l'rfc·ctfutn rc-pcr fcct. Say lh c fi1·st person singular, in l'at'h kl "P-;-lh n
~ccon cl-th c thi rd- the lir~t pe rson plnral-tl 1e St'C011J-tl1e tl<irrl.
Say t lrc cmpl1atic forn 11 in th e prcsl'11l-in th1' )\"st. \\'h ;lt a n)·
~ iµ;11s ( 11r a ll x il i ari\· ~ )

fl 1C

t>f t lu: prc sc nt. 111•rf1"'t:! 1-t lw pa :-:.t .i u.:rft ·cl'!

-tl1e f11tur c?-the ful11re -pc: rfl'Ctl-llic s11hj1111ctin · pr"'"nt lpres e nl-pcrl'ect?-pasl?-pagt-pcrfcc ~? &c.
\rl uit i,, ihc sign of
I li e· i.nfiniti\'Cl

EXERCISE I.
l. Go over tl1 e following Exercise, cwd tell Lh c tcJJ 8e, rn.ood, an'l \'Oic.e of ca.ch
verb; tl1us , "He lo'Vt:.-; , 11 present, i11Jic~tiv e , octivt!.
2. Go over it u.gai11 1 anJ te ll l11c p e r~m aud number; Lhu ::J, lot•cs, third person.,
singular.

3, Gu ov e r it again, lVHl j·•in Lli csc toi;elli e r, and so tr:U 1lic tense, moo<l , voice,
number, a.nd p,..risou; n 11d always !u tl1i111 order; W3.,

{Q'(Jt4 1

present, indie&Live,

nctivc, ll1ird pcmm, si ugutar.
ln lh e impe rative, omit tlle ten~, a.ru.1 say thus, love tA0141 imperative, ac.live, aecond perso n, tiin gu.lu.r.
[n tho infiui1.ive1 omH Ll1c pcraon and nwnber, and BliY thus, To Woe; present,
infinitive, active.

J'AR'l'ICIPLES.
PRllSF.NT 1

Loving.

PAST,

Loved.

In th e panidple, nam o only the tense and voice; thus, Wving; present parti ciple,
l'ERFECT,

Jlav ing loved .

active.

n. T he pro-rwun is no part of the verh, but helps to s l1ew it..q person And
numhcr ; 1\nd the auxiliari(!H (or Bigm) are not taken aiepar>1.tel y, but always \vUh
N.

.

- ~-

tho vc rh : eo thnt tho two wor11l', nnd 3omctlmo.11 tllrco, as In tho pa,1 1-pc rfoct

EXE!l CTSE JJ r.

pot~ nlh\I , nro pnr~cd togc lhcr as onl! word; lllU~, hat.ie loved, th o prer:1ent -pc rfec t
lnd1c.n tl\' e, ncl ive, &.c.

J. 1'/i c Nom-ina tt vc Case.

N. Il. Tl1is E ."tcrcise sho nl d be repcntec.J ti ll the pupil can do It correctly, rnpidly,
and easily, and with out m issing, eiL1H! r In the number or ord er of. ril e Llthl!;H to
be stated.

He loves, they love , I have loved , you will ln ve , th t' ll
teachest, they will learn, h e has written, I h ad given ,
_Jam es will go , Joh n may come, he mi g ht read, they
would have st udied, child ren pl ay , boys studied, th ey
<lid stud y;. ·writ e th ou, come ye. To love , to s in g , to
have played, rea d ing, sleep in g , runnin g , loved, learned,
havin g loved , havin g gon e, birds fl y , horses g alloped,
the fire b urn ~, the sun <lid shine, the moon has chon!!e<l.
N . D. Pupils may be r equired to m ake exercises of tltls kintl fo r

G7

ENGLISH GRAJ\lMAR.

PRACTICA L L ES SONS IN

Oit:nl)l;t:l~:e.tt.

EXERC ISE II.
Defore br.~i nning thls E .l erc!sc, !..:·t t!i c IJupil go buck and rt:\"lt:w thon.;u:;li!y L R~
OON XVI. nnd tl1 c exercises on It ; rlien

l . T ell whi ch words are Yerbs, ant.I why ; nnJ wln: the r lran1dlive or imrn.nsJtlve,
ru 1d , .... hy.

;:...· . B . 1\ \'erL in t l112 ndivc voice tells what ~nn~t· JH.-r:-on or thing
That pt.T~on or th ing- t he n is ih s nhjf·c-t and i~• in tlu~ nomin a ti ve c a ~ c: t hu s . in the fi rs t Sf' n tcnc1~ of the prf'ccding 1 ·:xerci~e,
the v:onl ' 1 lo ves,~' tells \'·:hat "he" d ues; he 1 tl 1c r1·(un.'. is its sub
jcct, and is in th e nom.i11ative c.ase .

,1 0...·~ .

1

1

]'oiu t out the YCrlJ in cuch se11 tt:ncc of !he pr~n·r l i11:_: t::<•·rri :o··; !•' Ii what word
ls H:i subject, un d wliy1 \ Vhat <:rt...'W i~ 11 .c tiul 1J ·d t 1i l

2. 1'he Objective C ase.
A tra ns itive vab in the activ e voi ce tell s \\'hat it;; ;;uhjec t tl oes
to some other person or thin g . Thot prr son o r t h in!!. is tlir· objed
of th e v erb, n nd is jn tli cobjective case. Thus, in the ah r, \·c ~en­
tc ncc, "Ile lov e s u :s, " l u1:cs is n tr an~ it ive vcrh, nnd tdls what
i1 s su bjert , he, does t o tu. Us , th e n , is its obj~ct , nnd is in t he
objective case.
The nominative , or subject, is usually uefore tl1e verb; the ob;cctive is u sually after it.

'J

Point out tltc tran.<;itrne v erbs i11 !he prec eding E xi:rdse. 'I\:l.I what word la the
object in each acn11:111:.e, and whut case it is in.

\

:l. T ell the ir lcnse, mood, voi ce, person, and numhcr, as in th e preced ing Ex ercise.
3. Go °"er it ngnin1 nml pa.rsc cnch ,·crh hy pulli ni; ull thefte togelhc r ; thus, for tUJ,

i..l

~

EXERCISE IV.
Parsing.

ts n ve rb, transi tive, in Lho present, indica.tivc, A.Clive, lhlrd J)<' rson, s! ugulnr.

He loves us. I w ill love him. Goocl boys will s m<ly
th eir lesso ns: Children love play. The dog ki lle <l m y
rabbit. .Tam es has writte n a le tte r. Cows eat ha y. A
fi re warms the room . Bring some wood. I have studied
g rammar. G iris may write lett ers. Your sister can
smg. He would like to hear a song. Give th a t book
to me. I will give this book to you. Lend me your
pe n. C hil<lren should obey th e ir parents; th ey sh~uld
love God. Remember th e Sabba th <lay, to k eep it. All
m e n must die. T ime waits for no man. Do good to
all m en. J ohn will me nd my pe n; I will th a nk him.
You woulcl ob lige m e by a ss isting me to learn this lesson. Tell Henry to shut the door.

.'

1

.. '

Go over th e preced ing Exc rci!-'c, nn<l p :1nW C'ach Wt ·rd in Pr, l1·r ;the

nOtLn 3

'

ns till"..:C !«d, l.f<:s~o N V l lf, p. l 'J ;-lln.: arficfrsns din•rted,

Ltcsso>r IX, p. 21 ;- th e adjectiv"-' HH dir<'Clcd, Lt<:HHO~ X I. p. ~;, ;-the pronouns ns din..: ctcd, LESSO:-f x Ir, p . !! 8 ; H. !h.l tliu l' t J"IJt. ns Ji.
r eeled in this L"ssoN, p. 56.

..~

$·~
•J
I.~:·

.~
I

LESSON XXIV.

.'

Negative Fonn of the Verb.

''.!

The verb is mnde to deny by placi ng tlH' w ord not after the sim
ple form; as," Thou Jov estn o!;" and uetv;een the aux iliary nnJ
the verb in the compound form; as, "I do n ot Jove ." \Vhen two
nuxiliitri es are used, not is placed between th em; us, I u:o1dd not
ha ve loved.

!\

i}

~
~

f,_.

~·

;

J

;;

58

ENGLISH GitAJ\lMAR.

l'HA CTICA L Lb:SSONS IN

In the infinitive and participles. th e nr:gatirc is put fi;·st, a.a,
N ot to love; not loving.
The simple form is seldo m u sed w ith th e nega ti ve. In the
present nnd past ten ses, tlte co1\lpound or emphatic form Is more
oommon . T J:e followin g syno1isis will s hew th e mann er of usi ng
the nega ti ve.

LESSON XXY.
Int crre>g.ative Porrn of the Verb.

11\DICATJ.VE MOOD .
P11£SENT.

I'Jll~S .

l. I tlo not love.

l'EHV. l. I
PA ST.
1. I
PAsTPEnF . 1. l
FuTuRg.
1. I
FuT. Pf: R. 1. J

2. 'l'hou dust not lorn, &c .
li:we 11,1t loved. ~ . Th ou l!ast not loved, &c
,, T hou didst not love , &c.
ditl not Jo,·c .
had nut lo,·cd . 2 . Tho u l1atlst not loved , &c
will n"t,l•wc.
2. Tl!ou wilt not lo,·e , &c.
~hall not have · 2. '1'11 011 shalt not have
loretl.
lo r col , &c.
l'OTE~'l'IAL

Piu;~ENT .

1. I cn n not lo\'c.
P ltt;s. l' irnr. I. I m ay not ha vc

lorctl.

1. I might not lo,·c.
PAST. P£ll Y. 1. I might not have
PAST.

loved .

llfOOD.
2. Thon ca 11st not love, &c
:!. 'l'l11.n1 mayst ll ol have
1 1"· ~ <1, i c .
2. 'l' l1o u 111ight ;t not love, ~'.::.
2. Thou mig htst llOt Jiave
loved , &e.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PnESF.NT . I. If I clo not love . 2. ~{th ou do not Juve, &c.
TJ1c other tenses th e sn m c a s in t ile indi cat ive .

I MPERAT IVE J\I OOD.
Sing. 2. Love not, or do not l'lur . 2. Love n ot, or do not
thou lov e.

ye love.

INFINITIVE MOOD.
PRESENT. Not to love.
P En}·. Not to have loved.

PARTI CIPLES.
PR ESENT. Not loving.
PA ~T Not loved.
PEnF. Not hav ing loved.

59

j

'l'hc ve rb iti made to ask a quc~lion by plaeiug Lite uominative
Jr sulij cet afte r the simple form; as, Love"t thou 1 1u1d \Jctwcen
the auxiliary nn<l t.he verb in the cornpouw l lu nus ; as, !Ju I love?
\Vhen th ere arc two u.uxili11rics tho no111iuu.tive is 11lac~d Lctwccu
the m; as, S imi! I harn loved 1
The suujunclivc, irnperutive, infinitive, nn J p3rti ci plcs, cannot
have the interrogative furm.
'!'he sim ple form of the verb is scldo1 n u sed interrogatively .
The foll ow ing sy nopsis \vill show how tho verb i; put into tLo
interrogative fo nn .

PRES>: NT .
l.
l'irns.P;c a F.1.
1.
PAsT .
r AST P ERF. 1.
FuTURE .
1.
FuT . Pim . 1.

INDICATIVE MOOD .
Do 1 love?
:.!. Dost th ou love 1 &c.
Have I loved 1
2. Jfast thou loved? &c .
Did I love 1
2. Didst tho u lol"C ! &e.
Had I loved?
2. Had st thou loved ? &c .
S hall I love 1
2. ·wm th ou Jo\'(: 1
Slmllili:wclove(\12. Wilt thou have lovccl? &e.
POTENTIAL i\IOOD .

PRESENT.
P in;s. P f;nr
l'AsT.
l'AST PERF.

1. J\fay I love 1
2.
1. ]\fay I have luvcrl 1 2.
1. Might I Jo,·e1
2.
l. ]\light I h ave
2.
lovcJ 1

Cu n"t t hou )(!\"C? &c.
Canst thou l11nc Jo,·c1l ? &c.
Co ul tlst th ou Ju,·c 1 &c
Couldst th on liavc
loved 1 &c.

Oas. Interrogative sentences nre mu<le negative by r lacing the
negative e ith er before or nfter th e nomina tive; as, Do I not love!
JJr. Do not I love?
Q1JESTIONS.
How is n verb matle ncgrtlit>e f Wh ere is the nc~ativc placed
•n the si mp le form? Wh ere, in the compountl form? Wh ere.
1.,nen th ere are two nux il iarics? \ Vhcre, in the infinitive nnd pnr.
tic1ples? Say the indicati ve prese nt in the negative form .t h.roug h·
ou t;-the other tenses.

60

PRACTICA L LESSONS IN

ENGLISH GR.AMMAR.

How i~ the verb made intcrrogntiYe? 'Where is the nominative
p:ace<l m the simple form? ·where, in th e compo und form 1 vVh ere,
wh e n th ere arc two unxiliarics? \ VJiut parts of th e verb cannot
be ·used interrogatively 1 Say t he indicative present throughout,
interrogatively. Say the other tenses .

61

l'ltl<SENT·!'Y.lll'EC'.f TENSE (Pl<lt!'E\;"f)

Sjgn, have,

1. I have been.
2. Tliou lw.st uecn.
3 . Ile bas been.

l. \\'c !Jave been.

2. You have [J('Cn.
3 . They have l1ecn.

EXERCISES.
], Put the verb, in lhc follo wln~ ~ nt c 11 ceH ,l11h> !he nega!lve form.
!l. rut the ve rb, in lhl' fulll>w ing sc 111 enccs 1 iuto lh ~ interrogative form.

a. Distinguish the differen t parts of speech,
Exe rci8c, IV.

IUld

parse

t11e 111,

ns in the preceiling

I love yo u. You loved me. James studies gram mar. Your fathe r has come. He will go soon. Tlie
ship found ered at sea .· John would eat apples. Apples
will grow on thi s tree. The horse will run a race. The
fox had catche<l the goose. Rabbits cat dover. SLudy
overcomes most difficulties . Labor promotes health.
W ealth makes the man. Poverty scatters friends. The
ships sail. The sun has se t. The moon rose. The
s tars will shine.
N. Jl. J,1~ t the pupil~ mrtke similar CX(' rd SP.8 for lhen~v... 1 nncl panw them.

PAST TENSE.

L \\."c were
2 . You were.
3. 'J'~y were .

1. I was.

2. Thou wast .
3. ITe was.

",.;

P .·' "T·PgRFECT TENSE (f'L ll i' E ltFECT) .
Sifin , hrul.

1. \\'.., lmu been.
·• ·y!•tl Jt,Hl been .

1. I bad uccn.
Tl11111 liatlst 1n-x:11.

"
"

v.

lie had been.

v.

'

.. ~I

Th'-'Y had b<!en.

}"UTU RR TENSE.

Sigm•, 1hall, will.-Iufi cc t wilh cuch.

1. Wesl1allbe.

1. I shall be.
2. Thou shalt be.
3. H e shall be.

2. Y oll ~hall be.
3. They shall be.
'l
'l

LESSON XXVI.
The Verb TO BE.
[The pupil should be drilled rhor<mc:ldy in thi s Lesso u,

a.,, ii\\ BB•ON XXHl.J

The intransitiye i rregula r verb To in:, is inflect~d
through all its moods an1l tenses, as follows:

J. I ~hall have bcmi.
2. Thou Rhnlt have been.
3 He shall have been.

P OTE::STIAL :MOOD.

!'RlNClPAL PARTS.

PHsent , nm.

Past parl-ic'iple, h"cn .

Pa st , w:\8.

lN"JJIC/\TIVE MOOD .
1·n1·:s 1·: '.'n

Singular.
I nrn.
2 Thou art.
3.Heis.

TEN SE .

Phtrnl.

1. ·we nre.
'2. You arc.
3. Th ey nrc.

1. lie "l\ali l1avc been .
2. Y<>n sliitll have Leen..
3. They shall bavo been.

J'TlF.SENT T ENSIC

S ig n.c;i, may, can, •nust. - l11tlect witl1 each.

Singufor.
l. I may be.
2. Thou mayst be .
3 Ho may be,

Plurul.
1. \\Tc may be.
:.!. You may be.
3. Tli ey rnay he.

:,

l.

64
:\ 111

PliACT!CA L U:SSONS IN
tl1 :l fnllowi n ~ J:f' n fl" l'H' •""::i, p a r ~,.

EN GLISH ORA)1!1IAJt .

lh" wi 1nls in o n.l<'r i

~mm, 111•1111· .-1 the 1io11ii 1111 tivc J"ti11~ 11 \ar , J,('i~~,11:41• tho !; lll•Jl·c f

thll ~ ,

o f is:

o

u S uoUJ ,. l:i n
JrJ ," is ~ verb

1ntram11 11 vr 1 llTq_;ula r; am, 1ro1:1·, l1u11: i1 1 1lw pn•:w nl , indiC' ali \' f', th ird J·Cr Sil n sin:
giibr:

ii

irhil~,"

i!'i an adj•

rll\•',

• 1t1 :ildi··~

.or11 (J tt•

i f' •111tpar"d, u:hile, tDhiltr,

wh:ie.t.

Snow JS white; he n-:i s a !!O Od 1nan; w·C' ha 1rc been
youn g er; she h as beC'n happy; it had b een late; we
ar~ old; you ';ill b e wi se ; it will be time ; if tllC'y be
tl11ne ; be caut10 u~ ; be heetlf11 l youth ; we mny be rich;
th ey shou ld be v irtuous ; th o u migh tst be wiser; th ey
must have been exc elle nt scholars ; th ey migh t have
been powerful.

2. Chango th e fol1owin¥ , frum. lh e progres.•nve into the simple !o nn :

...

W c arc writin g , thC'y w er e srn g ing , th ey have brcn
riding, we mi gl1t be walkin g-, I may have lJcc n sleep in g ,
they arc coming, thou ar t teachin g , th <'y h ave be1.·n eating, he has b cc 11 mov in g , we ha ve lJccn defendi ng ,
they had b ee n runnin g .

:i. P1U"'Se the above vcrb::s, in Lhc progres.<i.i ,·c form; lhus, " H'~ arl! 1r-riting ;''
1
"are ten.ting," is a. ve rh, tram;ilive, irrcgula.r; tm'ite, w·rofl!, tl'ritk1i: [!4 ' '-= LE:>f'IOIC
XXIX .} in 1.he prt.:ti\· 111, imlic.a.tivc , active, firg l perso n, plura.l, progressive fu rm..

LESSON XX.VIII.
PASSIV E VOIC E.

LE SSON XXVII.
Progressive Form of the .ll.ctive Vo·ice.

Th~ P1t0GRESSIVE form or the verb is inflected by
prcfixmg the v erb lo be, through all its moocls and
ten ses, to the present pa rti cipl e; thus,
I am wriling .
2. Thou nrt w riting , .U:.
I have been writing . 2. Thou hast b een writing, &c.
1 w n..q writing.
2. Thou ·waf4t writing, k c.
I hot! been writing, 2, Thnu hnd st been writi110' &c
"' .
I •lmll be writing. 2. Thon •hnlt bu writing, <le,
.F UT. ] 'J<Jl P,
1. T • hall nr will
'.!. Thou Ahalt or wilt havo
.
have been writing.
l;ccn w ritio g, &c.
J n tlus mnnn cr i;o through tlw oth er m oud• nnd tense•.
NoTJ~. Verbs wlii c1 1, iu tho cornmon form ini ply co ni'iuuanct\ do
not u sually admit the progressi ve for m ; thus, " I a111 lovi11g" (i f
proper), would m e:tn noth ing more than, " I love."

1.
l'1tY.8, I'&llF. 1.
PAST.
l.
r A8T Pf:tn·. 1.
F
'UT Vll l'..
1.

a,J,lin g tk
pasl participle to the auxiliary \'t:rb lo be, t hrou ~h
a11 its mood~ anJ tenses ; thu f' ;
The PAss1 VE. voice is inflccte1l Ly

Pres , Am loved.
I N lll CATl VE MOOD .

l'Il ESE>"T.

EX ERCISE!;.
1. Chango_th e follow ing verbs from

l-..

e "'implo into Ut e

pm~ r css i \·e

Sing11.lar.
1. I nm loved,
2 . Thou art Jove1l.
3. H e is loved.

P / 11.rnl.
] . '\'<• :H<' lo\'Cd.

'.!. You a ro loved.
?.. They aro loved .

PR ESENT· l"1'1t t"ECT TE!' SE (P E la· EcT) .

,Sign, have.

1. I have been l oved.
2. Thou h a~t been luvc<l.
3. H e has l>cen l oved.

fonn:

He wn tc:s, they read , thou tea ch est, w e have learned,
he had written, th ey go , y:-u will build, I ran, John has
done it, we tau ght, he stands, he stood, th ey will stand,
they mny r ead , we can SC \'.. yo u should stud y, w e might
bnve rend .

, .. '

!'RF.BENT T ENS F..

1, ·we have been loved .

2. You have l 11·cn loved .
3, They have been lornd
PAST TENSE,

L I was loved.
'2 . Thon wast loved.
3. He was loved

""c were loved .
2. Yon were loved.
j\ Th'-"Y wNc lovctl

l,

... "'

I I~
;., ·'

l

'.

66

l'AST-l'F.llFECT T ENSE

1. I had been loved.
2. Thon hadst been loved.
3 . He had bcea Jo,·cd.

PAST · P}; Itl'F:CT T ENSE (P L UPEUFE CT) .

(l' LU!'EUFECT ) .

Sig n, had.

1. W e hat! been loved .
2. You hail bee n loved .
3. Th ey lrnd been loved .

l I I e wou ld hove ahould havc.-Iufi ect with each.
Signs, might /la ve, cou ' iav '
. '
~ . d

_

1 " ' tl mi)l;h t h a \"C l>cc n lo'c

b en \01·cJ.
1. I might ha\"C hccn lo_, ed.
·
.
. <\ 2 You rnt " ht 1iavc e ·
. .
'":
' ·" I . •d
2 Thou mi " ht st h ave b cc n l ovc
.
n
I
.... 1'l1cy rn io·0 hl han_· ~('n o~ t
».
,
3 _ U c nlig; ht have uccn lovcc .

F' UTU lt E 'l'EN'SE.

SUIJJUNCTJV£ !11000.

S ig 11s 1 ~lrnll, will.- lnfl ecl wi 1li tur h.

1. I shall be lo ved.

J . IY c shall be loved.
2. Yon shall he lovc·d
3. They ahall be lo ved .

~-

Thon Hlialt l>t' lcffe d.
3. lic: sl,all l>c lon !11.

X'UTUR E-PEnP t.-:CT TEN SE .

S1g-ns, 8htdl lta·v e, icill /rn ve. -Infl ec t w ith en~· h .

1. I shall have bee n loved .
2 . Th ou shalt h:w e bee n 101·cd.
3. He shall have bee n 101•cd .

1. W e sliall lta1·e bc "n loved.
2. Yon shall have bee n love(!.
3. They shall have bee n loved.

POTENTIAL J'i!OOD.

67

ENG LISH GRAMMAR .

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

l'IlE, EN l' TENS>:

(Subj 1tncl fre f or'lll).

Plural.

Sillgnlar .

1. If we be loved .
2. If yon he lov1'd
3. Tf they be Joyed.

1. If J be loved.
2 . If thon uc Jo,·cd.
3 If h e uc loved.
l 'AS'l' T ENS E .

( S 11 /, j 1mcl i'l'e f or 111) ••

1. Jf I were loved.
2 . If thou were or wert l01•cd.
3. If he were lovct.l.

l. J( we were loved .
' 2. Jf you wer e lovrd .
3. Jf they were l ov~d .

PR F.~F.NT T EN~F. .

S ig n~,

I MP E RATIV E

trtoy, can, mtut.-Jullect with coch.

Singular .
1. I may be loved.
2. 'l'lt on mayst uc lo ,·ctl.
3 . He may be loved.

Pfontl.
l. W e mny be lo ved.
2 . Y o u ml\y uc loved.
3. T hey 1111ty ue loved.

M OOD .

P lural.

Siiignla r.

z.

1. Ile th on loved .

]3c ye or yun loved. '

INF J :"\ITJVE MOOD.

'

l'llE ~EN T· l' f. IU-'f:C T T E NSE {l' I<: JtFE CT ) .

Sig 11~ 1 mny IMrc, nm lt1u·c 1 must /uuic.- l ullc c t with each.

1. I may have bcc•n loved .
2. Th on mayst h:we been lov~rl.
:i. lie m ay ha ve uce n loved.
PA ST

2. Th o u mightst be lo1·crl.
a. He might be loved.

T o be loved .

Perf.

To l1nvc uceu loved .

l ';\Il.T!CJPLES .

Pa st, Lo ved.
P resen t, Ilci11g; lo1·cd .
Pofccl, 1Ta"'ing been 1un•d.

1' Jo:N ~E .

Si~n!'l 1 mi1:ld , r.011/,/ 1 :~011/d,

1. I might uc lo ,·e1l.

1. \ Vo may have bee n loved.
2. You m11y hi\ ve uccn lovccl.
3. T!Jey ruay have been loved .

Present.

ahofl hl.- IuO cc t with eue li .

1. W e mig ht uc loved.
2 . You mi ght l>c loved.
3. T hey might be loved

.
le te11"es i11 1he1'nm e rui th e in•Jicativc w ith u c c .'\~
· 'f
luvtd J'f / trtu lovtd, lf I
1•
.
. .
If 1 am lut:td , J 1 11aut. 11cut
1
junctwn prefixed , t\111 s,
.
I
d l'f l 11ha. ll havt. bun. loved
lad ltccn l11i1id, If I 1/wll or uall bt. vv t '

-The indicnu ve forin mull ll

.
'{ ,,

GS

P RACTI CAL LE:SSONS IN

ENG LIS H GRA MMAR.

E XER CI SE I.
On the P as.<fre Voice.
I. 1\:U th o ten.<;e, 1r:ond, p er-son, irnd m t11il1cr o ( U1e followiug' words in the pa.a.
ai vc voice

j -t: h tt 11 !!1J

th 1' rn i111 0 1h e :t ciivc f.•n n.

·

2. Go ove r the ex n ci;:.;P. agtt in, 3.11 •! pa r:ie " ac h w on .I In ord er i 1lin :;1 11 Th ry," is
1

tilt' th ird perso11al prn1 11>u11 1 n rn.~<' 11l i 11 1• 1 ( nr f•' 11111 d11t•) 11 1•· 1M11 1i 11H'l\C 11l ur:1I , lho
tiUlJjec t of arf! l1n:ed : u a r e lorl!.f, " is n .,,.,..rb, trans ili v" , !11 rhc p n·~f' nl, lmlicali\·e.
pas~ive, tldrtl p1~ rsu n 1 pli tra l, beca use it.'l subj ect, " they," L'J tliirtl pe nfOn , plur:tl

T hey arc loved ; w e we re love d; th ou art lo ve d ; it
is loved ; s he w as loved ; he bas l> ec n love d ; you have
be e n lo l' ed ; I h uvc b ee n J,n-c' d ; 1ho u had st hcen loved ;
w e shall be love d ; th ou wi l t be lo ve d; th ey wi ll be
loved ; I s ha ll have been love d; yo u will hav e b ee n
love d.
He can be lo ved; thou mays t be loved; she mus t be
lo ved; th ey mi g ht be lovc<l ; ye would be love d; they
shou ld be loved ; I could Le loved; th o u mays t have
been loved; it may !:a ve Lee n loved ; yo u mi g l1 t have
b e en loved ; if I be lov e d ; if tho u we rt love d· th oua-h
w e b e loved ; thou gh th ey lJe loved. Be tho~ lov ed;
be ¥e loved ; yo u b e love d. T o be love d; loved ; having b een lo\·ed ; to ha ve bee n loved; be in g love d.

l . Jn th e follow in,tt Ex"rt isc, td l w hk li word ~ f\f~ Rt1 h:: les- wtil eh nm nnuns-n.nd why ;-whic h nrc ildjf'c li w•f-f-an d wh y j-wll lch arc prono umt--an<l ,.,,.hy _
w liic h n.re v crb~and ·w h y .
'
2. P~ln t out. tl1 e verbs ; tell wh ell1 crtransltivc or lntrnn slrivc-antJ why ;--actJf'e
or

pn.~c;: 1 ve-and

wh y.

·

3. Go o,·cr ;l./_~ain. il lld r>nintout the nonn51, and tell wheth er proper or commonand why ;-si ngul ar or pl11ra.1 - anJ w hy ;-th eir gt= nd er-an tl why.

He has learn,..rJ h is lesson . I lov ed hi m bE:caus e he
was good . A ~oo d m an wi ll forg ive th osP. w ho m uy
have in j ure d him . L ove yo nr e nemies ; do good to
them that h at e you. He mc mber yonr Creator in the

:~

.

.'

4. Go over tl1c prcr: e t.lin;; Exercise , ani l pansc each word In ordP:r, us dirccte<l 1n.
precedi ng Exercises.

N. B . I t w ill now he import a nt to rev iew thorou;:;ldy and rep eatecl ly fr om LE SS ON XXHI., J'Urticularly LEs ~ oNs XXIII.,
XXVI., and X X VIII., with the E x ercises un cler th em. This w ill
require severa l recita tion s . Ancl wh ile t hat i; goin;; on, the p upii
may also go forwarJ with LESSON XXIX'., conjuga tin g from
mem ory the irregular verbs , in such portions da ily ns t he teacher
may direct.

l
·: j
·•

L E SS O N XXIX

1

l

OJ Irr egular Ve rbs.

3. Change the precc<l mg-1 from the passive to rli c ac1 i \'C, ;.>roi.,rrcss ivc form.

EXE HC ISE TI.
On t he l t oim , A rticle, .lldjccifrc , Pronoun , Verb, promi..cuoully.

:.-•·:,'

d ays of your youth . "\Ve are co m ma nded to .Jove ou r
uei g liLor as ourse l ves . Th a t book was p rinteu i n New
Y o rk. Th e \\·i n te r bas b e en cold , bu t th e g round w as
co ve red wi th s now. Col nn1 b u s di scovcn·d Ameri ca .
A m e rica w as di scover ed by Col umbu s. I h av e be en
s tudy ing gramm a r. It is neve r too late to learn that
wh ich is good a n d us e ful. P et er P arle y ha s wr itt en
some pleasin g books. Good boys love readin g . Stud y
to understan d what you re ad .

I. An I m tEGULAR verb is one tl1at does not lorni
both its past t ense, and past participle Ly adding cJ
to the present; as, ..!lm, was, been.
Presrnl.

Abide
Am
.Arise
Awake

P as t.

aboile
was
arose

a woke n•

bal<cil
Bn1\e
t3 eu, to &rrni: fa rlh . bare or bore

l' nst Par !.

abo<le
been
arisen
n·w a kcd
hnken n
born

• Th o ~ c vc rU ~ whkh nre cu uj ug<lt ed rr~'1.tl ar ly n.~ we ll ns lrrC':; iutrl y arc mnrlt·
tJ v; Uh a.11 r..

:

.

'io.

70
Present.
Ilear, lo carry
Ilcut
Begin
Bend
Bereave
Beseech
Bid
Bind u11.
B ite

Bleed
Blow
Break
Breed
Bring
TiuiJd reBurst
Buy
Cast
Catch
Chide
Choose
Cleave, ·lo arlhcrc
Cleave, lo split
Cling
Clothe
Come be-

Cost

Pa st.
bore or bare
bent
began
bent n
Le re ft
beso ught
linJe, bid
bo und
liit
·uled
bl e w

broke, brake
... bred
broug ht
built, R
Lurtit
boug ht
cas t
caught n.
ch id
chose
cln\'c "
clove or cleft
clung
clothed
cnme
cost

Crow
crew R
Creep
crept
Cut
cut
Dare, to ven!ure
durst
Dnre, to challenge is n tla red
Deni
dealt n

Dig

Do mi4. un.
Drnw
Drive
Drink

dug

R

<lid
<lrew
drove
drnnlr

Past Particip le.
borne
bca ten or bcu t
beg un
bent R
bereft R
besought
bidden
bound
liitten, l1it
bled
blown
liroken
bred
brought
built, R
burst
bought
cu st
caught n
chiddcn, chid
chose n
cleaved
cloven or clef!
clung
clad R
come
cost
crowed
crept
CUI

dared
dared
dealt R
dug R
done
c!rnwn
drive n

drunk

71

ENl;LISll GRAMMAR.

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

Preunl.

Prtsl.

P a• / J'ariicipl1

Dwell
En t
1'' a ll be·
Feed
Feel
F ig ht
l"inJ
Flee
fling
}'ly
Forbear
Forget
Forsake
Freeze
Get be· for·
Gild
Gird be- enGive.for· misGo
Gravetna.. n.
Grim]
Grow
Have

<lwell R
a le
fell
fed
felt
fough t
found
fled
tlung
flew
forbore
forgot
forsook
froze
i::nt or got

dwelt R
<'a.ten
fallen
fed
felt
fou g ht
found
lleJ
Hung
flown
forborne
forgotten, forgot
forsa ken
frozen
gotten or got
g ilt R
girt R
given
gone
graven R

l!nng

}LUng

Hear
Hea ve
Hew
1-Iitle
Hit
Ho ld be- withHurt
Keep
Knit
Know
Lade

hcur<l
hove n
hewed
hid
hit
hehl
hurt
kept
knit R
knew
Juded

~ ilt n

gi rt n
gave
went
graveJ
~ round

ground

grew
!i nti

grown
had
hung •
hcar<l
hoven n
hewn n
hidden, hid
hit
held or holden
hurt
kep t
knit or knitted
known
lad en

• Hang, to Ui.ke away life by banging, I• re.gular·'
but the guwn w~ hung up.

M

' The

ro~be r WW!

luv'l,-..1

.•

,i

'.

t I

·I.I

f. .
\

l
r

l!.

i
;

.

'
i'Z

!.:-!GLISH GR A MMA R.

P RA CT ICAL LESS ONS IN

Present .
J.ny
Lead mi.sL eave
Lend
Le t
Lie, to lie dou:n
Ligh t
Load
Lose
Make
Meun

Past.

P ast P art -kiplc.

lnid
le<l
left
lent

la id
led
left
lent
Jet
Ja in or lien
lig hted or lit
lade n a
lost
m ade
m ea nt
met

let
lay
lif: htcrl or lit
loaded
los t
made
mean t
met
mowed
paid
pu t
qui t n
r ead
rent
r id
rode
r nng or run ~
rose
r ived
r otted

M ~ c·

Mo1>
Pay reP ut
Quit
Read
Jtcnd
Rid
Hide
Ring
Ilise a·
Rive
Rot
ll un
.Saw
.Say
See
ti eek
Soll
Send
Set beShake
Shape rn t1-

rnn
sn w c<l.

Shear

said
saw
sough t
sold
sent
se t
shook
shaped
shaved
sh ore n

Shed

sl1etl

Shave

·

.rl y

- - - · -· --- ---·-

1 ; i1 ~t.n i.:; ll ..,;01•

o lH:ki i C>~-

HlOW il R

pail!
put
qu it
r ead
r en t
r id
rode, rith1··' 1*
rung
r isen
riven
rotten a
run
• sn\vn R.
sa id
seen
sought
sold
sent
set
shak en
Hha pcn :a
8ha ven n
Mhorn
• hed

Pre.ent .
Sho"'' •
Sho"
Shoot .
Shr ink
Sltred
Shut

Past.

/'a , /

bhone n
s: 1owcd

sho ne

sho1 l
shot
s:1rank or shru11k
shred

Par l ic ipl~
R

s hown
shoJ
sh ot
shrunk
sh rcJ

shut

f'ltt1l

or sung
san k or su nk

slid

sung
sunk
snt or sittent
slain
slept
sli<l,Icn

Slin g

~ ~ HIH!", ~lung

s lun~

Slink
Slit
Smi te
Sow
Speak beSpccu

slu 11 li, slunk

~ i u o.k

sl it

s lit or

spell

s pe (l

f'pend 111.is-

Sp!"·n t

Spil l
Spi n ·
Spi t be·
Spli t

spilt

spen t
spi lt R

Sjng

s~1n g

Sink
Sit
Slay
S leep
S lide

sa t
s~e\V

slept

R

8mitlt•n

s.ow cJ
spoi<e or spak e

spoken

R

S O\\"ft R

spat, spi t

spun
spi t or spitten

split

~plit R

sp:l n , spu n
R

spr<'nd

~ 11rcad

Sprjng

spr:in g or sprung

S \ ) f lJ H ~:

Stnnu with- &e.
Steal
S tick

stood
stole
stuck

stuou
stolen

~p rcad

be·

sl i ~ed

smote

~ tu ck

Sti ng

stun~

stun~

Stride beStrikc
S trin g
S tri ve

stro•k or ~tri•I .

striJ,J e n
f..tnH'l', &trickl'n

st.nick
stru n~

strnn!{

strove

striYen

::,1~ ei('I, shewt.J, sla:i!'n, - pn_111 11 1111c.t •r1 .v!tuto, ~'l:•.:..

.Siwm u..nU llpilltn an.: 1-ii:;; t..rlj' ubr>u kr e.

7

&<;1 Jt ,; ,l of 11 0 .li pu:_~ o.

\

.'

7t>
Prc.,cnt
Can
May

I'a sl.
could

Pust Part. Presen t.

inight

1\'i II
Wis
Wit or~
Wot )

Mu~t

Ong ht

Quoth

quoth

~hal l

I'asl.
sl1011l.J

77

El'l"HL!Sff GRAMMAR.

l'RAC'f!CAL L C:SSONS JN

Past Par/.

would
\Vis t

m 'it

2. lllD'EHSO:'>AL Yerb.-< ;ire tho "" \\"liicl1 ass('rt the
existe nce of some acti on or slak, l>ut refer it to no
particular subject. They are precedeJ by the pronoun it, and are ahn1ys in the third person singu1ar;
as, it seems; it brcomcs, &c.
To this head may he referred such expressions ns , I t !tnils, it
1nows, it rn irt.< ;1 thunders, ·i t bd1oovct/1, i i frkclh; and perhaps
also , 1n elh'i11lc s, mrf houg hl, mrsccms, 111.<:st'e mcd, in whi ch, instead
of it , the lir't personal prono11n in the objeetive cnse, 1ne, is prefixed to the (J1ird person si 11!j 11lar of' tile \' CrlJ .

A<lverh~ have l)ecn 1livirlcrl into vnrious clnssP.~, nct0rtJing to
their si.~niflca ti on. The chief of these arc such. ns dr~nn t~ ~
1. Q.U ALITY or 1\1A~;:-.;En :-,in1p!y; us 1 well, Jll :_ bra·:c1.y, i.lrUtle ntly , F-nfliy; v.·ilh i1111t11i\Prnl1l e otliers, fnr111ed troin ndj 1.·ct; vp.~
fa111r, tnm•7/'J; .1;rnst·
l)y al Il II.no~ [H
.'I, or cJnn(Tinc~
~
o
:::i le into 111
• •· thu s,

Ule, ~i.:~n~i/Jiy, &.c.

p A(;F' as h e re there 'vhcrc; hither , thith er; l1en~e 1 &c.
L
., · '
'
'
r
.
. . .
..;: . .
:3. 'frM-Ej as, now, tJwn~ \Vlif·11; su11n, Otlf·11 ~ :-, ·!dom, '\rr, , ... \..
·1 . DtnECTION; as, upward, dow1nvard lJ:u·llwnrd / urward, &c
5. Nt:GAT10N; as, nay, no, not, nowist·, ni:ver.
6 . .AF .FIRi\1ATioN; ns, ' ' erily , tru1y, u11d 0 1d1tt.•dly, y(·a, yes.
7. UKC FHTAll"<TY; as, 11 erhap~) peradvt·11tllff! 1 pen·l1a1Jcc.
8 . l.NTI·: HHOGATi oN; as~ liuw: why, when. wh<:refvn~ . &t.

2.

1

1

!), CCJ~ll'.·\ Ht:"\ <1:-.r; as , utor('~ l1H1St j k:.s 1 k:1sf; HS 1 Sil, tint~~ &c.

10.

QtrA~TITY; a ~ , 1111!1'!1 1

little,

C'1J411JgJ1 1 ~q(j[ .. it·111Jy.

11. 0R111·~ ll; n.~. 0r ~t_, St ' C1iil tl\~· _, thirdly, & c .
12. CiJl\J U ;CTl~'E Au,· 1::a11s; a~, \\"h e n, \Ylil'r c, 11 v w 1 wli ik , .~1: .
OHSl;'.RVATfOI'>S.

QUESTIONS.

·what is n uefcctivc '·crb? A re they i·cgular or irregular 1
"What nre they? Whnt te nses do the most of th e m Ji n,·e? 1-Vlrnt
tense has must ?-ou~ht r Is it prope r to say "I hnd ought to
rend?" 'Vhy? 1\'hnt is an impe rsonal verb? 13y what are
th ey P"'~~d 1•tl? In what pcn•on and number nre they 1 .'W hat
sort of won.ls arc mcll1'inks, mescems, &c.1

LESSON XXXI.
.Of Adverbs.
[H. cYicw th11 flrC Ct~cling T.<' s.~on.]

An Anvi::nn is a word joiner] to a verb , an adjective, or another rulrerb, to modify it, or to denote some
circumstan ce rc ~pccting it; as, Ann speaks distinr:tly; she is remarkably diligent, anJ r eads very cor-

rectly.

1. The chief use of adverbs, is to shorten tlisroursc, by cx:pre:-0~ing in 1irH~ '\YOr1l \\'hat \\·ould otll~rwl~e n~ q11in_· l\\'o or 111ore;
as, /u'rt, fur 11 in this place;" nob/y 1 for Hin a n<lld e ma1111cr , n &r .

2 . Some ndverhs rtdmit of cmnpari son lil(1~ adjeGti\· e~; a." s uon,
nvbl_y, 111ore noLly, rno~t nui>ly. .:\ frw :l:·c
1

EOoncr, soon es t;

compa red irregu lar ly; as, well, l1ctte r, Lest~ LaJly 1 or iri: \-\'u rse ,

worst.
3. Some words hecom c adverbs by prelix ini( a, wl1ich signillc•
al, or on; ns 1 n.l)ecl, ashore, afloat., ngr1.n111d 1 apart.
4. Jn rornparisons, the anlecetlf~nts as and son.re usually reckonPil adverbs; thr· cnrrPsponding as and so are :vh(·r\.s a l.. : 11 ; thns .
It is ns l1i gh a1t I-Tcavcn .
,
5 . Clr1~ urnqan c es vf ti mr- piace, m;~nnt>r 1 &.r., nre f d!f> n ""'<"prc:-;~ed hy t wo or J11(1rc words cons titut ing- an a1/i1rrbirrl p ~1 rr1 sr ;
ns , in short, jn li1H' , in ~"IH'ral, :"It mo:-;1 , at ]p;-1...:t , rit t(·n~! tti ~ nnt
1

at al! 1 by no rnenns , in vaiu, in order, Jon .~ ago, by i.111 d li:· 1 ~ 1 to
nntl fro, &c. \\' liich, taken to:; ether, may I.if~ par s 1~d :1 s advcr l )~, !Jr
by supplying the ellipsis; thus, in a •lwrl •pcrce; iri a general

way, &c.

..

78

PA i: srNc.-An ad verb is pn rsed by stating its class,
and·th e word which it modifi es ; thus," Ann speaks
dis tinctly." Di;;tinctly is an adverb of manner, and
modifies " speaks."

79

F.XGLlSH GRAMMAR.

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN"

.
· " · ,Jl y :;\c w his brother. I s:iw
C' am
Wiehe
~
r or htrr
Il
e
j, a \'NV gne> tl man. ,_0onc
' ..
hirn l u 11g ~1 ~0 .
. i c. ' l' li <~Y
· 11tl
talk too much.
read
too
.
all must <lie. You

suundly sleep.

Q UESTIONS.

LESSON XXXI I.

1Vhat is an o.Jl'nh? In tlt e sentence," Ann speaks distinctly,"
whi ch is the n<h·e rh ?- why? "Whic h is tl 1e a<ll'erb in t he other
exnrnplcs ?-an<l why ? Into l1ow mnny ch sscs are adver bs corn.
morily divi<lcd? Name tl1 c fir ~ ! three-th e seco nJ three- the
Hext th_r ce-t!11..: la~ t. Huw nre ad jecti\.' CS c hanged into nd\'erbs ?
'What is th e chief ll SC
UUl'Crbs ? Arc a11y advcrl1s compared
}jkc n<ljccti \'Cs '{ Give an example. Arc any compared irreg ularly? Give nn exrun p lt•. " ' hut is n11 :ulvc rh iu l phra se ? Givo
cxn1nplcs. JI ow ure such phrases to l,c par>cd 1 How nre adverbs parsed?

Of Prepos·it-ions.

or

A

..

PREPOSITION 1s a

EXERC ISE IT.
1. In the follo\'f"in ~ ~r>nll.:"n C " !', tf'!I what ,.,.o n lr. arc articl e&-,..-·hal '~onl s a.ro
and wlly-adjf't.: th·cs, and ' 'J1y-pron ou11s, o.nd why-verhs, nnd why wh eLhcr trans ili\•e or intn~n si live, n.nd wlij' - rC'gular ( 1r irregular, tu-i d wily.
2. \Vhi1; h wurJ:s n rc :~d ~·,-.rh:) ·1 - ;wd w h y 1 'V l1al W• 1rd11 Ui:1 lh<'y m odify 1 P a.rs.., ,
notin R,

P e te r w (:pt l>il.le rl y. Ile is h e re now. Slie w e n•
awa y yes tcrJ:1y. Tl1 ey cam e to-Llay. Th ey will perhaps bny so me to-m or row. Ye shall know h e reafter
She sung s we c th·. Cats :<uo n learn to catch mice.
Mary rose up hast ily. Th0y that have enough may

~ ·H·a k
i

.

cunccrn'lr!g
.

"

v 1rt11r· .

.

t · lir

' ' li1:fut" ;'' 111.i i: l:-i (JU . t
In trH: "i e l')l'nt e n d ...... , ti - I
T
,,
J " ( J rtl'l' THl11f;
~ ''
rel:ttinn betwee n " hon o r :' a11d " hum.1 ity; a11
''virtue)'
and
''
~111; 1d.:
points out the relatio~l lic,; t1.\'l't:ll

i;

i

E:Xi·:l<.CI;,;E I.

H ere , th ere, softly, boldl.)', wis ely, se ldom, upward ,
once , twic e, hi the rto, ye~ t er day, how, mo re, littl e , secondly, e nou g h, pe rhnps, ye~, no, trnl y, not, already,
hence, when ce , better, suffic ie nt ly , wisely, some where.

. . . " ''The

" 1?, ,f u re hnnor 1:-; l111m1lity.
y
~ 'J
. • ..
l ,. ifi '"fl~it ii n 1,

T l1~

1. ln the fdl!')w!n!: list of n.rl;-o:: r b s 1 {'·:in t 11111 !l it: da .11' lo wli lt:. J1 e .11.c.:h hr.!11ng11
2. l'u111parc lh o;;c Lh;it ad111it of compa r isv u.

3. Mn k t· n n ur11UN o f ~ho r( ~r11 1 rnc f·s, r> ;ll'h nf wh ic h :\}ml ! contain one or moro
of t11c udvc rb:1 ln th e list ; ru1 Li p arse the 8C' lll1~ 1h.: es su m ad e.

.,

or l which shows. the relation
w '
ronoun following it, and some

hctween a no11n or P
other word in U1e se11len ce ; as,
.

:•,

.

.

p r m<'11 1a

1 \\Orts
. l I._ ,f

tl1i~
•

cbs.'i arc

·

contam Cl

1m
· ')
' it.f,,\1 ,,"· in o···-

J,lST 01' l'llFPO ;..;I Tltl:\S.

Ab oL1t
Ab ove

l\1;\ow

;\ r1·oss

B,.si•I<>
Bcsicl1'S

B<' ll C:tllt

1\ ft,. ,.
1\

g aiu.st,

B l' LWe l' ll

Along
Amid l
Allli JsL \
Among

Betwixt_
Beyond
n\1t
Dy

/\Ill • '1 1 '._'." \;..l

l
)

( ' \ lj\( 'i 'l'l\i!lg

'\'\1r1>Ug11
F rom
'J'i1 ruugl 1(J\lt
111
Ti ll
Into
Nu t \I' i th.,t :in <l-Tu

ing

Of
Off
On
Over
T'a"t
J:,1·g:1rdin g

1\ r1,1111d

])11 \\' ll

.At

D urin g
Exce pt

llcspect ing

]~xcc pting

Save
Since

Athwart
Ucfure
[khind

For

I~ound

' i\ii h·hin g

Tow:trd
']\>wan.ls

U1 1<lc r
Underneath
1'nto
i p
l l pun
\V ith
\\' i tiii ll
·without

~''-·

81

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

80

f'RA CT ICA L LE SSONS

JN

LESSON xxxnI.
Of fotc ·1ject·ions .

OilSEilV.ATIONS ON PltEPOSITIONS.
1. Every pre po sition rc~u i rcs th e no u1\ c>r pron oun nfter it to
be in the objecti ve ca se. W hen nny word in th e prcreding list
does not g overn un ohjcct iv c tasc , it becom es n11 rrrl rcrb; as , He
rides about .
2. B ut, in such phrases as, cas t up, l1ulJ o ut , fa ll on, th e words
up, onl, on , 1t1: ly be co n ~ id e r c1l a s a par t of th e ver b, rather
than ns prepo sitions or ndvcrhs.

PARSINc.-The pn•pof' iti on is parse ,! by stating

t he words bl'l\\"C'Cn whi ch it shews the reh ti on; thus,
"Defore honor is humil ity." "B efore" is n preposition, and
shews the rela ti on between "honor," a nd " hu mil ity."

:--; .is
·
An 1 :; T £ RJ1·:c·riu . ·

.

EXE liCI SE S.
1. P oint ont lh('

p r t'pn:-;il i~11 . ~

in the fi diowiui;

<· .'(1·rd iw ~.

2 . Poin t nut th r noun o r pronoun a0f'r Ill'! rrrpoe.!illll 1 rtn.J the won t lo which 1t
ht rclatcfl ; tl1u ~ 1 •1 J Wt' flt fro11 1 Alha11 y 10 r\i.;w -\' 11rk." The prl'posilil•n/rom,
Bla.11t1~ hc! orf• .A llumy , n11 d ~l 1 cwS iL"> rda1ion lu ll u~ \'Prh, 11 u;cnl .11
tio nb;o 1 lo
rsli1.nd ~

h c forc _\'r·1 r · Yt11 k, ll lld i,;hf' Ws ir :-i n·l,llion

to•· 'U't.:ut .''

I w ent from L o nd on t 1 Jhtli. The kin g wall; e <l about
the ganlc-n \\·1th hi s cu 11. They <hied w ith ou t me. I
fell off a ship int o tli c ri1·c r near the Lri<l ge . This b ox
of wafers is fo r yo u. Charl e s put it upon th e table
a g a in st th e ink sta11<l .. T11rn down th e lane thro ug h th e
g ate . I ~ lwll g-o up the ro:1<l afte;· l1im . Run to that
tree n e;ir tlie h ou se . It sta nd s bct,vee n th e tr ees. P nt
it on th e ta ble at th e s i<l e of the h o use . I foun d th e
knife amon g the a sl1 cs und er th P grnte . Sit by me.
J ohn is at U tica. They all w e nt excep t me.

.

_ .

l ll (.''>.L l;1111;1\111 ll"1 \ 0
. . UI r ·wha t a

f the rnrn<l ; a::>,

i.

A LIST OF INTERJECTIONS.

1
\
1 beaonc
l t abs ! a1ack! away ! ;ua.
b .
•
Adieu! all.' 1 ,, hail' hal1 oo ! hum! hush! huzl1 a 1·k' ho ' ia . ic.
.
0 b - .
'
•
•
01 01' Oslrarwe!
ra\e.
za! h ist! hey -dey ! l o ! .
i.
"'
psl iaw.1 sec'. w c1l-a- day! &c.

OilSE l1V AT IONS ON Il\TE\UF.CT10NS.
.
.
.
.
ia £u1w r1g th e other wonb in
The ln terj ectwn is th rown
.

l

ll

.
. ,..
l afft•c t th e ir co ns truction.
(
scntenrc, but due:=, nu
. . h.
cxchmati on, n. nd sh oul<l ou
'2. 0 is uscJ to express "''tS in g o r
. ' a li rc ct ruJ <l n.· ~s; a~,
or n. pro noun, in ' l
prelix et.1 only to a n_o un
. I" 01 1 is u :-.e1\ dl'tUC' hetl frum
,
·. b\c thou 11 1\
·
·
"Q Yi rtne! h oW Utn\,l
.
·
, rtc r it. lt itn\)\\\.':-> ~Ii
.

'n t

or

cxda 1nat1o n 4\

th~ worLl, ·wi th a poi
. rise· as "Oh! wha t u. ~ight is
t·n w tion of pain . sor row, or surp
.,
'
here~ ~

1

l hy

PA HS1rw.-T111t-rj ecl i o ns arc parSL' <
as

such, slating why'

0

a. Parse th o word .~ in pr··r ('( l i 11~ F.xr rdsce.

'" "
u:--'--

ex press some emotion o
sii:;hl is here ! W ell done !

QUEST IO KS.
What is a prcpo8ition? Jn w ha t ca se is the noun or pronoun
after a pre pos ition? When a n objective docs not follow a prcposi.tioo, what part of speech is it to Le con ; id ercd?

a

. .I
\\ Ot l

I

anLI tie

crno

t

11;1111ill ~ l

J1( '11"\

cxp1T~~...:il .

0 11
t

QUESTIONS.

.
f thcrn

Does the

11\-

.
l
. 1·onl NamcsuinPO
"What is n n J n t er; cc .t . .
- \ • th•' r wunl s in a ,.,n1c 11 ct.
.
.
l
. ·trud1on ot t •C o f
tcrjcct.wn a flee t l \C cu n:") .
.
1
l l w in the rnann1:r o
l lo>W

·'

ul1

0 . t.l Oh diffe r tn rn curunp; ,
o '
,\I\
.
·
· · ··,j l
. J !o"' are inte rJCCt1 ons pai :';)l .

"I

wri ting t h e n\~

EX:EH.C !SES .
. lt o11l !li e 1n1 c rj cc 1i1J11S in tl1is Ex r rri t-:1_'.
l • P 0 11
. . , , -I . uJ p ·.i.f ~I!

~ N·unc all lhc uthcr pa rts ul s p o..: t.o...

'

i , ii

1 I um gluil to sec yo u.
l"·ih
"' . ·11' s Ahs ! J a m nnn
· et] .
cx11ec t tl · ·
•

.
ll1f'IH.

.1

I

I did no t
\ Vell-a-uav
- . th at tr ue?
1
l n il e'CU . l S.

82

PRAGTICAL LESSON~ IN
ENG L ISH GRAMMAR.

\\'hat! is it poss ibl e ? L o ! th ere he is. Hern! I do
nut tlii1 d{ so. 0 II' hat n bene fi t eJucation j~ ! Ah! you
arc a happy fello w.
Hu sh 1 ll'l 1at was that?
J la, ha,
ha; holl' 1<J11g hable that i~ ! Ho! co ni c this way. Ah!
poor fel low, he is to be p iti eJ. Hurrah! w e ha ve fini shed our lesson. Come! now fo r th e next.

83

.11.nd is a conj· u nction, copulative, and cons t u (J v
J . ,,
nc c ts Yoit and I.
QUESTIO NS.
.
.
IT o'v inany ki nds~ of
ions " t-o
'Vhat is a conJtmct1on?
. conjunct
.
I\Cre.1 'Vh 'nt arc' th e copuluti\•e ?-the
. d1s;
· un ctn· 1, ld l How t! o
ihcsc two class es differ? How a re con; nnt l1on s parse
I

LESSON XXXIV .
Conjunctious .
A CoNJUNCTION is a won] which connects words or
~enlcnces; as, "You and I m ust sl ucly; but he may
go and play." "Two and tw o make four."
Conjunctions arc of two kinds; Copulative anJ
Di~ju n cliL·e.
-\LIST OF COl\JUNCTrONS.

l. CoruLATIVE-A lso , and, becau se, both, for, if,
since, that, then, tJ1erefo rc, wh erefore .

2 . D1sJuNcnvr:-=-A ltliou g l1, as, as well as, but,
c·ithe r, except, l c ~t, neither, n o r, · notwiths tandin g ,
o r , proYid cd, so, than, tho ug h, unl ess , wlictli c r, y e t ,
sti I I.
Om;. 'I'Ji c co pnfalin• conj unrlion~ cor uu..·c t tl1irig s tlrnt are to l>o
tnken torrtlier ; '" ·" You and J (i . e. uolh .,f uoj rnuot go." The
di ,junctive c1mj1111cl i<>11s ro11nect tl1i11gs lha t nre to Oil tnk cn separntdy, or 011 e to the t·xcln; ion of th e re' t; as," You or I (i.e. the
one or the ol ht· r. bu t nt"1t. Lut h) 111 U.'1 t g o."

P Ans1 r-.·c .-Conj un c ti o ns arc parsed Ly s latin g to
what class they be lon g-, and the w ords or sentences
w hic h th ey join t og eth er ; thus, "You and I must

EXEltCISES.
1. P oint out I ii·~ • 1•n.; 11n<'ti,,ns i11 th e fo!km iui; E :H: rn~,. , Ll1 e d aM to which lh C}'
bclon ::. and word.i \\ l ii d1 thr·y {· 01111cc t.
2. l'J..niC c.ill l ii f! wurtl.s in ord u.

Henry and Char I cs rcatl t lw ir
· ]cssons. I or he wiii
be th ere. I wi ll ]Jc wi th yo u un less yoa call. I slept
well th ou g h th e d L)g' barked . H t.: a<l that you may learn .
John says that Jic will do it. As li e wri te ~ , so do I read;
fo r I am fon d of readin g . 1\-cith t.: r rli e boys nor the
girls are a sleep. I woul d call if l could, bu t I cannot.
Take care Jes t \ "OU fall. Two an d tw o rn ak e four- He
is be tte r than I-thought he was, th ou g h he bchav<:<l ill.
Since that has li ap pcn ed I mu s t go. Do to oth ers RS
y,1u would that. th ey should <l o to yo u.

LESSON XXXV .
How to cUshnrruish
the Parts of Speech.
0
• , pronou ns, prepos1t\Ons,
· ·
·
ctions
1. T he articles
coniun
.
'. a nd interjections; Ure S·o 'rc,,v in number that th ey may be easily com-

. .
. b and nd
milted to m<'mory.
2. The other four, namely, th e noun , adj ect ive.' \·Cr , .'
. 1 1n
. .-r111· s h cfl by coinp
.
a I·111 .g th c1r menJ\1110'
b \vil be be ~ t d1~
.
::i nnd
ver ,
~
.
I . I
In ce·
use wi th th e <lcflnitions of these parts ol s pe~ c ' Jn t 1e1r p
,
thus,
.
l.
. a l\'oim
1st. Every w ord that is th e name of a p erson or tun g , I S " .
,;
because "A noun is tl1c name of any pers on, place, or tluu r; .

87

JtNGLIBll GRAMMAR.

SG

PRACTICAL LESSONS JN

2 . Th e subject of a verb, i. e. the person or thing
~poken of", is urnally in th e noinin:tt iv e, and is sa id

to lJe the "norn inati \·C to th e verb .. , '

3. Every nou n or pronoun, in tl1e norn in at iYc case,
wh en spoken of, is the subjet:t of a verb, expressed
or understood, i. e . , it is that of w liieh the verb affirm s. To thi s there arc a fe w e xceptions .
4. Enry Ycrl; in the indi cat iY e , potential, or. subjunctive mooll, has a nom in ative or subj ect expressed or understood, i. c., it has somct11ing of which it
affirms.
5. E very tran s1t1ve ve rb in the active voice, and
eve ry prepos ition, governs a noun o r pronoun in the
ohjeet i\·e case; and eve ry object iv e case is gove rned
Ly a transitive v erb in tltc active voice, or by 1 prep osition.
6 . Every v erb in the infinitive moo<l is governed
by a verb or adjective· ; sometimes by a n o un; a nd
sometim es it stands after the coIJjunction, t!ian or as.
QUESTION S
What is pors in g ? 1-Iow n1any Jcinds o t parsing nre th cre1
\ Vhnt is done in ctymo lo;; 1cal pnr~ing ?-in syn ta cticul ptrrsing 1
\'Vh nt is necessa ry before parsing a sente nce? To wl1nt dues
en· ry a rticl e , adjective, & c .. Le long? In what case is th e subject
of a verb? 'Vlicn a noun or pro noun in the non1inative cnse is
spol\en of, whnt mu st .i t }rn\·c:? \ Vhnt 1n u st every verl.t in the in~
<licative, p o te ntial , o r s ubjun ct iv e mooLl , huvc? \ Vh a t cn~c cloes
eve ry tra nsitive verlJ in th e· U(' tive \' oicc , and every preposition,
have after it? By what is t.hc ubject ive case u lwllys governed 1
"Wh en a verb is in t he infinitiv e mood, by wl1at is it governed 1

r \l
. r q uestions cro b::tck
For the answer t o the io o wm t,
.
'"'
to the r)::i«es indicated .
..

o
.. ,
lll.-nn nrlicle 1 p. 2v.-nn ""Jee·
JJ 11 w is 11, noun palSe(l 1 P·
. i, 1 p 5!'J.-un Ull•
o11ou n ·l pp.28,3I,34.-n\er:.
,,
tive? P· 2:i.-n pr
.
-n
conj unct1(1n 1 I'· 8 i .-an
1
80
verb 1 p. 78 . -"- prcpos1t10 u. p.
. , . <lirectecl in the ?laces r e.
.
Puse all t hese as
.
inte riecuo n 1· l'· 8 ·1·
'
.
Lesson.
1
nu as J escr ibe<l 111 the next
ferreu to, a

rxvII .
LESSON Xx
~ Model '!{ Etymological Parsing .

.
.
,· . , nan anJ he w1ll be
" G ive instruction to a \\ ise I
'

."

.
\\"tSCl ·
.
.
.,
i\'en · in the
• • r
irreaulur ; give, ga\ e, g
) .
" G ive" is a verb, trans1tne ,
o
~
int'ula r. Its subject
.
..
ctivc second per~on, s o
imperat1; e , a
',
d its ob;'ec t 1 instru.ctio11.
· th
understoou a n
tl
is ou.
'
the objective singula r ; ie
"InstrneUon" is a noun, neuter, in

Yet

u

object of give .•
tlic r elation betw een il• ob. t1·on ., l l Points out
Tl),. is a pre posL

ject mn11, nnJ .give.. 1 ,r. 'te belongs to rnrm.
.
ti elc. 1rn c 11n1 ,
.
t r\rn-1 t\X ·
'' ]\._,, is an ar , . ' - . . . . om pared wise, \Vi ser ' w1sC'l" ; •
..
"-"\Vi se" is an a\l,p~ cU\ e' c
,
. 11'\Jily uf 7HUIL
]
prc s~cs :i q ·
.
. . J ~ ob]\\ct\Vt! 1'd11~11lar; P · mni.
.
·\sc1t\1nc in t ic
.
":;\f an" ts a noun, in. .
l'
ne('ts the cbu s1.·:-:. .
t\ eo11)\l t1 Ct ion, an1 Cllll
.- '\° C in t11c llOJ!1inati\·o
;
.
. . ,.
3.1 >rononn , rnascu in .,
.
"Ile" is a. tl11r1l pe 1~on. I. . , f wi ll be, nml st<\ 1 11..l~ fur 11 1.an.
singul:tr; t1w snhJc <.:t (..
.
1 . m ,yas, been; in
.
l . t· n:;itivc, "regu ;l.f, a ,
.
U
:'"\\rill be" is aver )1 I~ i a_ .
. . ' t: tllirll pcrsun1 ~1ngular, nn
the fu'ur~, in cli ca ti vc , actl\ '
affirms o r its sulijec t, he.
'i t'yinrt w iser.
1
ii Yet" i:;i. an aJver l, n10"
o
.
J . ...... "\\·isc wiser,

u r\_nrl" is

.

. .

compa1n\1v1:

cg1c~,

'

"'\Viser" is nn nd1ect1vc,
.
, . is Jlreuica tecl ol" he.
,vi sest:; a nd belong~ tu 1na.n t < i . - - - -- - - - - .

·a · u for rea.rona mtc<l p.)U.

... The person and cla..<J!i of lhe noun arc oru~

t:

!-

SS
Pn A CTTC Al

LES SONS I N

As a fiir t h cr ex ·
to give a rn son f e rc1~c , th e pupil may he rcq u i t ~.J
.
'.
or e 1·cry tl1iu cr affi
I .

. cedrn g iu od d: thus
,
.'

"' ' irme< in th e

jliC-

. ·w11.Y do y o" say that ., ; . . .
15
trre.vufor 1 ' l"hy tl . . . ·' Le
a ,·crb? ' Vl1 y tra11 si1i ve 1 'V I
.
~
.
ie n np crat ivc 1 ' VI
.
.
'Y
1
s 111g ula r ?
·
·
Y th e sec ond perso n 1 Why

' "'J,n ,y. "" y n11 sa Jv
iy s rn g ulnr?

n

tl., ,, t I·ll s/ ruct I.O /l •
15
Wh}·
a
the o bj c c li vc? &c.

noun?

\Vl1y

neuter7.

E xercises in Parsin 1r

After th
·0 •
c sam e mann er ns in the l . , . ' .
pdrse 'lnd 11.. ...
. J Ic ccd in <r Lesson

,

1

IM. 11 c e

on tb e foll

. .

- R

. b

I

.

o

owrng e xerc is es.

l\L\Xli\IS F OH Y OU i\' G
T.'

'

•
AND PLD

.
d· . f
.
•iys o th r ·r oi nh · ·J eri
.1 e m er11. ow tliy C i·ea tor ill
the
· ·
• \\ 11 e th e el' J/ d· .
tiI e y ears dr;.iw ni l" )1 ·I
a.i s com e not , nor
Pl eas ure in t h e m. "' • , ' ' 1e n t hou sJ 1'.1 It s ay, I h a ve no
' .C-AllLY P ! ETl'

Quintili nn r ecu1111n e nds to all pa re n ts th e timel y cd 11ca tion of th e ir chil d re n; adv isin g to train tli e m up in
le arn in g , gu od mann e rs , and virtuous e xe rc ises ; 'i nre
we commonly ret ain tli ose thi 1 1 ;;~ in a g e whi ch we entertained in you th .
'Ti s ed ucation form s the co mmon m ind;
J us t as the twig is l;c111., t he tre e's in cline d.
An indus trious an<l virtu ous edu ca tiun of chil<lrcn
a be tt er inh e r itanc e fur th e m tha n a g re at e;~ tat e .

LEssoN xxxvrrr_

,

ENGLI SH GRAMMAR.

Childre n, obe.~- yo 11r p:Hrn ts . h
.
mo th er, is th e r ·q
.
·
onoi thy fathe r and
A .
ii.. ro 1111n a 11 d in en t wi th 1ro .
11·i se rn 11 li l ·:n i·t l
I"
, .
l m isc.
I
I a "I 1ie r ~ i 11 st rn
. . ]J
er 1Ca re tl 1 not rl' l, 11 1-c, Tl
·
ct iun, Ill a scornfath('
r
j I
'
·
·
ie
C\'
e
ilrnt
n1ocl
·et /1 at 11is
·
'
· ' n1H ( c~ 1 1 i 'c tl 1 t00 1
.·
·'
·
>rT L1 smo tl
I
·
l
ti e vall e v shall jllncl ·
.
ier, t le ravens of
.
.
' o11t, a nd th e voun
I
eat it. A wi :>c so n
I· l
.
g ea g f's sha ll
·.
.
m:i ' e1 1 a g lad fith er b
.
so n is th e li ea" in r . . 0 f 1 .
• lH a fooli s h
.
s :;
JJ : mo th · \ V
s 1ruc t1on lovetli hi ·I I
· ei · · 11oso lovet h in, OIV C( 0' 'C
lJllt Ji tJ
j
' ·
is brutish .
e mt tat e th r eproof
ruin up a ' chi ·l .
I
' m t le way h
w 1e11 I1e is old li e '11
I
e
11 J
not c epart from it.

'

jg

IJI. P rr os PEH ITY A NO AnvEnSJTY.-If I mu s t m ake
choice e ithe r of co ntinual pros pe rity or adY e rs ity, I
would ch oose the l a tt e r; for in advers ity 110 goo d m!ln
ca n w a nt comfor t, \vh c rc as , in p ro ~ p e rit y , m os t m e n wan1
di sc re ti on. Adv ersity uvercom e , is th e g reates t g lary;
an d willingly und erg one , th e grea tes t virtu e : sufferings
arc but the tri a ls of gallan t. spirits.

IV. ANGE!l .-Th e cont inuan ce of an g er is h a tred ;
the con tinuance of hatred be comes mal ice; that an ge r
is n ot w ::irrantalJle whi c h has s uffered the ~ nn to g o down
upon it. L e t all m e n avoid rash speaki11 g . One unqui e t, p erve rse dj s pos it ion, d istemp e rs the pea ce and
uuity of a w hol e famil.v , or socie ty, a s on e Jarnng rnst ru m ent will spo il a whol e concert .
V. R1 c1ms.-Riches b ege t prid e ; prid e, im patien ce ;
impati e nce, re ve ng e ; r eve ng e , wa r; war, pov e rty; povver ty, h umi lit y; h um ili ty, patience; patience, peace;
~nd p e ace , ri ch es.
Th e sh ort est way to be rich,is not hy C' nlarg in g our
es tat es, but, by co n trac tin g our de sires . A gre:tt fortune
in th e hands of a fo ol, is a g rea t mi s h rtun e. The more
ri c h es a fool has, th e g reat er fo ol lie is .
q ..

',I.

ENUL I S H

90

PRA CTlCA L

L E~SONS

p ART THIRD.--SYNTAX.

PERSEVERANCE.

It is a ston ishing to sec h ow mu c h ca n be done by
p erse verance. J e s~ i e is not s0 smart a s e i ther of her
siste rs , yet it strike s me, she wil l g row up th e mos t sens·
i ble ,,·o man of the three ; anJ what <lo you think is the
rcason 1 \Vhy, bec au se she n eve r says s he canno t do
a t hin g, Lut tri es , over and ove r aga in, till s he does it.
Sh e is not qui ck, nor is lt er m emo ry very good , there·
fore it is a g reat tro11Lle to h er to lea rn n lesso n by heart;
b ut yet she is ge nerally be tt e r prepa red th a n th e oth ers.
Th oug h Loui sa can le arn to re peat a p::tge of his tory in
te n minutes , a11<l Cbr:i. w e nt t\\'i..: e tliron g h th e gram·
mar before J ess ie go t to tli e tw en ti e th pa ge, yet th ese
q1 1ic k foll;~ often forget as ra ~ t as th ey learn, a nd,like
the hare in t he fa.lJlc, that ran a ra ce with tli e torto ise,
th ey arc left behind at la s t.-U.wjitl Slo rics.
WA SHI~GT ON AND

ms

GRAM111AR.

IN

MOTHER.

Yonn g Gro rge' w as abont to go to sea as a mid ship·
man ; every th in g was arra n ged, the vessel lay op posite
hi s father' s house', the littl e boat h ad come on shore to
tak e h im urr, and h is who le liearl was be nt on g oing.
A fte r h is trullk had bC'e n carri C' <l down to the boat, he
went to bid hi s mother for e we ll, ancl saw th e te a rs burst·
ing- from hC'r nes. Ho \\' eve r, li e said nothin g to her;
but he sa w that his mother wo iilcl Le d is tr essed if he
wiint, and pe rhaps n eve r b e liappy a g ain. He ju st turn·
ed round to the se rv ant and snid, "Go and tell th e m to
fetch rnv tru nk ba ck. I will not go a w ay to break my
m ot her's hear t." Bi :> moth er w a s stru ck with hi s d e·
cis ion , an d ~ he s;iiil to him," George, God ha s promi ed
to bl ess th e chi ldren that 'h onor - th e ir pare nts, and I
l1 e li e ve h e \\'ill Li ess you."

LE SSO N

xxx rx.

. · . z s nr Syntax .
G eneral 1>nnc11i e :J
.
.
. . f Grammar which treats of
SYN T AX. is that pa.it o
t. n of words in
t and connec 10
th e p roper arrangemen
a

sentence .
A sen tence is such an ass

f
-' s as makes complete
cmblacre o woru
::>

s ense; a s .Man is 111.urlal.
.
f two parts the subject a nd
Every simple se ntence co nsists o
'
.
th e prcdirn le.
poken of and is always the
The subject is the person or t1irn g s
'
.
- J uhn read s.
nornina ti,·c to the ve r 1>; t\s.'
.
·' or J en icd of the subject;
. · l ·, , th e thrng a tfirmeu
The pred 1c
<1 c
ns

Joh n rea d s.

Time is short .

.

· les shoul <l b c carc-

The follow in g general pnnc1p

fully observ eJ :

l

l . must be a v erb an( a
1 In every senten ce, l 1ere
1 t J
.
b. t) ex resseJ or urn ers oo .
nominal'iv e (or _su Jee . _P ad'ective pronoun, or
9
Every art icle, ~1Jechvc,
J
d
.
bstanti ve expresse or un
p articiple, must have a su
. .
.ts own verb expressed
derstooJ .
3 . Every nommative 1las l
or uncle rstooll .
. . ti 1e i.nfm.itiv e ant1 parti
4·. E very vcr1i ( ex cept. rn . ,, ex1ircsseJ or um1erciplcs) has its own nornmat1\ e
.
stooLL
.
. rrove rn cd by some
5. Every p osscsst vc case is o
1 . t' rr th e thin g possessct-1.
noun c cno m"'b· t'
case is go vcrne11 by a tran~16 Every o JeC. ive '
..
· ...
.
.
. by a prepos1t1on.
tive verb in the ad1ve voice , OI

94
PRACTICA L LESSONS JN

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

RuLI; IV . .I] 11 oun and 1/ s pronou n should never be used a,, a
nvnlinative lo l ite «ttmr rab; as , Tli e kiu <; is ju st; not , the king
li e is ju s t. Except tli nt himself, hcru(f, &c. are joined with a
no un or pronoun, rend ering- it e mph utie. [LE,SoN XII. Ons. I.]
RULE V . IYhen the verb T O DE stands bet ween a singular and.
plural nomin ative , it ar;rees wilh th e one next to it, or the one
which ·i s more n at urally lite .<11bject of it; as T he wages of sin
is death .

· [I. . .E.·ssoN ...X VII I. 5,J i as, " J
Live case . a nd has a 11assive voice
'' 1'I, race i:i run."
ti , .
run a race. " . . ) '_
t admit a p r epositiun after icm,
IV . 1'ranstl l'Ve i·ei bs du no
1·
" 0 111il w ith.
.
.· I l . ol>scn•a 1011.
"thus ,, I prcn11sc wit t t 11s
d
t be used as th e ohjcclire
v. Jl ·no un aurl it s pronoun shoul no
ir
. ' "'!Ce as ·wcllas a noun
.
.
lor;uirtoJa.'itllt, ,,
.,
1'/wrnfln·tl emuo<,
·"/" · cctirc1·crb
.
i be the object of a t rcrn•1 Il e_ t,,
,

artcr lh esa 111 ei.1e r/J.
J

vr

. .

''l.'

ur p ro noun, may " "I wish lllltt th ey were w -isc.
B c•j"' Juve to pla.y.
.
. c 11 c10 .SE , APP O INT , and the
to N_
Vl L Vcrl1s stgni. '1" "
·,M,,,
cl him Ju/111
b
.
.
.
as
they
na me
·
/i lcc, g overn t wo o ) CC 1<VC>, • '

. ·r . "'

LESSON XLII.
RuLE II . .11. trans·it-ivc verb £n the act?'.ve voice,
g overns t lie objcct-ivc case ; as, We love ltim. He
loves us. W!wm d id th ey send?
To Xl'LANATTON.- T!, c 1ran sirive \"C rb i11 Ilic aclivn vo lce,uil<ays tells wha t JU.
s11hjcct or nominaln·c <i<ws 10 ""' " "other person or th ing, cull ed ilo object. Tho
nile
lhi.< ohjcct lnllRt alway" he p11 1 111 th e uljcl"!ire rnse. This rnlo lo
liatiJ., '"be vio ialed only whrn 1i1e. object is a w o1wtm , /;ecau se in all oilwr wore.ls

111~11•,l hat

tJ1f' nnmina1h· e nrid ohj cr. li\'C

ca~cs ar e

ulilrn .

Nouns awl personal pronouns in the ohjectiv e CMe, are llSUally placecl ancr lho
vcrb-relalfre tuHI Jntcrrdgntivc p ronowlS, usually be fore it

E XERCISES.
I . In th e follnwinJ: E x 1;rc i.• •.•, poi nt o u1 lh n tran s i1(>· c vc rh- Jt.< •uhjcct-J[To 0J>.
icct-pu1 ll >al ohj<: I"! in ""' proper ca"e- lc/ I w 111,t r!.a1 ens" is, and w!.y.

He loves I. Did tli e.v hurt ye? \ Ve ];n ow he and
they. He and th ey 11·c k now. The fri end wl10 I love.
T ake ca re who yo t1 ad mit. I will n ot g ive ye up. He
who you ignoran tly w.ors hip, declare 1 unto you.
2. Write a n um be r of scu tenccs, eacl1 of whi c h shall co ntain nn ac tive tranm.
such as, <lo,
touch, lm1·1, hn:c, &c., fnliowctl by a personal pronouu

~,·,, 'verl!;

in the proper

cas1~.

/,a~e,

l\trse

tli~m, u11d give

the Rul e.

i'l'ECL\L llV LES UNDER lllJLE II.

I. lntransilit>c verbs nev er gover·n an obje ctive case; thus,
' J~cpenting l: i m of h is design." • Omit hi11t.
1

II. J 11t 1·ansilirc verb~ do not ad mit of <t passiuc i·oicc; thus,
"I a m perished ." slwulcl be, "I perish," o r," I am perisJ1ing."
III . ./Jn il!ir1tnsitit•e rerb _u sed tran sltl•ely KOV8nts ·lhB objcc

,.
If,_:.~

LESSON XLIII.
R "LE III. Prcpos1/ wns gm:crn n. t e objective
l ·h case;
11 be

~\ -~­

:- .,_.

'
Ii;
-. 1
.• ·..-·-·,·

,,

_,.

•. &
.••,
~

...

.

v
•
of lam muc 1 s a
w!torn mu ch is grven,
as, 'To

required.

.

nor pronolln nilcr . prepo. mJP
m e w1B lh1H tlil' nou
1 unly in Ul6
F.Xl'LAXATION.- Tl HS
. • ~ . • • cas~. This rule ca...11 be vi o luh:1
Ri t1on , lllllS! UC VUl in th e Objc dl\e
•

·e sometimes gove rne1l by a prcpoSt·
l3 t this s lo oul<I i:encrnlly he
at some di st;w ce after th em. I ", • ,· l lo "-oe tl.cr- " lo
ti
on
"This
is
h
e
.whom
g nv c
'
avoiolc<I; thus,
.
use

of prononn s.

.

Ons. I. TV/t om an1l wh:ch iu

I

whom I gav e '"t"
.
. .
. somr•timcs omitted. I t ,,
. d
·, th en .sru
9 Tl 1e nrepos1tJon ts . . .
1 " Herc "m.e "
Ous.
·
"
Give
(to)
me
that
boo
c
'
•
to be und erstood; thu s,
l l> " to" und erstood.
'
is govcrnct y
..
.
ME v
WEl'<HIT, or
ft.J"C
N
' ·1 g<1 ve nnn
· g wot-d ·' a .s'
Sun-Ruu:.- o w1 s d cnot111g TJ. • ·11 mt
. t1
Lj ·cti ve case, w1 H. , ~ .
th
commonly put Ill. Hl"
·" "lt cost n sli illi1<g, Lu l it is not wor
"He Wf\s absent six Mon/ '
11 i six feet l1i«h, and two
' "It \"oj,-rhs
a pound;" II The wa s .
o
u cent;"
'~""o

Al~UE

MEAStJllF.~

'~,.

;. t t l1ick"
.
,,_ as the case
Jee
. be called the obiective
of tune,
va zue, ""'-'·•
This mlly
,
may be.

EXERCISES.

;:..tty

•
nd tile word &overnod by eaoh. Put that word
J. Point out the pre po•lllon•
Gtv• the Rttle.
Ill the proper o&Q, If D111 In It a
•

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

IrnGLT'>H _G RAllIMAR.

Thi s belongs to my father and I. ·who did you get
It from?
'\Vho s l1all \\"e st:: tlll it Ill? Divide it be lln·en
ye, o r gi1·e it to he •an d I. Thi s is a s mall matter between you and I. vVho did you g iv e it to 1 \ Vho do
yo Lt w ork fo r?
2. In th i:-i way ,w1i1.c a nurn!JP.r o f Ei l1on sc nt c ncof:i, each of whi c h slta ll contain
a prcpo~i li o 11 (:;ce !hr· fo;I, p. 7!1 1) titl! o wl'd hy a pl.' rson tll or r c lali \'ei pr1Jnoun ln lh"
proper m s..:. PaN:ic the i.;1: nt c 1u; e:::i: a11d ghc th e Jlu lo fo r the case ail e r Ili c pre~
riition.

lluLE

':...

'

Ru LE' 'IV. Two or more substantives singular, takeii
in connc:r£011,requfre a verb in the plural; as,
1. Cato and Cice ro u:ere learned m en . .
2. 1Jo11or , justice, re lig ion itself, arc derided hy the profligate.
Ons.-"N <01111S co nncetc• l by a preposition 8omc timcs ha\'!i 11 pln·
ml 1·cru, but this is improper nt ul sho11hl not lie imit a ted ; T hu s,
"tho king, with '.he lord~ and con1mo11 H, conslil1tl e tli e Eugli~h
for lll or µ:orcrnmcnt. " Omit "with the."
EXPLA NA TI ON - Tiie plurnl Jt:ll Mn!i 111 or c tl1 u 1J o no j nud h ccnu~e two or
more no u n'J in t be 5 iu g 1da r deno te m ore lhuu o ne, th ey urc Cflll i \'ulcn t to a p\u.

rnl; 1t11d hc: ncc tin> verb of wh ich tl 1c y are tlic ~uhjcc t , auu w o n !::1 wh h.: h islund
i11 s1eatl. o( tli c m, or refer to 1he m, 111 ust !Jc plurnl nhm.

EXERCISES .
l. P nir1l ont the vNb m r i,c h of Ili c fo ll owing sc ntrnr: cs. Rf'e wh eth er the subj ect con si~•ts of S1w, or 1non• ll1an ouc pt!rsou or Uling. Jf of more than one, pul
the verb in Ilic proper 11 um\1c·r uJJd person.

On e and one ma k es two. Y our s is te r and brother
has come . Tim e nnd tide waits for no man. Socrates
a nd Plato \\'as a Greci an p h ilosoph er. D e w and hoar
fr~ st w as ab undant in tl1 e valley.
Diligence anrl persevera nce overcomes all <liffir.ulties.
!.?. \.\'rif"

I\

rn 1rn!1ci- o f t;.r• 11 tcnc cs s im il;u- 10 th e A.bov c, having 1wo nouns tn Ulo

sl 11g11 b r co111d 1·d hy a11d.

f1,1·

ftulc for the verb bc i: i;t plural.

l hc sul1Je c t o f lhO .\'CflJ.

Parse U1c m, and givo Ulo

T. T~ SS 0 N XL V.
V. Two or more substanl'ives singular, tulc cn

~- ezH1rately, or one lo t!te cxclus-ion of tlte r est, lta vc a
v erb ·i n tlte s-ingular, as, "John or James or Andrew
intends to accompany you."

.,
LESSON XLIV .

97

EXPLANATION.-Num1s are vie wed scp ar a t ~ l y, when, though they nH f.;tantl
as the uomiimlive to Lhe n :rb, yet only on e , excl us ive of c:i.ll th e rc.i, is the sobjcct
of discourse, as in lhe abo \' e exampl e: or, Lhou gh al l arc equ al ly the s11bjf::lcl of
discou rse, yet th ey are not so iu 01mbination, but intlivhlua!Jy. ln lh.is case lho
ve rb agr e11s with the la!it , anJ is \UHJerstood to the P :SL 8 ep o1r alion is mark ed by
th e conjunctions or and 11 or e xpressed or understoocL

Sun-RULE.-.A singular and a plu ra.l nominative, connectt.d
by a disjunctive, r equire a verb in the plural; as, ·Neither the
capta in nor the sailors we re saved.
• • • The plural nomi rintive should be placed next the verb.

EXERCISF.S.
I. P oinl out th e \•crh a nd th e seve ral nomina: iv eH, i cll whether taken in con ne.\.·
ion or bl·parate ly, 1wd why. l 1 ut tile ' ·crU iu lhc pn111·~ r 11u mhcr 1 according VJ the
H11 lc.

Are J ;nncs, or John, or Thoma s , the oldest 1 Either
l1is grat itu de or co mpn ~s ion we re rou sed. Hope or des·
pair govern him. Charles, or J ohn, or Henry, arc at
h ome. 011 e or th e oth er have d one it. Eithe r Tom or
Dick have hurt l1imself.
2. \Vritc short s<mTencc:i of wliich th e Hubjert ithu ll be two o r more no~ms lnktHJ
fiM•p1u·a.rcly, and tJ1c verb In th e presen t or In 016 11resc nt-perfcc t te nse.

LESSON XLVI.
VI. 1. TV!ien two or more nom'inatives combined are of different pers1ms, the verb is 'plurul, und
prefers the first. person to the second, and the second to
RuLE

the third; as, '' Ile and I are brothers."

98

PRACTICAL LESSONS I N

2 . Wit en nominatives of d·i jfercnlp ersons are disjunc·
tively 'c onnect ed) the verb in tlie singular agrees wit!~
the person next it, or is expressed with each; thu s,
" He or I am to blam e;" or " He is to blam e, or I am."
EXPLANATJON.-Thi s Itulo me ans lktl If. of differe n t n om i11 alives to a verb
on(' i~ in th e firM p ('~o11, ll u• n tl1" p!ura.f ve rb or a pronoun r e fe rring to 1hcm, is
r11t in th r, first p e r~·o11; a n ti if o ne i::; in 1.lie sccontl pcrS1Jll and no ne in 1he first,
then \ ht' \'C r h o r pronoun iA. p11t in 1hc sC'cowl prrso11. I t is linwcvcr, onl y in the
use of th e prorio un s tha t thrrc i ~ n li .Lh i!ily rn 1·1T tuHIPr li ds rnl f' 1 hccau ~c hll the
IJ C' l"Sl'ms nf 1hc WTh in 1lie plur:tl 1tu111lier arc alik e. T he second part needs no

cxplnnation.

On s . In lite onlc r or arrange m ent i1t Engl ish , the seco n<l person is usually plac,e J before th e third , anti Uie Jirst p erso n is always pluccd la st.

EXERCISES.
J. ln the f111lnwi ng isc ntcnc cs , po int o ut which w ord::S nro th e \•c rbs-w Jrnl
l'\ro th e nn111\n1ttivcis .
verLs I n

c~td i.

Ar rnngc tho nomi nati ves in th o prope r orde r, put the

i n the prn1 >c r number n nd perso n.

Thomus-an d you has divid eu that apple bet wee n you.
J and th ou art to blame.
I or thou have done it. l, o r thou, o r J ohn, ·is appo iutcd
to roll.fl. I and .James has n. horse of o ur ow n; have
not we?

I o r.J ames ~lo it ou rscl vcs.

2. \·Vri tc s hu rl ~c:•Hc n ccs nf wl1kll 1.hc tmhjf't l shall be nominali vcs o f diffcrtml
pernou::t, prnp•·rly arr:w;;(·d, and tell what pe rson and numbe r tl1 t'! ve rb i9, and
why. T ell wh a t p ronvtrn f'll;u1J s fo r "he a ncJ J 11-" th cma11d he " -" he and 11he"-

"lltou n.nd 1. 11

LESSON XLVII.
Ru LE VJI. 1. Wlten a collectiv e no1m con·vey s llu
?:dca (!f 1111it.71, its rerb must be s·ingular; as, The
class was l~rge.
2 . 1Vltrn a r"iJ!/ cctiv c uo11n i;miV C!JS th e ·i dea of plurnl-ity, -it s n :rb ?1P1sl be Jllurol; :1s, l\'Jy p eople do
riot c onsider.
Thc1; Jia,·e no t know n me·.

};J'iGLIS H

99

GRAMMJ\.lL

EX l' J.A NA TJ ON' -· A col/ ec11vo noun co nv cyfl u ni ty of
i~ MJd

id~ ~ n , wtlen

Df It r ee,nl'd8 th1! '·11!1r cli nn us orw w l HJlr~ rt.WI nf!l .1s 1ndi v1.J 11 al~

t!M.t wldch
or div! d •:1i.

Thu~ 1

in the fin-t e ...::w qo!f' 1 it W.ci tl1 c "class, " a11J 11•, f 1t1c: l11d1v 1 tln.d~ c~ •m1'· 1~1H t;:
tr, ll 1i1I ·' wa~ hff•4 c." IL ('u ll\' Cj'~ plurality, wlwn tlial wlih:h i:i s aid fC;!ilrds rwliuly

the l n dividuuls ur part s, an d not th e co ll i.::c l.i on as

(Lliat

b~,

0 11 e

whole; as, " l\l y w·oplc .,

ttll of ll1f:m ;_t1icl eve ry one o f th em» "du not co ns ider."

Jn th is Huie tho

t;en sc j!j Lhe h eist i;...-uitJe.

On s. Pron oun s r e rerri11 g to collective nou ns, mu st in like man.
ner be singular or plural, nccor<ling as th e iJea of unity or plurality is expressed.
~

EXERCISES .
l. l'oin t ou t t he <'n lli:·c lh'f} nrnu1 s. Cou sidl'r fro1 11 th o; t-:c nse wlif'!1 1f' r ll1 cy co n.
vc y unily or plurality of idt·a 1 and pu~ th e \'C: rb in !lie s i11 ~ ular u r pl t1 ral acco rdingly.

Th e schoo l arc d i s 1 n i ~se d. A cl111rch a rc mad e up of
all th e members. The assemLly were u nanimous .
Th e assembl y was di vid ed. Th e number of hea rers
were very grea t. Mankind is unit e d by th e bonds of
frie ndship. Never was a people more var ious in its sen·
timents. Th e crowd were imme nse.
2. \Vtite short ae ntf! nccs in e ;u.:. h of which lh c s ubject, or n o m io at i\' O !O lhe verb,
shall be one o r the follow in g: no1111s, viz., multitwle, cro1c-d, aru1y, natian, fleet,
J">CO'ple, generat ion, &c. ; tdl \YfH; th cr l11c verb is si ugular or pl11ral, anti why.

L E SSON XLVIII.
R uL E VIII. 1. .8.n adjedive qualifies f lte substunt,ive to which it belongs ; as, A good boy.
2 . .fldjcctivcs denoting one, qualify nouns in lite
s·i ngular; those denoting more titan one, q_1111l ijy nouns
in the plura l; as, This man, th ese m en; th::it house,
those fi elds .
E XPLANATI ON .- Tld s H.11 lc rtp pHr.8
mUective J i 1·01w 1m ..: 1 a11d p <trf i e1j>les.

tir r~qi

all n11j Prf h·n W()rd ~ , n:1mf'ly, adjccTli r st· h1·i11 !;: li1 d 1•d i11a l1!1) 111 E11;;1ii;h,

ff)

I hero iR da11gc r of error only HI rite u s~ of Jo;t1Ch a s imply number .

Ous . l. A·Jjcctives d<'n<•lln g one, ure t h is, that, ori c, each, every ,
either , neither• nnd the nrJi na l n u111c rals, ji1·s1., •eco11d , th i rd, &c

'

.

JOO

P JlAC TICAL LESSONS IN

Un,. :! . Ad jecti ves denoting more than on~, nre these, th ose,
many, screra f; nnd th e ca rdi na l num crnls, two, three, f our , &c.
Oti,; . 3. Some adj cc ti1·cs i111plying nurcber ca n he j oined with
either singula r or plural n0uns, acro nl ing to th e sen se ; as , sorne.
all, 11 0, &c.; th us, ::lo111c mn n; Som e men, &c.
On s. 4 . Ex c£Pno ,,.. 111 hen the no un following the nume ra l is
u'cd in a n a djcc li 1· c 'c n,e, ( L ESSON X ., Ons. J ,) it hn s not the
plural tcr m inat io11 ; thu s, we sny, A fou r inch plank; a three
.fuut w idl; "ltnir lt or.1c tenrn; n ten acre fi e ld, &c.

EXE ll CJSES .

Ex 1 ·rd.~c,

I. Jn Ili c foll11wi11:.;puiot out l he ;:uljec th·cs 1t.nd lh e substanrfvcs w hich
1
ll 1'Y q11rt!ify. T jd l wliirh 1J.·note onr , and w hicl1 m ore Lhan one, and make the
Bubs1anti \·es s1 n~ ul 11r or plural as the adjccli\'CS r erJltirc.

A well six fathom <le ep. A pole te n foot long. A
field tw enty rod wi de.. I ha ve not seen him this ten
days. Those so rt of peo ple are common . Th ese kind
thin gs arc use less. You will find th e remark in the
scco nJ or th ird pages. Each h ave th e ir own place and
th ey lrno1v it. The seco nd a nd thir<l page were torn.
3. \ Vrilc Rhn rt l'i'Cntcncc~ ,..ar. h of wlrklt r<lud l conln in an adjective of number
.(~<:c O n!'! . I, 2, :\) nnd 1\ 111 11 hsta11li Yo in til e number rcqu ircU by U1e adjective.

or

J ll UF~, F.n• ,.r 1wm !I n. ii tl pole s i:<.fct!l lo11g.

EN GUSH GRA:'lll\IJ\ n.

101

LESSON L .
Ru LE X. - - Pronouns ag r ce willt L/1,c no uns for
wkicli they stand; in gende r, number, and p erson ;
as, .Jolm is here; h e came an hour ago. Ev ery t rc0
is known by its fruit.
EXPLA NATION.-This Ruic appli es only to !lie pe rsonal and J"IS;'{••sNlvr 11 1lJTh ese sla11d inl:'ltcud o f noun s of all gc 11 Llc~ , 1111mhcNi, anti pt~csons: .ud
the llule ITH!lUli'i that wh e u u11y o f llu.:sc pru11nw1 s i!') WH'd . it m ust be of I.ht: l" ~UJt)
g e nde r, num be r, a11J pe rson, with th e nou u fu r whi c h it st and&.
. .

I . .ll pro11ou11 referring to t wo or more s11hsf {l 11 fit' es of dijl .- r.
r en t p er sons, t{/ k en together i s plu.r a l , <ind pn'fer s l/11• j1rs/ per ,
so 11 to th e seco nd , and the second to the th ird ; as, J ohn a11 <l l du
our <luty.
II. 1-Vhen a pronoun r efers t o t wo or °//lore snbs ta ntic es of lhe
same gender, t"ken separ"tcly, or lo one nf th em ex~lu sfrc ! y , .1t
m ust be si11 gu la r; as, "A clo ck or a watch is com pli cated 111 11 ~ _
1n ovcmcnts .''
III. But if eit her of th e subst an t-i-ves be pl1lra l , the pronoun
must be plu r"l al so; as," Neithe r lte nor th ey Lront.le l hrmselr c"
IV . .11 pronoun r eferrin g to" col l ect i-vc 1101111 rx pr1'ssrng u111ty ,
should I.Jc fri the neuter l>ingulari fl8 1 "The army is on its t11 :tn.:lt."
Btd when i t expresses mnny, as indiri1lual s; lh c 7no11ou.n must
be 1itural; as, "'1'11 0 court we re d ivi1l ed in th ei: opi11iuno."

EXERCJSES.

LESS ON XLIX .
Ruu: I X. T-Vltcn two persons or tltings are contrasted, {hat r efers to lite.first mentioned, and this to
tltc last; a~ ,
Vir t 11 c.n nc I v ice nrc ns opposite to each other as light and dark.
ness; th at ennobles the mi nd, this debases i t.

0Hs. Former 1.1 11 1! fott er, one ancl other , are often used ·instead
uf 1/111! nnd this. F ormer antl latt er arc alike in both numbers·
•
1
one nnd oth er refer to tlte sm g ular on ly. In mos t cases , however,
Ll1 e rrp ct iti on or th e '""ms is prefcral>l e tu eith er of th ese substi .
t11U:s . Tlti i.; i l ull· 1w-.·, f:, uo illun lru tion.

t'

11 oun ~ .

1. Tn th e foll owin g Exe rc1se,point out the personal and '~~scs:si v e 11mnn 11 1U!,
and tire uomis for which 1hey !ltamL Change the pro11uu11, if 11 ece.ssary, fvr o:io

of the same geuder, number, and person with

Give to every man their d ue.

it1'

uoun.

Answer not a fool

accor<linrr to her folly. Take l1an<lfuls of ashes and
(
,.,
.
l
sprinkl e it towards h eaven. R ebecca.took ra1rnen_t am
p ut them upon Jacob. Th ou an<l he share<l 1t be
tw een them . Virtue forces her way through ob~'.curi·
ty, and , sooner or lat ~r. is sure to be reward ed. .
·
2. ' Vn te

~entcncc~ ea~

h f l iel.1 shall contain ono of 1he foll ow ing 11 oun~,
o w' . .
~ f11tl1e r m"tlur book,

nnc1 a prououn !!tandm g 11uneod of tt. J ohn, .M ary , im d ,
'.
'
L
b oy , ,,.,,a)"• • '·c • .I thui ) u There is J ohn; te ll him to come H l 1 he m u~t 110
ft0ttJt'
1

tired."

·~
1·

102

PRA CTICAL LE SS ONS IN

LESSON Ll.
Hux.E XI. 1/ie rclafrvc agr ees w·itli its antecedent
in numb er and p erson, and tir e v erb agrees with it
accord·in g ly; as, 'l'lion who spcakest. Th e book

LESSON LII.

whi ch wa s lost.
E XPl.A:\'.AT!O;\'".-T \10 l"•"lnlini holll st:u1d s instead of the noun or pronoun
~alkd n s a.J l l "C"d•~n 1 1 and conn"Ct~ th e idea cxpresscJ in its clansc with the nntel'. f'd " nr, os n fanh~ r limira! ion M d t•sc ripti nn o f it. Consequ ently the r elative is
n!w;1ys r" ~a n lc d as of rJi,. s:unc pe rson and number as its antec edent; and, if tho
11om i n<11i,·c to a v e1·b. th e ,·r r h will he u f !he sa m '! 1rnmbc r nnrl person also. Por
rem arks r cfl; pcc ti11g fl1 e au!t• t:t: dc11l a111I Ilic u:;c o ( 10ho aud tohid' see Li,: ssoN XILL

8 1'E CIAL R ULES UNIJEfl RULE XI.

R uu: 1. Th e re/alir e

WHO is aJiplied lo persons; WIIICH 1 to
a •iuials cwd things; Tl!AT, lo both pe rso ns and th'irigs .
Ilu u: I L Th e re/a.l ive, w ith its clause, should be placed aJ
n ear as 71oss ible to it.i ctn l ecedcn l , to prevent a.mb iguity.
HuLE ! IL JV/icn lite relativ e is preceded by tw o words r eferring lo tir e sa'l!le thin g, ils proper antec edent ·is the one next it;

ns , Thou art the mu n u·ho was engugeJ. in th a t business.

On o. The relative llw.l is used in stead of who anti which1. ACtcr the superl ativ e de::rree, th e words same, all, and sometimes no, some, nnu any; as "It is the best that can be got. "
2. \Vlw11 the an teceden t in cludes both persons and things; as,
"The man and the horse Ih a. I we saw ycsterdny."
:i . .Afl er lli c i11tcrro!::a tivc tl'ho , and sometim es after the per80nnl pronnw1•; ""• "Who that knows l1im will believe it." "I
that speak in ri; litcou sncss."

EXEll.CISES .
I

l. P oint out !he r "lativc, 11.nd th e noun or pronoun to whic h it refers. Tell
tl\c 11sc of t li1~ rr· latiw•, and tr!! c lause in each sentence. Alle r th e rein.live, if ne-cc:-sary, ns r•'r111 ircd hy i: ~ :111r cccdc11t, ncconling lO Strn-llur,1~ J. Jf th e rclativo

RvLE XII. Substant-iv es denotin g the same person
. case; as ' c·iccro the ora tor.
" rr ' arrrcc
·m
or t iiinb
o
.
b ·
· si tion
vV onh thus usc1l are said to e rn app o
.
.

I in a ·msilion atlcr a noth er nou n, to cxIT l.r11. bclon;rin~ to it. Both noun ~ mus t
press s.:.11n e urt rilw te, fi ,..:;cnptwu ,01 appe. a L~ I ' . 1 lh" osubJ'c ct or prcdiratc. Thi,;
b • r ! \i P S(' Jl!•~ ll \~ I' 11\al \ Sl It
C
•
1
'.
lw i11 tl1 e sa m1'! 111e m ('I o
~ .
'. . !
I 't is o11lv wllr..n 1hc won.1 in up·
Hui e ui)plics (1) ull wonts u ~ed i:1t1 l)~la1111 v1' y, hil ~ . ~. r IJ1~ "a11sc in pronoHns onl 'f
J , t thc re is a11Y d ii.n ~...- r OI t rm i - ~
. .
r osition i.~ a ~.)\'O llOUl l, t .. ~ ..• ivc 8..f~t! tl1.ff1~ rf': nt in fo nn. T he wo n\ in a ppos1.u on Is
the l'l •>m111 e ll\·e nnd obJt d
. . 1' " t; tbo word:~ as, bei11g , and the like.
sometimes conncctctl with the prece1 llle y
EX l'LA.iS'A 'flON -1\

u u.1111 . 1::1

pl~cc1

EXERCISES.
"
.
.
t the word s in apposition. See if they nro
1. ln th e follow ing Ex ercise pomt ou
. r igh t . if not it is wrou g antl must
In tile sa.rn r: case. H l\1 ey a.re, th e sente.1:~~~:r3 are ;i•T llt ot~\lcrs \non~.
be correc ted. In the !·ollow mg, some ilCH
'
o
, .
•

f),rst in th e h earts of his countr):m en is \V ashrn gton ,
· t L Fayette
th e h ero the sta tes mun, and the patr10 .
a b h '
'
.
·
Your rot er
the fri e nd of ' Vash111gton, JS no more:
h.
t is pal , 111,m who w e nt abroad. I bought
has re tnrne C
·
·n
·seller he who lives opposite; w1 yo u
bool
U
f
'
b J d
Pe r rom . .l' to that
bov he th at stands y t le oor
please to g ive i
J'
.
,
, t
·ell h er that was lat ely s ick 1
ls your sis er "
'
d Its
. . ··te cc: rrect se nte nc es contain ing nO\.ms, or a n oun an
2. Jn tliis mann c1 \ \ l\
'
pronoun, in apposition.

1!-1 th 1~ ll•Jmin ati\·e, pnl it.;; \' Crh in !hr.! r.;a m e nmn bcr Rnt.l person as tl1e r elative ur

t!ic nn tf•1;nlo•n1.

Gi\'c

~\

LESSON LIII.

rc tt son fo r eac h cllan ge.

Th e fri e nd whi c h I love. The vice whi ch I hate.
Th e re is the dog 1rho fo ll o w ed u s. They who seeks
wi ~ dom find it.
All whi c h beaut y , ull which wealth
e'f'r grtvl'. "I who speak unt o yoLt nm he."

"

is
LS

1.

h ur.E

c 0 <tcr a v erb
'J '

' sub 'eel bej orc it; as,
'.)

the some case as t!i e
J. " " l tov k ·it to be him .
in

, •

, XIII . 1/ic predicate suustan i_v

"

It

104

PRACTI CAL Lf: ~ SONS J N

EX PLAN A TJON.-Vcrbs ha,'ing th e s;irn .
tllose whi ch signify robe, f !) bec011ie , .·.: ' "' c .c ,tsc nfl cr RS be fore thcm ,are chiefly
and th e like; a.~ "Joh 11 b ,
, p, 1:sljJ\ c 'nbs u f11 ami-tJg, m.al.·i11g choosing
noJniuaUvc bcfor~ th e •· ·1 C( arne _n gcholar;,, u D
. avid was mad~ ki1: rr ,, 1'll '
•Il l! c v1 Tb 1.--1 rlr c s11b · I

I

.

.~

o·

e

nnd Lh c \'Crb is !he copula JI
.
')Cc ' l ic on,.. nll c r it i8 U1e predic~
u·i e noun."! dr noro Ill; sarn~
.' . n<:c ll1f'~ nil form a simple f.lrnte ncr and thowrl'
In
. .
'
Jl" IWHI nr t!1111!!' anct arc I . I ,
'
c I
appoa11wn, as In I.he pr cccdi n •, r ule
Tl ·- .
II I u.: tiamc cast'! , Lii ey are not
nouns. In qu cslio11s, th e \'L•rL ~r ii :-; ·.
. •_ll'f ltu le rcfc n> b<i ll 1 lo nouns and pro\Vh cn rhe word after rhc \'t' rl
~d ilt1X 1l1ary Ma nus before boLh nominatives.
pr
.
', uccor Ing lo t/1 c Rul , J • J .
onou n, it s tands hcfo rc both th e o1 J 1 "J~
c, _s a re alive o r intetTogative
only Jn tho us e of pron oun s
l fr
- . . H e re agau1 1l1('rc Ja danger of error
' a111_ or !J1,.: :same r eason as before.

EXERCISES.

J. Jn th_e folTO\'l'in g f ;x. . . n· i.i;,i ,~, in cnc li

liiC' 11

•

•

•

nu1e nppl1c:Q, nod Ilic / l(l tm or pr mo w I / (: oce, pomt out th e verb to whic.lt the
one bcforc,nnd why. Put the on~ an:r :,~•ire a:nJ a. Ocr i t. T elJ lhe CM:e Of tlJe
fhe ~ulc for the ch:mgf•, a nd she w Jim: H t~1e ~·~no ~~nsc as th e one before, give
Cate 10 e:ich sentence.
pp . cs. Tc U the s ubjec t and predi-

• It is me. It could not hal"e been tl

.
was not m e Th t .
ie m . I am certain
·
a is t1ie m
h0 I }
Is th at thee 1 ' "J
d .cl
an w
t 10ug ht it to be.
· n 10rn i t 11ey s
·
stood it to have been he \V .. ay it was? I undercould not have been me.. bu ta~ Jt i:ie that said so? It
or her, or them both .
,
J! mi g ht ha ve bee n him,
lt

2. \Vrite si mila r co11·cc t sent ences in c
.
Jng \' Crbs, witJ1 the 1;nmc case •fl ·,ac h of wlu ch sliall be one of th o foUo,v
MaJJ b
• · " er a as be fore H ·
.
•
t: c/wseu., lo be, l o be Called I b .
.
. 'Vl7.., is, are, becam.,e, UJQ8 11UM./~' o c appomted.

Apj)ly th e Itule.aa abo\•e.

-,

E NGLl5 1! Gil. AMMAR.

lU·'.i

On~ . .1. ' Vhcn s r \·cral nouns come togt:t li c r in tlic po ss e ~ s i\' e
cnsr, imply i1\g ' comrnon po s ~es~ ion 1 th e s i:; n of llie pos:-;css ivc ('s )
is an nexed to the In st, a n<l und ers tood to the r est; as," Jane aml
Lucy's books
i . e ., books, the common prOJJ er ty of Jane !ill<l
Lucy .
0Hs. 2. 1lut if ·common posscs>ion is not impli ed, or if severa l
· wonls intervene, the s ig n o f th e po ~ses s iv c !->lwulJ Uc annexed to
enc h ; ns , ·'Jane's n nd Lucy's books ," i . e., books, some of which
nre J a ne's,an<l others Lucy's.
Ons. 3 . \Vh cn a name is complex, co ns isting of more t erm~
than one , the s ig n of the possessive is nnnexed to th e last only;
as, "Julius C resar's Commentaries. " "The Bishop of London's
Charge."
O JJ s. 4. The latter or governing subs tantive is fre11ucn ll y unJcrstoo<l; ns, "He slays n t hi s fath er's" ( hou se).
Ous. 5. The pr epos iti on of, with th e ol.jec ti vc, is fr equ ently
equivalent to the possessive, but not a lw ays. In the u se of it,
both llllrshness and amlJ igu ity s hould he avoided.
~For severnl of the min t1 ti re lJe longing to this Rule sec G r ..
§§ 62, 63. An.& Pr. Gr. 830-850.

EXERCISES .
l. Jn rhc following Ex e rci ~c point nut th e noun or pronoun denoting tho po1't>eai-;o r, und t li1! noun denoting the thing po!'i.~~1o;Cd 1 n.nd If t rnd c r~ to._,.J f;Upply IL
.Put th e word dc n ut ing the posscR..-;o r in the possmsah·~ Cit HC. \ Vtic11 se\·c ral \\.·onls
com ing together sl1 ould Le in tli r: possei;i;ivc, or wh en 1J1e name is cou1plox, aUJ

th e sign of the posscs:Ji\'e {'s ) w 1he p1'\Jpc r tcm1.

LESSON LIV.
Rur.E XIV. W!1cn two nou
t'
ns come to rrctli
d
b
ter, cno .i ng t!te possessor and lite tli .
£s put -in ti.
.
ting possessed, tlwfirst
te possessive case. as Joh ' b k

eag le's wings.
.tn

'

'

· ns

oo ; on

EXPT.ANATIOl'i.-Uncl(' r this n ulc the n
.
.
Ch o posscs..<.> h•c cn.o; c T11::i c denorln" the ~rn rlcnoting th e pos.<:Jcssor Js always

My CAac. T !iJM Il uie ap pli t~s to the rc~·tth·e p rson o r Uling possessed may be In
~= ~~·':°nal pronoun, w/1c11 tl1 e noun <;enou~~~~ul~ ~ncl to the P<>ascsslve cue of
iat .book is mine." 'Vhrn C.' tprc11tscd th e
ung JIO~SC88<.'<l is Understood i
H0861ve adJect h'c pro rn1 1111. " ~ u 1·1
.
'
possei;sor JS denoted by the po
I ' 'I

la t JS 1n!J book_ H

tJ.

J.'he boys book. Th e g irl s bonnet. The Ladys book,
a birds n est, a bear skin. A moth e rs te nd e rn ess and a
fathers care , are natmes g ifts for mans ad vantage. A
horse toot h. J ames and Thomas fee t arc cold. "\Villi um s and lVfurys re ig n. Pratt's, \ VooJfonl's, & Co.'s
books tore is in N c w-York. J a mes loss is Thomas gain.
The Farm e rs Gu ide . The Scholars Companion. The
Courts sess ion is put off. The meeting 's presid ent was
appoint ed.
2. ' Vritc short sc nt cn('.CS 1 eac h o f which i!ihan contain •two n o 1mR1 Ont:! denoting
the pot;sessor, in the p roper case, th e other th e th.Ing possessed.

lOG

l' RACTIC;\ J, LESSONS IN

107

ENGLISH GllAMMAR.

LESS ON LV.
RuLE XV. Tl'lten //l(. p res ent or perfect particip le is used as a no1m, a s11bstantive before it is put in
tftc vossessive case; as, "Much depends on the pup1"l's
com pos£11g freq ucn1.ly ;" "lfis liaving done so is e'•idcnt."

l
. \' Cr these two mot1f'S <'Xp rr.~
,. ~ vPry difftrent i<l et:.1.~,
c.c mc c:i.~cs .10'\ f'
.)
t the sense is necessary .
I therc lur c attc nuon o
.
.
J>ossc ssive prononn rrc2
'""0
" vc
01 a
- ·
· J
·
· ns . · \Vh en a posscss
. Jli . . XV.
of us11a II.) fol i o\\·~ it;.. JUt
ceJcs the parti ciple, as 111 uu. .
';tion follows the part1 c1ple;
tl enr when a pi cpos
not always, a n n
•
. ·cs proved hi s ruin.
as, His depc nll in g on pro111'. ' .

ca>~

EX PLANATfON.-T/1e present participle is used as a verbal noun,whcne•or
I: i• tho • ubject of a ' 'C rb, or rh e object of a a·ansltive verb

EXE:RCISES.
I. In Ilic following Exercise, tell whicl1 is the ver bal noun, nnu how you knO\v It
to begive
uso<lllicasrusuch.
If a noun stands before it, put that noun In tho proper c.....,
and
le.

My broth er . being s ick is the cause of J1is absence.
A man makin g a fortune depends partly on him pursuing a proper course. John ' nttcmpting too much was
tlic cuns c of his failure . Hers going away was not observed. TH e ship sailing ivas delayed.
2. Wrllc •l 1ort se nte ncrg slmila.r lo th e nbovc, point out the verbnJ noun, nnd
tw. I)

EXERCISES.

or prepoHltion.

On s . A pronou ll before the vcrbn l noun, must be the possessive
pi·onoun , nlld no t th e possessive case; as, "Much <lcpentls on
your (not yours,) composing frequently."

th at 1/1 e 11 u1u1 before it is in the proper case.

LESSON LVI.

.
ln th e fullowlng E_xf' rds,.. , ~ln~n~ o1~~
Sf' Yl nt'\\•11. ba1c

ll to be so u sed .

• c '

Rur,E XVI . When tli e present participle, used as

EXI'LAN,\TIO:\'.- T /ie Sitm c as in 1/Jc Jlrec euing

lluic.

Ons. 1. TJ1c sc n,c will often be t.lte same, if both the article
nnrl t h c prcro, i1i 0n be omitted; ln1t the one should not be omitted
with ont th e otlic r : lh11s. In keepi ng his commantlments, &c. In

knnw

l •i\'C th e Rlil c for Ilic c HHlbC·

luc Huie, make tliern ""'.''n' g 11 nu ires application. The
.
fan yth 1n g we re,,
,
Lcarnrng<l o '. · -. co m me n d·<l bl e. By
· re adin g of goou
0
doin a our ut:v b
.
d
Of the mal;ing rnuny
•
l · 11n11rove
·
books tltc mrn c is
•
. •·
of our faculti es
.
nrl
Bv cxrrc 1,; 111 g
.
books there is no e .
. . .
to .eve rv on e his own
.
l T!tc g1v111g
•
, .
they
arc
im
prov
e1
.
<l'
f
iovels
is a w ast in g time.
. a sacre
. <l dutv.
Rea mg o r
is
J

Ing to

LESSON LVII .
· · l e, a1lll
' . U 1Z e wsl parl7.cip
. not the post
RuLE XV . .
t
1. ti. verbs JJAVEand .r.r-:; as,
t ense, should be used ajtcr tte) "I am clwscn.
·
. " ( t wro e.
'
.
" I ha vc wnll en
no
.1 I I in ihe u.< c of ,·er. us m

·~~:;~differ

pas1.rc~:11~~:~

be , . olotel on Y
· ·
EXPL.ANATION.-Tl>i; rnl e
in spelling. Before a
lhc pa :st l cuse arnl pa.s t part1 I
. th e uctivc vvi ce ; 1l 1c I .1t1cr,
i
<l btJ arc uu_"<i!iaries, the fur mer, 111
pk hav e a ll
.
, a l of
pa•>i\'e.
t .. · le shou1(l no t 11c
. ,
111s, c. '' , J
I . ·l

a n oun, lias an article before it, £t s!iould have the
prepos£tion of rifler it; as, In the keeping of bis
commanclmrnts th ere is a great reward .

i. .

. .

nrtki pial no!l n and !el! ho\\ ) uU
\l)1:r!i~c
and afte r ir , and
if tint n ght a.ccun.1l
'

w uc

us~cl

1 · Tl1 c past par
. • " li e l.Jrprn," for,, ". ic
. . 1c1p
roper, to sa\,
J Ous.
"st
tense.
tl111e
it is 1111 1'
, ,, fur " li e did;
ie
t HJ p...
' , vi. " lie ra11 ;" "he ' 1'o11 c,
1
'bega
n ;n li e run

~

r 1. "lie saw ." .
. , nn d n ot th e past,
i•
scc n,"10
··i )IC ncll\·c
.
0 .. '' Tli c pres,•11t ]'Uri Jc I
. . ·c nti11ucd suff.,111 w of
u,. -· ..
, , n •rb l o
to cxpr
c'
b lt"
ofte11 u sed. aller ti e
. lmiltli1w" not
111 . .
. ·1s ': Tl1 e li urn:;c is
o 1
\ '
an ac tio n , • '
, . G.
(; and App. ·
G r., Y<95
n. & li . '· 45 '
.. • 1~" 0A
'

oc,

c~s

" bc i n~

108
PllACTICAL LESSONS IN

ENGLISH
. l. liln lhe following

E~t erci'!e,

when the
nt-~ iavc, or tu:., cha ngo it iulo iho J>Us t ~n~ ~ . tP,nse stands afler tho n1t.x11fi.
change.
I a1 LiCIJlle, and give tho Rule for the

He sh ould have wrote.
tcr? I
1
Have you spoke to the mas.
am a mos t froze. She Jrn .
.
Jam es J1a s br·ol·e 11 •
y
's JUst began to read
·
'
is arm
I
·
slowly. He J111 · d .. · J· .
ou s 10uld have drove more
h
. , ian' loo 11n1ch, and ::.hould
ome . He m1g·lu lta,·e rod e if h e h d ·l
be took
2. Correc t the foUo win cr errors .
.
a C iose.

I

.

,,

ln ~lelVi?re sho11 seutcnccs, in each of w h ic11 shall b
d ~ a ~ t, or pnst· pcrfecr, indicative aclive ,._' . c .one of tho (ollowJng ve1~bs

ea~, ;:/~·

l'a r.se the se mcnccs, nnd ~pply ti1:17J{u~~~m, nm, sine, terite,fru-ze:
n t~ short sen tences with tlt e follow it w ' . .
turite, beg in, s/1a!.·e, Pirilo., spe<lh·, git-e. p , o ' ei bs I() tho passive voJce; vJz.
.'

arse l11cm, and apply the Rule.

LESSON LVIIL
R U LE XVIII. T!te infinitive mood .
VEnns, NO UNS or ADJEc ,
is governed b!J
'
. 1IVEs; as, I desire t 1
Ad .
cs1re to 1earn-desiro11s to 1

earn.

Vet-/1

o earn-

SPECIAL RULl,S .
being the sub ·e.

l ive · n' " 1 .
J ct uf another is p t · , .
.
., • ·',
o study is profil:tul e ,,
'
ll rn Inc tnfin 1•
II. 0 11e r crb " . , .
·
B
,,,uicr11 s an other as i t 0 b.
.
oys luyc lo play .
·
s ;cct ·i n th ~ infinit ive; u.~

JIJ. The iNjin ilive is u<crl t
sig n, of a 71rccrdi11g act· ',ts '~ t:>:press th e purpose, end, or de·
cd t u J•rn!J
.''
, .... ' S orn e wJ1 0 ca nt'·.... to sco.v'
,rr rcnu:iin"

'

109

IV . In compnrisons, th e infi1iitive is put aft er S•) - :1S 1 loo , or
than ; ns, " Be so good as lo r ead this ldter .''
V. To , the sig n of the infinitive, is not used 1\flrr l/1e i·crb s
bid, dare, ncc,1, rnake, ~cc, hear, fee l, a n d lc:tin the ac:lirc 1·oire,
nor after lcL in the p a ss·i ve.
A lso so metiai cs after perceive, behold, obserrc, liai:e, a tl<l /,110w.
Rl-: zi.t. Th e i11fiuiti,· 1 ~ , as the s ubjec t or lli e ot...1e ct of a verb, rnay h a vt· n ~ttii ­
jcct of iLS owu in the objective i u.s, For iu to lie is bu3u. I wished him tu r,o.

EXERCISES.

. ' aud give a reason for the change.

seen him an hour ao-o I d
James run a mile i11 t o '.
one what you told me.
.
en mmutes a d h d
be tired. Th e school b
' n
a not began to
have went or at least teg)un yesterday. He ought to
'
o 1avc wrote. Tl
·
you h ad not ou o-ht to d
.
lat is wron.,.,
<=>
one it.
o

. I. One

GRAMMAR .

EXERCISES .

l. Jn the follo wing se nlf'ncef:, tell whi c.h verb is in the infini tive mooJ, anLI w hn.1
governs iL SratP, wli c th r>r il i:; the subject or objrct of the s.:o"crnin(t verh. Insert or om it to, ll1 e sign c1f the infi ui ti Ye, and given r eason according 10 the Ruin.

Strive learn. Cease do e 1·i l. L C'aru do w ell. He
n eeds not to wr ite . I would hav e yo1 t to ta1;e care. He
dares no t to do a 1v icked actio n ; llOr wi ll he dare do it. - 1
h eard him to say so. He was heard say so. Let James
to do this. Bid him to speak to m e. Diel y ou sec him
to do th at? No, but I heard him to do it.
2. 'Vrite short se nte nces, in eac h of which shall be one verb in th o lnfln.lthe
moocl Parse lhem, and apply the Rule.

RuLE

LESSON LIX.
XIX . 1. W!ien doubt and f utu.rity are botlt

implied, tlte subjunctive mood is used; as, Thou g h
he fall, (i. e., at some future time,) he shall arise
again .
2 . Wilen doubt only, ancl not futuri ty, is implied,
the ind-icative is used; as, If he sp eaks (i. e., now,)
as he thinks, he may be safely trustc J .
EXPLANATION .- JJ01!bt nn1 l futurit y a rc bPth implleil wh en th~ nuxmary,
Bhal.l, or 11/wuld, rt:> ferrin g tu futu rn tiine, cun b e lns crl <; il ln~forc th e verb without
cha nging: th e meanin g : thus , u Though he fa ll, 11 nut! 11 Tho1 1gh he shotlld fall,"
m ean the same th ing. lt I ~ only In !he p rese nt te nse, a nd th ird person Fiingitlar
th at Uicro Is dtu1 ger uf error undt: r thi!t Rul e, e .1 cepl in th e verb to be.

10

11 l
ENGLI S H GRAMMAR .

no

PRA CTICAL LE SSONS IN

of the be~ t wrir ,.. r-;, aiul so me 1li3lin; 11ishcd gram marians.,
ofiP.n use 11.': s ut•juncth·n pr•'F.P nt \\ h•·11 11wrc .!u1 1\...t or continge ncy is expressed;
btJt m th i ~ o-vt·n tlt"" Y r\TP not n nil·•nn. \., )11\, , th~ \~ 1·1gl1t ('f a11t hori1 y is e,· itle:nUy in
!a-vor o f th e at-on! Rules. A ~Hl i:ral arlh~r"ncc to the m woulJ ha \'C this advunLag:e, t11a.t the mood used wuulJ be a cenaiu gwJe to tlie &e nse intended.

native is generally rcpcatctl; as, H e may rel<irn, but he wi1\ no t

H. F.~tAn K.-;\1any

Sun -Tluu:. -Lcst a11d tl1at " nnc.c cd to "command , require the
s11bj1t11 clfr e mood; as , Love not •lccp , lest thou cpme to poVlll'ty.
T ake heed that t hou speak not to J aco li, e ith er good or bad.
Ou s. The suhjunctivc 111 00'1, i11 tl 1c past t ense, express~s
a suppos iti on wi th respect to so mething present, but im plies u deni al of th e thing supp osed ; a s . ff I were a nightingale I wou ld
s in g; implying, I a 1n not.

remain
.
OBS. 2 . Th e r ch ti v•c af"t cr !.h1£1l is 11sually in the ohj!·ctive case;
as, "Alfred, than tdtom," &c.
Ons. 3 . After verbs of do ubt ing , f earin g, deny ing, I It "1 shou\J.
be u sed, and not les t, lJ11t, &ut th1£ t ; ns, Th ey k"recl that (not

_ If there be a rule it should be C(bserved. Thou$ h he
be ri ch he is not happy. If th e mail arr i ves to-in oirow
we shall have let ters. If he s tudi es d ilige ntl y \Vhen he
goes to school he will improv e. If he is but discre et
wh e n h e goes a broad h e will gain fri ends. If he have
mone'y h e must ha ve earn e d i t.

LESSON LX.
R uLE

XX . 1. Conjunctions conn ect wonls or sen-

te!lces.

2. Conjunctions couple the same mooas and t enses
• of v erbs, and cases of nouns and pronouns; as, Do
good, aml seek pe<ice. He and I are well.

•
Ous. 4. In the comp ound tenses, verbs couplcJ i11 the same
te nse hav e the auxiliary cx pr es:.;cd with th e first a1HI unJ erotoc•<l
to tl1 e rest; as, John can rciu l, w r ite, awl s pell. \Vhcn clill"ercnt
ten ses are coupl ed, the au~ i l i"ry must a lway s he expressed; as
He lw. s come,

\J •Jl

he wi.11. not stay.

L\l.'.HCI SES
l. ln <he follo wing. pui l\t out 1l"' rnnnr. ·Je o! \l·rk, . lt !hr]

no111lnali\·c.

In respect of case, rrrnrs occur chlcily In y1e use of pronOuus.

O ns . I. ' Vhcn conjunctions con nect <liffercnt moods nnd tenses,
or whe n a contrast is statecl with bu t, not, though, &c. , thenomi·

:.,,,c tl1 e same nomi-

nativ e. pul the m ill tile same '°'" "I ·" "I "'" '"· If <!<'·Y '"'"'he in 1\ilfcrent m00<l•
or 1rn>c•, repeat th e ,.nminati\ r; aud if tloal i• a nou ,., repeal it hy Hs prnnoun.
I'oinl oul th e connccced

nr

11 0 1111 •

!"°'"""'""•ttnd mil thc n1 i" ll<P '""""case.

He reads and \note w ell. If he say it and doc s it
am content. If he b e a l home, and is well, g ive him
th e let ter. My fath e r h as r ead the b oo1;, and will re
turn it to-morrow . Jam es and me ran all the way . That
is a small matte r b etwee n you al1tl L Him nntl I are
great friends, a nd so ur e l\1a ry anrl n1r. 1'\o\Jotly kno\vs

that but her and m e.
2. Wril e short sentence•, in whi r.h two "'!Hore w· rl<J arc .-.0n ncctcJ in tho "am o
m ood nncl tense, nnJ ""'"'"
Oa s. 4. l'ut U1c verb> in the present-in
the pnst. th e preoent-1..:rfect, &;c. Express the sam e ideas wi lh the verb• io thu

pa1~ic11lady

pa:ssive
voice.
3. Wrile
senJences

containiu~

i..."

two or m ore yc rh• in <l<ff,·ren l rnoo1ls nn<I tcnsr:s,
paying attenlion U> Ou s. t . ; othe rs,
I"-'" " M mc.r<' " ''"'" <•r pronouit•

contaiuin~

C'lnnccted in the sa m e c<.t.'>e.

EX PLA NATION.-Th e reason of thi s Rule is, that words tlms coupled are ror
the morit part ln tlu~ s:.nne const m ctiu n; th at is, nouns connected must be ln tho
sam e cas'' , becunsc they arc no:n1nativca to the snmo ver b, or !{Ovcrned by tho
same noun , vnh 1 or pn•posil ion; and verbs thus coupled hnve usnnl1 y th e samo

,':.·

le st, ) he would cl ic .

EXERCISES.
Jr1 the foll owing: s~nlc n ccf:, state wl1c1hc r 1l1c verb following "if" or " though "
should I.Jc in the f-in hjun cf i\·c or in dicative m0ocl 1 and why i nnc.l make Ute nee~
sary co rrection.

:r,;.i:

·,,,,

LESSON LXI.
XXL Some conjunctions and adv erbs
their corr esponding connectives ; thus,
Ru LE

hare

.t

-

112
P RACTI<.:AL LESSONS IN

.1.Vcitli~r rcqnircs nor nflc r it ; ns , N~ilhPr h~ nor hit> brother was Jn.
Thoug h, - -- !Jt l; a::i, 'l'houg-h he was rl c h yet for our
lJ'J1clher1
,fi' i t/UJr,

-

-

nr;

- - nr;

1

sake~, &.c.

Wh c1li cr he go or stay.
l \\'ill ciLh cr wrir c or se nd.

A•,

--

as ;

( expressing- 1,·. qualily) L'rlin e i s HH

-

s(J ;

( expres.-;i11g eriuali1y) As rh e stars,ooshullthy 11eedbe.,
(wi1l1 u n egati \'C expressing Inequality) He Janoteo
wi se as his broUrnr.

-

So,

- - as ;

So,

- - tluit;

tLB yours,

~onsequence)

(e,'<p n:-s:sing
I nm so weak that 1 cannot
walk .
/,,,, ulso ; i\'ut only hi 1::1 p rop t!rly but aloo J-iis life wns in c.langer.
1
lh e11 ;
(in rca.wnfng) If h e can do il, then he wiU do 1L

1

Nut 01aly - if,
- -

No ·r n. As a1Jd
vtrbs.

good

90

in •Ile a1Jt eccdc nt mem ber of a comparison, are properly ad-

EX PLA l\' A T ION.- TJ.is Huie means I hat when any of th o above correspond·
Ing te rms stands in one m ember ofa senten ce, tho othertenn should otwHI in the
otl1er member. .'-ffer ''thoug h," "yet" i.s somelimeswiderstood.

EXERCISES.
I. Point out tlJC co1Tcsponding terms in th e following senl enccs, and make tho

second correspondent. to tl1 e first, or tlie first to the seconi1, •• tl10 • euso rcr111lrea.
Supply the correspondent te rm wh ere improperly omJtled.

H e will not do it h imse lf, nor let another do it for him.
T h ou gh he sl ay me so will I trust in him. That is so
far as I am abl e to go. This book is equally good as
.that on e. N othing is so bad as it canno t be worse. Ho
was not only diligent, hut s uc cessful in J1is studies. It
is neith er cold or h ot.
2. Write correc t •cnt encc", each of whi ch shall con tain one pair of tho nho vo
corrospon<lJng terms, nntJ state what Uiey e.x;preE1s.

th ~ pre.
n rrd li: rrri :

r~~r lh•~

Rule may, be
corn1•:1rat in· il •· ):r •·P
co rr·'~l"'fl dt'nt fr nln s .' rc1;1 tti r ri ·r;•n\ w ill s11 fli t" F• 1r tt1 0
T hc,..arn c i: xpan <t I '
~- 1
I
duci-r,R.
.
U u icflati v(' d t:J; fC(·, St' •-': "· ' •
ILillllti te i11 tl1e U:iC of the COUJlJMallv c lUI H l

otl~-lha11:

An d tl1 c

c-

EXERCI SES.
1. Jn the following

~cntcnc cs,

.

\•111n t ou

t

th~

c o rnpa raliw: dP$.1_ T('", o r oth e r r nll"" S., I
th e ot•-u-~ r a1· cordi n~ ((•t he !lu te..

. '
b
Tb ere were mo re c J :1 r·n es ·wr it es Lett er as
o..
I
l\•·o
"<l · h'm cn rracrc <l in th a t b usin ess. N o rn on: ; u t •
s 1 cs i
. Ju n .(...rer in sun1 ..
I.:::. " o me The d ays a1e
can play at t 11s g a
·.
.
. Has Jam es no oth er
ti y are m wmte r.
.
b ·a
m er es1 cs ie
. .
I
ml uct tha t I d i<l not ex book but this ? This _is sue 1 c~
.
vVh.ir.h of all
Peet. John is the wisest of t 1e two.
.
?
th ese books is the pretti er . . I II ontai n a wur<l in tl 1e comp1tm·
l o f wl 11c h s 11' c
l

l tcnno and""'"'' Il ic <me ""rro'"P""' lo
por1< en
·•
I J

2. \\·ri te sho11. se ntences, cac i
I b tl c proper corregponUcnt term.
tlvc d egree, or th e word oth er o r 81icl• follow ct y l

LESSON LXIII.
·
XXIII Double comparatives
an d sup
., crla,
R uLE. - .
·
1
t t say
. Thus we oug it no o
.'

lives arc irnprop er '
" b t " bett er " " best."
b tt . " " m ost best ;
u'
'
(( more C Cl l •
'
.. r rid • n :e, Is tho p roI
•r lik,•ly to or. cur um 1
11
1"XPLA N ATI 0~. -1 hf)

fL•I·,;~ o f.,.,,,.,

I
m o• ··

ndj:·rli~es "r:'."' ~
on y

i.v prefixln~ more

P JT; _
l
J compnrcd l•Y uddir1 g- r. 1· a.nJ (Jt (: or
C<Hll j)Hrcd
anc!
11dJCcll\'CS
{ o fc o mp,1ri; .,;, •huulli be used.
Th e lluJ e m eans !hut only on e mcl •O<
.
' fi ation
are ndjectivcs whose s1g n1 tc

tJ,.. arlding of

LESSON LXII.

ded n.s u cnnt i1111arion o f

EXPLAN ATIO~. --Tbis

Ct.!J ing nnc .

A s,

11'.l

ENGLISH GR,\MMAR.

arnl 11108 / IO

er arid'"''"

a'~"'

Ruu : XXII. T!i e cornparat£ve degree and tke pro-

Oos . It is improper to comp . . t'
an•l of cours e not of
. f .
. or d1m1nu wn ,
4
docs no_t adm 1~,
o su
rn~;c"~jectives
see LE ssoN XI. , Ous.
compunson.
r or
e' a

noun oth er r equir e th an after tlwm, •Lnd such requires
as; as, Greater tlwn I; No other titan he; Such as
do wel l.

.
a d 'ecth•c s in th e compara livi• or s 11 p~ d f\t!Ye d e·
J. Jn th e fo llow ing\ pomt nut !he
J
r cmovin,,. one o f t.l1e fonnJJ o f com·
gree. If tloubl e, correc t lh c senten ce by
c

S un. R uu: . -W hcn two obj ects are compared, the comparaifoe
i8 gen erall y used; but when more than two, the superlative; as,
Jam es is oltl cr t!iun Jo lin

llfa ry ii th e wi sest of them nil.

EXERCISES .

parison.
H o\v n1uch
J
· uch m ore ta II er th ·1n
' fi enrv.
.
is it
m is to ge t w1.s d om t h an go Id. Subtract the
morea mes
better
lesse r number from tl1c g reater. H e Leg an to g row

10"

114
PRACTICAL J,ESSONS IN
1rnr. r. 1s 11

"·or.~<'r

and worser. T h omas was the most liveliel3 t man
m·ost s traitest .sect of our
in tllP. com pa ny . Afte r
r el ig ion. \Yhat is more s wee ter than hon ey, or moro
s tronge r thnn n lion ?

t h~

~.

IV1·it e •<': 11 1cnccs c: u·h co nta ining an adjec tive or a.iverb in tho comp:uiu,...,
e r Sll)'erht:vc rlc;;rec, and am id th e error poi11ted out In thc llulo and •.qllanatlOfl.

L E S SO N LXJV.

2 . .lldverbs sh ould not be used as adjectives; thus,
"Use a li ttle wine fo r thine often infirmities," should
be, " for thy .frequent infirmi tics." .

fi1~1, that when a verb, adjcctlve, or114

vnh, is lo ' '" inod ilied by any wo1·rJ, 1h1.r "'""" niu • t be an adverb, and not o.n IUJ.
jectil'c, or oth er part o f speech ; awl sccm ,d ly ll1 a1 an adjectfoc, a nd nol lllJ ed.
1
t'erb, 1s used wi/11• 1l Qu ns lo e xp rcs;; n prnpe rry or q >il\)ity belonging to them.
;d wuys refers lo pla ce; u:he11, a nd then, to lim e.

Pr'h~re

~hou)d

On s . 1. T1'h.er e
not be used for in w!tich, except when
place is referred to; ns, the
in wl1 icl1 I Jen him, »Ill
10/i crc I left l1 im; becuusc "situation" docs not h e.re r efer to pince.
So, is often used. cJliptically for nn adjective, n noun, or a who. e
1
sen
tencc; as , Th ey arc ricli, we arc not so. .He is a good 1eholar. ·
and I told you so.

situ~ tion

Oo s. 2. On l y , solel y, cliiej!y, mer ely, too, also, and perhaps a
few others, a re sometimes joined to substantives; ns, Not only
the men, but the wom en also were present.

•

EXERCISES.
I. J>,,int ont tile m od i(ying wo rd• in th e following ecmcnces. If

ma.k c U1 cru so, a111..J give the Hu ie.

1•

in, .

~h

lUint ' 'Ul I l a: Hrh<·d1 ir11pro p<'rl y LI SCl 1.
l•r te rm and
' ' the llul c.

Jl• <>Jl~

Rhcv-; why it is sn ;
.

Com e th e soonest day possi8
Tli inc ofte n rn fi rmi lle . .
o wd 1. T he then
t' n e will Le 1a te en "
1
hi e. Th e soo n es t Jt .
Th e c01 1diti on ,,·here
l t he rn easu rl>.
mini stry opposel
. J
H e wa s lr ere las t ye ar, s ince
found him was tru l; ba .·
I J , , not see n him.
wh en HI \ e
.
"hwb (" ec L ES SOI'
.
f wld ch Ishal•l !h
..:on
ta m n11,
the
·~ 'Vritc
se n tence!:!, c;:uJ 1 o .
•H it i!-1 pl1\('N! n~ direc ted In
X~X
f..) m ~hn1t
nd ifyin g a " ':rb or ot..ljccu vc, nn1 Hf' 1,. .
cha u;c i t fo r th e

• ..

,

t

RULE xxrv. 1. .!l.dverbs modify verbs, adjectiv es,
and otltcr ad·v erbs.

E Xl'C.Ai>ATIO N.- TJiis llul c m ea ns,

•

2 ln the f.Jllu"

JI G

(;HA~ l nJAll.

not

adveiit.,

Com e '} nick. J ames does that very good. That was
done excelle nt. Time m oves rapid. Apparent slo\v' ·
p eople accomp lish mu c h if sufficient steady. You can
reaJ exce lle nt well. It is real cold .

ne xt ltul c

(lll<l

'

Explana.11011.

LESSON LXV.
. X X V .IJJvcrb s ar e Jf".o' . t,i1c most.1wrt plac ed
R uLE ..1 . .1 . ·
,.rt er a ve1·lJ :rn the nmpl e f orm,
bcf ul'e adj ech ces' 11.J' • • • : t/. e com71oun d form;
;. fi . t auxilu11 Y m i
and aft er t t.e i1 s
.
b l ves well, a nd is much

as, I ~1Je is very a tt enti ve ,
estee1n cd.

e ia

I . . . "'a rre nc r a l Ro lr, to 'tTh ic h
Y "" "'
b

EXPLANA'l'l O N'. - T hi:; is to ~H~ co rul e for the P\')isi li on of the rtd \'t rb cn n e
U1 e r<· nro m any excop1inns. Jnrkcd no" Til e ucst di rc n iu n for th e use o f ~I•
gi v..,; wl1i c l1 is not liablr: to
requi res, l»vlng tluQ r egard to io
ll nl e ;R10 place tile 1u h·,.rb 11
§'
]
h arm ony of the ~ c nt c u cc. {:-Sec G ., 74 .
nsidc rc d

01 1

··xeq:11 ~u"~nse

:'' "'.~

th~

EXERCISES.
.,
rov!tle<l
•
. t·~' ce t.l1 e adv e rb a.s lh e Rule <lin :cts, P
I lhe follow ing !ien! e oces:p
J. n
]
1 I ex pressed.
s ense will ther eby be c car Y
.. .
I
He is agreeable n •

A man indus tri ous emrn ent y. . I converses, and
I ·
charmrn rr Y
'vays. He swe et y s rn gs , n all oc,,c asions. He unafprud e ntl y co ncln cts l11m selff oil I . s rnntend ed fo r th e
I
I
H e man u Y ia
.
.
. .t Time will wall n e Ye r .
fcct ed y spo cc.
l' 'nl v will obtam 1 •
.
d
pnze,an cera1 .
.
H
·11 bealwavstrus ty.
I
'
t <lone 1 t.
e w1
He could la ve no
I J rcoruing to the Hu ie, b u!

rb rn
p ly
neereqauire it to be Ill
. a tfLly;e r c.nt
2. The following fif:ntcntcEJ Iw.." C tl1 e ad \·e··u
lhc Mense and ha rmony o f th e se nten ce e\I t:
position .

(

: j

>'l"if

116

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

Men contend frequent !_\' for trifles. I only 11 saw tbiot ·
perso ns. Of the books I sen t him li e only read ono.
.Ta mes can very well r ea d. Yo u should slowly wtito
He might plainly have told him . He not only aw
pleased, bnt g rea t} y pl eased.

ho: ·~

3. Wri to' " number of oilort sen1 e nces , eac h of wh ic h oh&ll contnln one
•tl vcrlis correctly !Jlaccd. [See l.ist, LES S ON XXXl.j

OI"~

4. W11 1e •hon sente nces, cac./'1 of whi ch • 1>111/ contain one of tho followtn;r ad·
ve rbs, viz., 1mly, merely, solely, chit'Jl,y, jirst, at /eWJt, ond tell the Wt>rd wh.lcb
Place the adverbs in "" ma11y uiflorc nt JlO•ition• In each oenionce Olll'Qll
1
r,an so as to rnak c sense, and mark r/i c c ha11uc i i f 111eanft1;_{.

~·

m od ify.

LESSON LXVII.
RULE~XXVII.
.

,-r.

used be_; ore narnes0

'J
'
. Ll n. a.• ll e iccr1110Spain;
·b f otio1 1 lo express c1est ma o i '
aflc r a vr•i
m
~
,. tNm l home y~stcrday.
11
but it is om i11 cJ bc f.irc /Jenne' a. , ",.,.;,,e lu111/: '"• I 1rn" al Rocheste r..
Al
- is used an cr the Yerlis to bt!, touch, a
'
. . . as l live in Alhany, Ill
2.
.
. tr·Ies an d large c1u es '
'
be fo re llltnw.~ o f co un
3 Jn- is m~cd
l. To- iR

LESSON LXVI.
RuJ,E xxvr. Two n egatives in the same sentence
are improper, unless we mean to a.ff trm; tl1us, ·" ~
cannot by no means allow it," should be," I cannot
by any means allow it. " Or, "I can..oy no mearui
allow it."
EXPLANATION.-The r eason of this R11 lc I•, that one ncgatlvo dcotroya the
oth er, SO that the two arc OfJ Uf valcnt lo un nflirm11t1\'0. A nC!«Ulvo In onon malle
th o •Yll<tblcN </is, i'1i., """ un, &: c., prefi xed to " word. And when thl• ·U.
'"" c"''"• a11n11,,,,. ncgalh·e is •omcllmes llBeJ/ lo ex1ircss dhninll he<f k.lnd o( of
finn alinn; ""• " Il e was not unk ind." An a flirmotlon modo by two ulotloct
tfre term s is hars h, and sh ould be nvnided. Negative tcrmo nro ouch as No, not
11tither, nor, nevr.r, \\::c. [See Gr.,§ 75.J

~y

~

O~Q'3

UF;Cd

the State of Ne w-York .
11
toWO<.i an il for p1g1 dti es ; as, ne is
At- is u i-:cd bP forc s mi; lf! ho11Sf'Q1 v1 agr s,
I \~e ek at Jl t)mc.
at h om e ' ll e resided at G J t.:tnu Gn:t·n ' a
.}YB 'Ile hvcs m S tnte 8 treet;
o f anoih c t 'a res1dcnco • .ea '
Ono inlw.btta lll ~1 •caking:
at. No __ State Street.
or if the wor1 nmnber be U8cd, r
specifi c Jtulc!i under it,
• .
I Rul e includ es JOur
.
EXPLANAT
ION.-flus
g:
n
e.ra
"'-· ri Jlul e la thn. t wnkh ~hould bc g1,·cn.
k d l 2 3 4 an<I i11npplytn ~ 1t,tli es pci.:11c
mal e
' ' ' '. _ '
·
s und e rstood.
Til e pr e pos ition ts sometime
.
b 'cctive after them , but

metunes huve un o J
.
. .
Ons. InterJCCt1on s so
d by an acti,·e trnns1they n ev er govern i.t.. It is alwuys govcrne
1 ·
Whut has
ti\'C verb, or prepos1 twn und e r8tood; as, Ah me. I. e.,
happe n ed to me ?

EXERCISES.
r. ln th,, following ti1 entenCP.S, .change the Ilre~ Position
~
used, for

EXERCISES.
I. Point <lilt the two negalives in th e fullowlng sentences.
wrong; correc t !h em nn<l give the JluJe.

·
must be
Jlppropr'iat e preposi·t ions
ol" z1laces . thus,

Shew wl1y they aro

I cannot eat no more. He is not ubl o to wnlk no forth e r. IV e cannot do that in no wo y. He will never be
no ta lle r. N e ver do noth ing of the kind. Time and
tide will not w·ait fo r no ma n. No mun ne ver diJ that.
• N on. 1'!.e i1np ro p c-r posi1ion of !he n<h·e rh only, o ften occ11.<lon• amblguir:y,
A11 cJ nu w ord is m<J rc frcq1 1eur/y plnced imprope rly.

lhat which the

rc~ulres, anu g"c ·
b . to Boston ?
h
Have you ee n
I have been to o~e.
l ll, Jiv ed atNe~They live in Union V1lluEge ; {or;e::d ]~:~ just reiurned
Y l
h
H has been at ' ng an '
or(.
e
F
n our way to ome.
to home. We touch ed on , ranee o
·a d f, r
He lives to Wa shi ngton , at B . Stree t '1 but res1 c 0 . N 50 Broadway, N e w-Y o re
llulu

· . lhe s ,Jec1fic llulc.

merly 111 o.
'
. 1· I · II con1·un th e name of som e city
2. \Vritc s hort se1ue11c<'s, r ac h of wh 1c J sb1.- ~f m ol:on, Cir i..iy the \' Crb lie , lit-e,
villa!!e cou111ry' o r sr;.Lt e, p rn· l" d•"rl h ~ _a vc r
ilw~J, ~c. 1 and !! tf' a1•1'ff• t111i!e-. po· pus1t101 t.

1' :-IGLI S JI

118

PJlACT!CAL L ESSONS

IN

11 \)

Gl\AMMAR .

EXEllCISES.
~ r tk f r,~<jt1ired by tho

1. Change the }Wf'po ~ilio n 1 i 11 ilie fullowi u ~ sen1e nc e!$, o

LE S S 0 N L XV II I.
Ru LE XXVIII. Certain words and plirases rnust
be followed liy
. \ CC \lSC

appropriate prepositions; such ns,

of.

A otp til of

A da pr eU to.

Ask or i11 rp1ir.'! qfa penmnforwliat we
w if'! ll

w sce,-ofter

what wo wiRl 1 ro

hea r of.
B c.lie vc ill, somclimcs on.

BNray lo a pcrso n,-intoany thing else.
Call on a jlf.'r.mn 1- nl a house.
Change for.

Compa re TDil!t. , in respec t of qualily,/ 01 for !he sake o f illustrati on.
Contide r:n.
Con formahlc, cflnsonant to.
Conversant u; i fh mcn,- in things.
C()py f1·om lilc, nalure,-<ifter a pan•n l.
Of•JJ1.: 111J,.11t upon.

Di e of Ll iscase,-by an inst rum ent or
violr11r.c.

Di ffe rfroru .
Dlffti'tiiry fo.
Uirninishfrom1-<limin11tion of.
U isa ppoint~<I (tt what we havc,-of
what we expect.
Diaco11rn!!cfrvm.
Dis CQumgt: m c nt lo.

F 11miliar to, wit1': A thing IA fo.mJllnr I•
us i we are familiar wit1' It.
Free frnm.
Glad of, so 1nelhing gained byoursclvew,at, somet lt ing lh at befals ano01cr.
Independent of or on.
Indu lge w1:1h what ls not habHual,-fll
what is habitual
Insist upon
Made of.
Marry to.
N eed qf.
0 bservntl on of.
Prcj1 1Jicc ag ainst.
Prevall (to penmadc) uiil!t, on, u1xm,(to overco me,) over, agaiml.
I 1 rofit by.
I 1 rntecl (others,) from,---".ou.rsclve1,)aga frzst.
Pfo vid e 1oilh

Utth :.

H e \\'a S

R ~ duce

(lo tm\J(lue) tmder,-in o01cr ea.·
ses, to; as, to powder.
Ilci;anl to.
Ri ck of.

Swerve.fr011i.
Taste (1nearnng cupacil!J or inclinati(}1))

Engaged in a work,-f ur a lime.
E qual to, 1.oith.
Exception f rom,-so mcli mcs to.

for,-(in eaning actual enjoyment) of.
Tax UJith, (c. g., a crimc,)-.for U1e atat.o..
Valu t} upon or 011.
Expert i>'-t (be fore a n o11n 1)-at 1(heforn Worthy ef,-oomctlmee 010 of Is underan active partic ipl e. )
stood.
EXPLANATION. -AF.i words conn ected by prepositioruJ nre ditrcrcnUyreJated,
cil. rr. must bo taken to employ tho preposition which best cxpreasee the relation
inr emlccl . The Hen se and lhe practice of correct \\'Titers
here be our beat
(;ll id e. Th e above ai-e only a few examples out of many.

,,.m

Oas. The same preposition thnt follows th e verb or adjccti'!lc,
us ually follows the noun derived from it, nnd vice ver.•a;. as,.
Confide in.,-confi<lcnt i11,-confidcnce in.

l f

J

" "11!·1 ro'ibc:n•
'
; ' an<l acq11ittcL
.

rorn lie

.

char e. I have Leen c::dling upon an u!.,J fric1.1LI. - C;'.l.l
g
fl'
I l1fl c r with y o u in thac m.tttcl.
'
.
.
. ·l
111 the post-o le e .
Tuhn <li c<l by consumption, Henry tl1e<l of the s 11,11< '
'an d Robert is sick wah
. t lle pun
·
cl'ice.
, Tn·J to pro fit from
Yo u have a tas te of puctry. C011 1·c .1rsant
Compare this piece to th:it, an_u se c
.
i 11 men nnd t h rngs.
.
I could never bcur the ta s te for to which is th e best.
l r:ilc.
.. i~
., an
"111~
cx~cption a era in s t the ge n e ra
bacco.
,
.. .
"'
. ,_

experience .

1

, I f which shall con lain on"' or uh1re of the
" \Vrit c 8 hort sc11tc nccs , f"aC 1 0
in ~li e prece Uing table , fuUow cU by tlic appropriate pn•pot>lU•>O.

.i

"fi' '"'

LESSON LXIX.
ll uu : XXIX. Jn th e use of verbs, and u·ords that
·.

W

orfof.

.. l

a c cu ~C L

,1~

.

I

J!O'lll,

!!_

r [.'

r

1.m ..

rd11/i:

fo

POC IL

ti

(> , /,CJ')

ti/ r_ on,1er
\

\

(' r
'./

. -. ,

I
/· · .. , rf·;is "l\i;i\ekn o ,1· 11 111 1 1\H~t.
lune 11u1st Jr o i;;rl? < • · '
•
_ . " ·s"
· -·"
t '·l l·nuw l1llll th« ~ 1 · lil;tll) ) ' ' " "
manyyl' :-i:s, no,
'
'" ""' ·i-<11 .. :tics1
.

,- ' l'l.A. 7'.: ,\T\O:S. - T!. is Il• 1h.'. i ~ :!:·n··i·;,! , n11J _lwr r. ;• l~i-~!I'"
LX
.
. . , ·t-1 ni ·\ \' be n ot i<'•·d 11 1 1h1s pla11·.
Tl w 1. .i1 .. \i..rn~ p::nt II'"
..
. . ~
. . , .,. -·d in th<·
·1·1 t ·I · .. his nlway~ l nw,1s c.xp1t~ - t'

~1rn! c.

(

pre se nt tcn ~ i~··
l t the ·1n·s 1.;nt

l.
10 " i i t
'
·
2. That wh ich is pa s t, hut "~it.~wed as cunt1nucl. u

l

-

'

is expressed in th e prcsent- pcrlec~e11""·
.
can be
3 VPrhs h av in:? the auxiliaries shall, w 1ll , may ) can,,.~' .

. ~·
,.

. '

.
..
. 1
I .. ' -h~ in the pres'?nt on;y' l 11o~e
associat('cl in a sentence \Vlt l ot I! l 'e.1 -..
·.
.
l l ·1 l i with verbs in the pa'l.
with mig ht, could1 w o u ', s 1011 r '
•
- ~111 1nr·trV with,
. - C "ti\·c expresses what is t:olt' 1 ~ .
4. The present u1 1111
.
.
1 ·-. erfec t·inor suh•cquent to, the tim e of the i;overn1ng vnh: .\
7.'\ .
.
finitive expresses what is antecedent to it. [Si '- (, r., >
)

it.:)

EXERCISES .
.

l. ln 1lie fvllowing se nt ences po111 t uut
- tcnoo

I
t

. r h whi ch b \\Tl •HK in retql\~<'t

ie \ c .

Put it ln the prop e r tent:c , and lell wliy

iL lfi

.

;J

vr

~o Lh angr. .

i

.. i

120

It was said that fever always produced' thirst; that
heat always expanJ ed m etals; and that tru th wir~ im•
mutable. He is now absent a week. I have o 'I)
abroad las t year. If he would lend me that book I will
be obliged to him, He can do it if he would . I intend·
• ed to have written; but I still .hoped he would htrv
come. Rome is said to be built seven hundred yen.rs
before the Christian era. N era is said to persecute the
Christians. He has been gone long before I knew it,
2. \ Vrir e sho rt sentences, nnd express in each,&0melhjngwhieh )'OU hopcllJ~
td, desfred, intended (O dv yesterday, before yeeterdny,-whieh J'OU ~ /lllf-1
&c. lo do to-day, to· morrow. Also what tK>me one did yceterda.y,~for y - .
1fay,-always does,-does now,-hus ju.st done now,-wlU do to-monow,-beDitO
to-morrow nigl1l.

Ru LE XXX. Wlien a m ember of a sentence refer1
to two different clauses, it slwuld be equally applicable to both; as, He has not been, and cannot be, cen•
sured for such conduct.
oentencell are corniet according to

this ltuln, join lhc m f!mbc r of th o ee utc nce common lo Ulc fwo cla.WJet, to

each

of them RCpn.rat ely, so as to mn.k o two scnte ncc6. H both oft.h e ICnlt~ce &re
f{l"lUlllWlt icaJly correct, nnd express Lhe sense intc ncl cd 1 tho sentence lJI right-tr
not, It Is wrong, and mm1t be coi-recLcd. Thus, fo r example, '' JJo bu not, and
he cannot, be censured," is wrong, because if you ndd the member "be ~
ed.," ro the first c lrt.u1;e 1 it w ill make "llo ho.s not ba Cd'Mf4.red," whlcb It .l.noor.
rect, nccor<ling to Ru1.& XVII. This m·ust be correcteJ by in.scrting "bcen° after
' 'has not,'' so ns to re:ul "J[e ha.~ not been, and he c.annol be, ccuautecL" The
di ffe rent clauses shou ld IJo correctly mark ed by punctuo.tion.
·
Th is m lc is often violated In senLenccs in which there are two eomJ>lU'{80n.I of
ft.diffcr r nt nature and gove rnm ent. 1'hus, "Ile was more beloved, btUootWO
mu c h udm ircd M Cinthia." He re, "as Ci11t!tio,11 is applicable to tho -c1.au1e "•
rrmch ru/m irecl,' 1 but cannot be conn ected wi th umore bel.011ed." In such &entcnC'.CR a..'1 tld s 1 1l1 c proper way is to complete th e construc.tJon of tho lret mo o1beT~
and lea \'C 1l1al of the scc(ln1 l und erstood i a.ff, "Ile wtt.B more beloved than Clntbio,
but no t ~o muc h rulmirc d 11 (as Cintltio.)
A proper choice nf wnrd ::i, aml a PersplCl lOUN arrangement, esbould be carera.n,.
ta.HC:l<l ~· 1

to.

EXERCISES.
l\ t· ko trial of ·the folJqwing se n tenct::!i, n~ direc ted lrt the E xplt\Hl:\tlon. If lhlo
,\
I
f tl e 8cntcnc-o b 11 o t " rtHr.nrn.t .
I
_, · l tl; e -8ccvr~d c ltt. U:\C.
fir8t clause jul11cd w ith the c-1 m111 o n m e 111 >t~ r o
cidl ~' currcct, poin t ou L t ho erro r u ntl corre ct it. V o i.o \\Ill

lle always has, and he alw:lys will be, pun.ctual. They
might, and probalJly ~vc re, good .. Jame~ is taller, hut
11ol SO strung, as his uruther.
Ilts uook IS not SO gooJ ,
t lwugh large r, than I expected . This house is larger,
hut not so convenient, as that one. I C\'.C r ht~v c, a1~',1. ~
'll ..
,
"Ile depends ' and confides
111 1111;, is
t.:VCI" \V J , '::; iJ,y b 0 •
.
,,
.
"II e c· onfitdes and depends upon me.
j11 st as incorrect as,

LEiSSON LXXI.
" XXXI. .fl substantive whose case depends on

RULL

LESSON LXX .

EXPLANATIOK- !n ord er to sec whether

121

~NGLIBH GRA.Ml>UR .

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

.

.

.

no ot!ter word, is pitl in 't!te nominative.
under the four following

Tl.
us occurs

SPECIAL RULES.

whose ca•e de 1•erids
Ru1.E 1. .11 wbstan t -ive with a particiyle,
as, " 1-le be·
is
in
the
nomina
tive
absolute;
,.ut
0 11. no oti t Cr Word , · 1
in ,. 0 nc, 011 \y two rc1nain."
· .
. •.
_
~lg " /1 7;rrson. or thing addressed , w1 t hout a verb 01 go., e~n
ULE - · •
. d
d t n• " I n·m 1L1n
ing ·won/ i." pu.t in the nominali·vc 11l r.p.e n en ; , '
'
. '
t-u
1 l y " ' " P lat o lhoct reaso11rsl w ell."

d ettr sir, yours
clamat·ion is
,
'
.
Hm.E 3 . .11 subst ant·ive, miconnect.ed rn mere o;
'
. . ' d t·
« QthC lLl/leS !
ut i7t the nonnnaltve 111cl ep e1l ell ' '' 9 •
n;
t.
P
.. before an a'1li rma '°"'
H u LE 4 .11. subs l an ti<'e usecl b y p l conasm 'J
b 7
·
d t
Thc bo11 oh 'whercwll.8 c.
u p ut in th enominative indepen en ; as,
"
·

I'

!

.\i \
I

ii

I

1
I

iI
'!
.,'

EXEHC ISES .
111 the followlng sentcnccS, l)Qin t out the pronouns us.e1.1 absolut dy~ n~d ~i e par·
flci plca join ed with th em . Jf in the wrong case, correc t 11icrn by the J. ulu.

Th e boys all ran away, him and me excepted. · ~e
stay in g behind, the rest went forward . Them berng
now come, we may proceed .
"Thee , only thee , direc tin g all our way. "
11

•

'·

122

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

ENGLl~H

RuLE XXXII. Tile article A or .AN is yut before
common nouns in the singular number, when used indefinitely: THE is put before commcm nouns either
singular or plural, when used d<ftnitely .

123

GRAMMAR.

The black and white man came to g e th ., r. Srni t li, the
tanner an<l currier, e nt erecl into purlllership. Smith, the
tanner anJ th e curr ier, is a man of a g re at i11d11 stry.
2. \ \'rite 13hort sentcnc~~, f"nd 1 o f which tihi\JI coui;_.iin the H.rtlclc a., or a-n, or l lic.

Others, whlch t1hall cuntai r1 nouns witlioul an article.

EXPLAN ATION.-lt ls Impossible to give n precl"6 Rulo for the use of the
R.rtide in c..-c ry case. The best ge neral Rule is to observe wh"t tbe eenso requtre..
The following usages mu.y be noticed. Fo r others aeo Or.,§ 81.

Ons. 1. The article is omitted before a noun that is unlimiteJ. 1
or, that stands for a whole species; as, Man is mortal; and before
the names of minerals, metals, arts, &c. Ily usage some nouns
·denoting the species, have the article always prefixed; as, The
dog is u more grateful animal than the cat. The lion is a noble
animal. Others never have it; thus. Lenci is softer than iron.
·wood is lighter than stone.
Ons. 2. The last of two nouns after a comparative, should have
no article when they both refer to one person or thing; as, He is
a better reader than wri tcr .
·
Ons. 3 . When two or more adjectives, or epithets , belong to
the same subject, the article should be placed before the first, and
omitted before the rest; when they belong to different subjects
the article is prefixed to ef\Ch; thus, "A red and white rose,"
inilicates one rose, partly i·ed und partly white. "A reel and a
white rose," means t wo roses, one r ed and one white. "Johnson, the honkseller an<l stfltioncr," <lenofe" one person. "John
son, th e bookseller, and the stationer ," denotes two.

LESSON LXXIlI.
RuLE XXXIII. .11.n ellipsis or omission <f words
is admissible, when they can be supphed in the
mind with such ccrla'inty and readiness as not to obscure the sense. Thus, insl ea<l of' saying, He was a
learned man, an(l he was a wise man, and he was a
good man; wc sayJ .Uc was a lcarn('d, wise, and
~ood man . "'
EXPLA.NATION.-Tlw re ji; u r..onstanr lf·nd<'ncy in man fn exprr!'!s hifl id e a~}
ln tl 1c fewe ~ t wo rd ...; µo ssi hlc. \Vli c n t·vt~ (, lh1:rclilff<. a w11n1 can b1:: ~p ; 11 ·1 ·d fr11m t\
sc nicnce wi 1ttoul11 t>:sr11ri11g ii~ m· ·<111in ~ 1 1h a 1 wnfd is oft•·n kl) p 1J1.

ellipsis.

EXERCISES.

A great talents without a vi rtu e are dangerous. A
man is mortal. A time flies. The money is scarce.
John is a better farmer than a scholar. The black and
the white spani e l runs fast es t. The black an<l white
i;paniel run together. The tim e and th e tide wait for
no man. A red anrl a white rose grows on this bush.

Th i;-; IH C<.ll i1 ·1[

Thu s1 i11 ~ !f';:ul of rh ~ fidl f1,nn u( lh e sr· 11t 1· 1H.' t ', ns f\'d!1)\ \" :;, " l n ~1~ 11.t r.i:i:

ho11rs of lli c cl•Jl'.k iu lht;

r1111n1i1~,

J !in·;_llUa:-t t ;1t

r; t'\'• 'li

l11111f;; , if !!11• 1·lrn·k !n i he

morning, I go to llic :-1ciu)o l at 11i111! hr1ur ~ 1..•f llH'!. d.1 •1·k, ;_mr\ Mfl 1dy !ill IWf<h'f• hnnn:&

of the cluck ." w e

ca.11 Eiil)'.

(u11d he rq 1rnlly well

t111•kr"'l (•o1JI ,)

fo.r.I ut ~l~\"c!l 1 g_• 1 lv st.:hr,.. I al 11i11•·, and ,..1 11.iy fill f\V•· h 1'._ "

brcvintcU

~cntences;

cal construction, the

l. Th _(ullowlng sc:ntenccs arc \\'l'ong only In th e use of the article. Shew why
th ey are wrong, and correct them .

·.~

ur ul in (IJ.\l\'r to paNHJ .'411Cll, or
w o rd~

lc fi out

mu~l

In

11

I

ri o;~·

ol " i:c, h rf<nk

4

Tli i.4 h 1! 1·· !!l"i :.: in 11( o1l>-

undf'rsta. 11d !llf'ir .LframmnU-

Uc tiUppllct.1.

~
~
~~

EXERCISES.
]. Jn the followmg sentences, Jenve out tmch w on.ls as may be omilte<l without

"

He had an. afTectionate father nnd an affectionate
mot her. You rnn_v read , or you mav write, as )·ou
please. \Vil! you sw<ly , or will you 11 u l s!udy? I lta,·o
bee n at London, and I have seen th e qu ee n. A h0u ~ o
un<l a ga rd e n. He would ne ither go,J10r wu1ild he send.
2. In th e fo!lowln~ sunlCO Cf' !t, tl\.ij')f>ly lhu wo n!. Jc fl Jut, 9" M
COU8tru ction,

ff)

shew thei r rid\

..

I

124

fR AC,T!CAL LES SON& IN

E NGL IS H GR AM MAR.

IL is si x o'clock; w e may st uJ y till seven. We havo
don e it, bu t yo u have not. J ohn wi ll read, anJ Thomas
write lette rs. T h is apple is larger than that, but not so
sweet. Give this nppl e to Jam es , thnt to Robert, and
the other to Mary. I have heard and read much about
\Vas hin gto n and tl1e R evolution. "Sun, stand thou
sti ll t.:pon G ibcon; and thou, Moon, in the valley of
Ajalon."

LESSON LXXV.

r,

125
r·

)\/od d of S!Jnlactical Pars-ing .
In synta cti ca l pa rs in g , th e pupil is r eq uired, besid es parsing the
word etyrnolog ica ll y, [See L.: ss oN XXXVI. ] to sta te its relation
to other words in the sentence, a nd the rul es Ly which these relatiuns are governed. To illu s trate this more clearly, the same sen·
t ence parsed etymologically, LEssoN XXXVII.,is here parsed
syutu.cticnlly.

" Give instruction to a wise man, anJ he will be
yet wiser."
Ru LE

LESSON LXXIV .
XXXIV . .!In cUips,i s is not allowable wlien

it wo1tld obscure the sentence, weaken its force, or b~
atten ded witli an impropriety; for example, "We
sp eak tlwt we tlo k now ' a nd testif~ that we have
seen," should be , "We speak that' which we do
know, a nd testify that whicli we have seen."
EXPLANATlON. - T he S(•nsc will alway s be obscured when, on account of improper cllipr-; I&, Lhe co nstru clion

c learly :rnd readily

pcrcciw~ d .

or Lh e

sent ence is r end ered cloub1fuJ, nr ls not

When n si:nle nce or cltw sc is emphatic, ellipsis is

less allowable. T he nnr.ccctli::nt to 1he relativ e, except in poetry, is seklom omJttc<l ; and lhe rc l;1tivc i1 ~ r 1 r, if in th e nominafi\·e case , never. The article should

be rcpcar cJ wh e n a di il"i::n:nt form o f it is req uired; a! , " A horse and an a.as."

EX ERCISES .
In cnch of the following: 11ontonc..,s , point out the lruproper cllip:sls; 11how
wh y It is i111propcr i and co rre ct It.

Cicero mad e orat ions, both on private and public occasion s. He is the most diligent scholar I ever knew.
Thou hast that is thin e. Thine the kingdom, the power,
and the g lory. D epart in peace , be ye warmed, clothed,
and fill ed. I g ladly shunned who g ladly fled from me.
That is the bes t c.a n be said of him. He has a house
nnd orchard . \Ve must all go the way we shall not
return.

"Give," is a verb, tr n n ~ it ivc, irreg ul ar; give, gave, given; it\
the imp era tive, ucti•·e, second person, sinsul ar, and
agrees with its nomin a tiv e thou , understood . Itule I
" A verb agrees:' ' &c.
"Instruction," is a noun; ne uter,in t1w objec tive $lngular , goven1
ed by give . llul e II. "A transitive verb ." &c.
"To," is a prepos iti on, a nd ex presses th e relation between girt
and man , as its re rnote object.
"A," is an article, ind efinite, be loni;s to man. Rule XXXI I.
"The articl e a is used," &c.
" Wise," is an adjective, compared. wise, wiser, wisest; and expresses a quality of man. Rule VlII. "Every ucljcctive," &c.
"Mun," is n noun, mn seul.iJil,e, in tlte objective si np;nl nr, governecl
by to. Rule III. "Preposi tions govern," &c.
"Aad,'' is u conjunction, co pnlutive , and connects the two clauses .
Definition. "A conjunc tion is u word ," &c.
" He," is a third personal pronoun , masculine, tir e nominative,
singular; it sta nd s instead of man , with which it agrees
Hule X. "Pronouns agree," &c., and is the subject or
nominative of will be.
"Will be," is a verb, intran sitive, irregular; am, \ Vns, been; in
the future, in<licutivc, nctive; third person, s in gular; nnd
affirms of its s ubject h.e, with which it agrees. llule I
" A verL agrees," &c.
"Yet." is nn udverh, modifying wiser. Rule XXIV. "Adverli~
mo<lify," &c.

11"

':

126

l?JtACTlCAL LE SSONS lN

"\Viser. " is an atljective, comparative degree; wii;e, wi~er,
wisest; an1l l>elon,:s to man, or is pretlicated of he. Rule
VHL "Every adjective," &c.
Questions similar to th ose suggested at the close of LESSON

XXXVII. muy be proper he re also.
For Exe rcises in Syntactical pursing , the pupil mny now return
to L cssoN XXXV!ll., or take any p lain pnssa;e in the reading
lessons of the Spell ing Book; or the ordinary reading books used
in the school may be us ed for this purpose, as the teacher m11y
direct.

LESSON LXXVI.
Promiscuous Exercises on tlie Rules of Syntax.
In orde r to con-ect the follow ing Exercises, examine.. ea.eh eentffiee e&'"'-th:ll1,
and see. whe rei n it is wrong. See, first. wlieLher words that should agreo, do rothe vcrh with ils nominative-the num eral ndjr.cl ivc with its noun-the pronoun
perso nal an d rela1ivc, wllh Hs substantive; Eiccond, whether nounR and pronouns
arc in th e cnsc which th e word governing th em requires; and lnstly, whether tho
words arc ormngcd in the onlcr which the RuleR require. Having fonnll the error,
correct il, 311d give the Ruic fo r th e correction. These Exercises, wh en corrcctedw
Gr In the tim e of con·ccl.ing, m ay be used 11.S E.xcrclses in Syntactlco.l pil.l"Mln&:.

1. J ohn WTitcs beautiful. I shall never do so no more. The
train or our ideas nre often interrupted. Was you present nt last
m eeting ? H e need not be in so much hnste. He dare not act
otherwise than lie does . Him who they seek is in the house.
George or I is the person. They or he is much to be blamed.
Th e troop cons ist of fifty men . Those set of books was a vn!u.
able p rese nt. That pi llar is sixty foot high . His conduct evinced
the most extreme vanity. These trees are remarkable tall.

2. He acted bolder th a n was expected. This is he who I gave
the book to . E liza always appears amiably. Who do· you lodge
with now? He was born at London, but he died in Bath. Ifhc
be sincere, I am sa ti sfi ed. Her father ~nd her were at church.
The master requested him and I to read more distinctly. It is no
more but hi s due . Flu tterers flatter as long, and no longer thnn
they ha ve expectn lions of gain. John told the same story as you
\Did. This is the largest tree which I have ever seen.

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

·-

127

3. Let IJ e a nd I r ead the next chapter . .., Shc is fre e of pain
Those ~or t nf deali ngs nre unju st. Davi <l the son of Jesse, \\#as
th e youn ges t of hi ' brothers. You was very kind to him. he sa id.
W ell, sa ys r, what d oes thou thiuk of liim now? James is one
of those boys that wns k ep t in at s.c hoo l, fur bael hc ha vionr.
Thou , J nmcs, di e! deny tlie drcel. Nr·ithcr goocl nor c ,·jJ rome of
them se lves . \Ve need not to be nfrui<l . Jt is a ll fr!! do\\' n.
4. IT(· 1· xp r-1·ti:d { ( 1 Jp1\·1· ,..; :1inPd rnore l1y the 1•ar:.:;;1in . Y(~:1
sho uld dri nk plenty of goa t miJk.
ft ~\"US "'h im \\"Jio ·~pni\r fir~t
D o you lil;e ass 111il k 1 Is it me that you m ean? Who <lie! you
bu y your grammar from? rr one takes a wron >; method rtt fi rst
se ttin g out, it wj.il lc3d th c 111 nstrny. Neither mun nnr wom an
" \!re pr e~en t. I am m ore taller tli an you. S he is th e sa me lady
·wh o sa ng EO s \vce tl y . A ftf' r the most s t.r nites t Sf'Ct of our relig ion, I fiv ed a Pharisee . I s· not th y wicked nes s !> rent ? and thine
iniciuities infinite 1 1'hcrc is s lx th at studies grnmn1nr.

~ ~ :i

'

~

'

j

i"J
1.-.

f".{

'LESSON LXXVII
Punctuation.
PUNCTUATION is the nrt of dividing' a written composition into
sen tences, or parts of sen te nces, by point' or stops , in or<ler to
con vey lo th e rcn<ler th '! exact sense, nn <l nssis t him in th e proper
del ivery. The prin cipal stops a rc the followin g : The comma (,) the se mi colon (;) the colon ( : ) the pe ri od,
or full stop ( . ) th e note of interrogu tio n (?) th e note of exc!am a tion ( 1 ) th e parenthes is ( ) and th e da sh ( - )
The comma rep resents th e shortes t pause; th e sem ico lon a
pause do uble th a t of th e comma; the co lo n , <louLle that of the
s"micolon; and the peri oJ, double that of the colon.
The duration of the pauses must be left to the ta ste of the
reader or spea ker.
The C OMMA usually separa tes those pnrts of a sentence vchich
thou g h very close ly con nected in se nse nnd con struction, requ ir~
n pause between th em .
The SEMICOLON i$ used to separate the parts of n sentence
v;hich are less closely connected than those which are sepnratui
hy a comma.

~

.i
,

)

·" 1
L
, .. I

:

,l

•'
{

1'
~ 'i

f.:
~

128

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN

129

ENGLISH GRAMMAR.

'J'!Jc: Co r.o N is nsed t!l <liv iclc a sentence into two or nw re pn.rl'\
ic;.;s co nn cc tt:Li thn.n tli osc which arc sep arated by n. se1n. kolnn

bul not so independent as to require n period.
The PERIOD is used wh en a sentence is complete, with respect
to the con,trn cti on and t il e sense inten rlcd; as, " God made all
things .

11

u

PART FOURTH.--PIWS OD Y.
LESSON L:X:X.l:X.

Tiy L1i:::;appoin tmcn t.s and trials: ·the v ioience of onr

passions ;, tam ed ." " In th e varieties of life, we are inurell to
habits both of the active anti the passive virtues.''
The period must be used after all abbreviations; as, "A. D."

. , l'rL A." "Fol."

Of Prosody.
PnosoDY consists of two parts;, Eloculfon, and Versification

I. ELOCUTION .
is correc t pronunciation, " r the prnpr·r mu nngr-ment
of the voice in r eadi ng or sp ea king, anJ cornprjses Jlccent, Quantity, l';mphasis , l'ause, and '1'o n e.
.,
ELOCUTIO N

LESSON LXXVIII.
Of Capitals.

IL VF.RSIF'lCATION.

In Composition the following words begin with capital lettel'9:

is the arran!)ernent o f n certa in rn11 nber of1on:;
nod f.hort s y llabics uceonllng to certain rul es . Composition l"O

J. The fi r st word of every book, chapter, leuer, note, or any

arran ged is ca lled Verse , or J' oetry .

other piece of writing .
2 . T he firs t word after a period ; also after a note of interroga ti on, or excla ma tion, when th e sentence before, and the one
after it, arc ind ependent of each other.
3. Prop er names, t hat is, names of persons, places, ships, &e.
4. The p ronoun I, and the rnterjcction 0, are written in capitals.
u. The first word of every line in poetry.
u. The uppellatio11s of the Deity; as, God, Most High, the Al·
rnjgh ty, the Su preme Il cing, &c.
7. A cljectives dcrivecl from the jlroper names of places; as,
Greci a n, Roman, Englis h, &c.
8 . The firs t word of a quotation, introduced after ·a colon; as,
Always remember this ancient maxim: "Know thyself."
9 . Common nouns, when personified; as, "Come, gentle

Spring "
JO . Every sub stan tive and pri ncipal word in the titles of books;
as, "E uclid 's Elements of Geometry ;" "Goldsmith's Deserted
Villa ge."
Non: . Other words hc, ides the preceding, may beg in with
capitals, whe11 they arc rcmnrkably emphu tical , or th~prinC!pal
:rnujcc t of the cornposilio11.

VEJt S tFJ C ATION

\'11ttt8E i:J of two kind~; l Ot yme 11.nJ JUa nk· verse . lCl.pne Is o. Mirnl!nri 1r o f
sou nd iu t he ll\l:l l S) 1!1d1lc~ of two ur moro li11c~ 1irrnngcJ in n cc rt nlo ordt! r.
P oet r y con.111\stin g of s ut:b line s, is so111climes c 1:d l e d lthy1 nc. Hlnok VKH.MC la:

poe try wilhout rh y me .
E\'cry verse or lin e o f poetry consisls of a ce rtain nu rnhc r of parts call('(l f "'rel.
T he arrangemen t o f t hc~e ff'el in J\ lin e according to th e acc1·11 t, iH called fllctrej
and the di\'i<ling of a line into its co rnpon enl feet. is ca ll ed Scom1ing.
Ali fee t useU in poetry an~ rcduc 1h le to elglit kinds; fo ur o( two sy llables, and
four of 1hrce syllrd1 l es; the long syllable being marked by a straight W1c (-)ft.ad
Ule 1hort., by a curve, ( - ) as fo!J ows:
DISSVLLADLG .

A Trochee- .......

TRI S:SY LLABLB.

An Iambus ....... -

A Da.c1 y l - ....... An Amphibrach ..._,, -

A Spond ee - -

An An aprest ..._,, .._,. -

A P yrrlli c '-',. -

A Tribrach .._,. '-" ......,

...;

Jn En glis h, accent ed syl\ablcs arc long, unacccni cd are short.
.
T he Meires in m ost co mm on usc 1am 1h e fom hic, 'I'rocJiaic, and A nnpasl1c..
lAM01 c M ETRE i s ndapl ed 10 grave an<t scriou~ suh_jP..: JS ; has the ist' CM1tl, fourth.
and othe r even fly llablcs, acce ni cd or I o n ~; wuJ Ili c fir::111 tl .ird, i:1.J1.J utli er uni·veg

Of thi s \'C~c th e n... are v~U"iou!3 klnd :j, sorm: h av-..
lnl( two feet, some three, so me four, so m e five. Th e last j:j c alt f·d heroic m ea.aure1 itn d \!j th e sa m r. th a t is ust:LI l1y Mi !lo n 1 You ng, Tlinm ;;i,on, P 11llol., &.c.

11 ylla bles, unn.cce nte<l or s liorl.

Wh~n t he last line of a sta nza !:-; extended to Hix f1·cl, il is c..alled A J,.rrm4rine.
Tno cuA iC M &Tns l s quirk an~..t li vely , and adapted l tJ Ji!: ay and •': h ec r ful e< 1mpO·
alt Ion. It comprises verse R o ( on e and a ·half, t w(), three, fou.r, five, a nU somet1me8
atx fee t; wornetimf's followed by n.n add ilio11a.J sy llabl e.
AN'AP.t.: S Tl O MKt'R & co usi.!it.51 of line• of two, three, four Metres or A n&~
"11h oomoti.m•• nn a<l<lltionru •rllable.

130

PRACTICAL LESSONS IN
ENGLISH

li ~ ure nny writin~ , Jotting your i's , crossing your l'3 , nntl pointing tl1e whole in th e bes t mann er you ean, so th a t any persuu, as
w ell as yourself, may eas ily r ead and und crstll. nd it.
.
6. Try to make ev ery ne w composition helter tha n th e" one he .
fore it. Never write ca re less ly, 1uH\ th ough it may lie a littlu
rliflicult at fir st , a little practice will svon mnl<c it easy.

LESSON LXXX .
COMPOSITION is the putting of words together in sentences for
our ideas in writing, in the best U:an.
ncr, accordmg to the Rules of Grammar, and the best usn"es of
the language.
·
o

tJ'.e purpose of expressing

EXE11CISES IN COMPOSITION.

. A !mos t all the Exercises in the preceding Grammar, and espe.
cmlly those und er the Hules of Syntax have been fi
d "tl
v
,
_ .
. .
· '
rnmc wi 1 a
ie~ to. e:er~1se the pupil m the elemen tary parts of composition,
~~-~eadm': !um to vary !us Hiens, and to express the same idea in
rent forms; to detect and correct errors which often occur in
the. cons~u.ction of sentences; and so to put him on his unrd
ngntnst sundar C!TOJ'S. . t I .
ii
g
., •
.
, ,inc a so to orm correc t sentences for him~eu, accor<lrng t1J the particular directions laid .down under the
Vanous Rules . fo committing his own ideas to writin" in the
form of compo~itions, th en , nil he has to do is to endenvo~r to seI ect the proper wo d
"
b.
.
r s, an~ to com rne these so as to express his
meanrn.g con·e~tly, nccordrng to lite Rules with \ vh· i'cl h .
•d
..
·
1
e 1s now
suppose to h~ fam1har. The few following hints may be useful.

1

l. Spell ' ·y word c01· ti
p
f
.
rec Y·
ny prop er attention to the use
o ca
s; always using them where they should be
d
where th . I l"
' tlll never
e~ s iou u not be. [ See LESSON LXXVIII.]
2. Carelully avoid lJ
J •
L
·
n vu g<tr exp resswns nnd cnnt phrases and
never use w ords whicl1 .
l
'
)OLt 'o .not understand or which do not
·
correctly express your rnea11in...,.
'

3. At the en·d· of the line n~~er divide a word of one syllabie
nor nny won! 111 the midu!e of a sylJnble. If th ei·e should no;
b? r?om nt the enu of the line for the whole syllable do not be1
r;in It nt all, hut carry it to the next line .
•
4 . , 'When you have wr.itten what you intended look
1
over 11
cu.re fully· see 1·f .
.
b
'
you ca n unprove by a betler choice of words
or ya better a rra ngcmen t of th em so as to e
'
xpress your mean.
·
'
'
'
mg more c1curly; and mark the changes proposed.
5. Copy the whole over ill as ne•tt, di stinct. and plain a man
uer ns you can g;un I . . "
.
b
.
' .
re in,, agarns t lots and erns n•P.&, w ltich dis.

13 )

GRAMMAR .

LI

Ti1e more simple ex ercises in cornpo~ ition are, for young begi nners, so much th~ licttcr. Th ey shoultl not lie rei1uired to write
about a ny thing with which they are not perfectly familiar.
J. The followin g is a very simple an1.1 easy exe rci se. A class
of pupils may be tlirecteu to look at a f'Crtai n picture in the Spelling Book or Geog raphy, or a ny other book at hand ; and the
teacher may excite th eir a tten tio11 by ask rng some riuestions, or
telli ng th em something r especting it, anti th en direct ench one,
either in his seat or a t home, to write a dcscr iptio11 of the picture,
together with any id eas that occur to him on the subject. Th.is
method will furnish an entlless variety of easy nnd useful exerciscs .
2. From pictures, the attention may be turn ed to real objects.
The clnss may now be directed to any object or objects within
th ei r view, which th ey moy be r equire1l to desc ribe and gi ve their
id ens nbout,n3 bei'orc; fur exnm plc , the schnnl-liou~e and its fur.
niture--the bu siness or th e day , in th e fonn of n jo1u·1111l-thc
principal objec ts in vie w tu the south of th e school .ho use-to the
north-to the en st-to th e w est. Each may be directed to d~'­
scribe his own house, an1l the lea ding oujects in view from it in
diiferent di recti ons ; or any objec t which he may choose to select.
3 . Another class of easy interesti ng subjects mny be found in
describing familiar objects in natural hi story-th e various seasons
of the year, with their e mp l oym~nts and am\lsernents-the various operations of th e farmer, and diffe rent rned11111ic arts-narratives of any nceid ents, or str iking events thnt may have occurred
4. Short familinr e pi st.ol a ry corresponden ce, real or im ag inary
One pupil may be directed tn write to ano th er concerning any
thing he pleases. A pos t-offi ce mi gh t be set up in the school,
with its letter-hox , to be opened at st<ltecl 5'!1tsons 1 nnd its contents
--- ~1 " - - . 1. .. ·· ~ · -- - ·~-- · - - · '

=--·-·-·= -- _,-. ,,_ _

- - 1- - - 1

_,,I
I

I
l
I

..

.
!·

~·

f.

1:32

PRACTICAL u :ssoNS IN

crcise, becnu se voluntary, would be entered into with spirit, and
prove of grea t benefit.
5 . The mes on fam il iar subjects may next be assigned, such us
th e following:
,,
Po int ou t the evils of the followin g v.ices nncl improprieties, and
muke such r emarks respecting th em us you think proper; viz.,
L yi ng , Stealing, Swearing, Disobedience to parents, Sabbath
breul<ing, Di scontentment, Intemp erance, Ill na ture, Viol ent passions, Penuriousness , Idleness, Cruelty to animal s , Bad compa.
ny , &c,
Point out the benefits arising from, uncl make such remarks as
you thi nk proper, r espectin g,-Truth, Honesty, Sobriety, Love to
God, .L ove to m en, Good nature, Industry, Contentment, Kind·
ness to the poor , Keeping good comp a ny, Proper amusements, &c.
In all ca ses with beg inners, it is better to r equire them to give
their own thoug.!1ts on familiar subjects with which they nre acquainted, than to give th em subjer.t; of nn abstract nature, or of
which they cannot be supposed to have much knowl edge . In the
former case, th ey w ill be likely to g ive th eir own th ou ghts in
their o\\·n way; i11 the latter, they will hllve to r esort to books,
and instead of giv in g th eir own ideas , will be npt to copy the
writin gs of ot hers, without perha ps 'Yell under sta ndin g th em.
6. \Vh cn the compos itions ar e prepared, the errors in Grammar shou ld be pointecl out and expla ined, mistakes in orthogrn·
phy, capitals , punctuation, &c., corrected, or pointed out to be
corrected , nn<l then the whole cop ied, inn correct nnd plain manner , into a book kept for that purpose.
Compositions of n higher order th an those --which have been
suggested, would he above the yea rs and acquirements of tho~e
for whom this little work is inten<l ed, and ·woultl therefore be improper. Hav ing gone throu gh th ese Lessons, pupils though
young will be well prepared for tnkiog up, with case and ndvnn·
tnge, the " l'riociples of Engli8h Grammar, or the Analy1·ieal nnd'
P rac ticnl Grammar of th e E ng li sh Language," nnd fur going ·~hro11gh
n more tlF11"11gh 111vJ critical course.

•

NEW AND IMPIWVED

BOOKS,
NATIONAL SCHOOL
PU!lUSHED DY

• coURTLANDT-sTREET, N. Y.
No."'
-- · ~·· ·..---

1 inl:l'.'r~:-tcJ in
Cl\ll the nttentiun o f n1
-,•;oulJ rc8pcctfu 11 y
.
k
iul1•l1 cJ uy t\"·111. ·'"
J
.
tl e full owrng w u1 • I''
lhe snl•J·cct of e1lucalion to i 1 f l dy . nll of wh1d1 i>:c l" " J'h1 •··
·y
lmrn
c
1 u
•
u
•
.
d 011iny of tl1em iu c lll i1;e in
text-huuk"' in ueru· l Y eve1
.
l
f l11"'h rcputat\On, an
l l
bv prncti cal tenc lers o
<> •
'fl
l ve stoo<l the \,Cl!t of the sc i oo •
'
f tl o U 11100
iey '"
f tJ
l \
nhno•t every S tate o i
t:
nd approvnl of lll lU\ y o
ie '""
l')olll, 11nJ receiv ed tho !lllDC 10~ n numerollll teolimonials 11n<l rccom·
eduCtLtors in the country fron:1 w om
cneud1itioru; nre in oUl· posaesston.

r ., W . &: Co.

em.LIONS'

SERIES OF GRAMMARS AND ELEMEN·
TARY CLASSICS.

'11.ilii series consistll of the following woRKS, vi t:
C'l'tcAL LE....
"SONS IN ENGUSll ORAMM~R..
1.-PRA
.
. . f the len<ling v1uc1pl~ (\Ii
. 1·1.tle book contains a br1ef s_ynop.isill' ' t ted bv a greill vnnety
Tlue '
rt f wl11ch '"
.ue ra •
•
·
f
1b
"r,alish Grnnnn1<r, eY&Y I'" ° ct.e r adapl.eJ to the capncity o pup
,, .,,
{ ti1 . m] Jest' c1111n.i
'
d.
rf cxerCl~ o
eNs\ ~it.ion, revised and im~ro-ve
nt an llllrlJ nge.-r ow

·"
11.-TlIJ<; PilJNC IPLES 011 E N0LISH Gl<AMMAR.
ru:i n scl100l Gmmmnr, for th'e use of cl~
pu rsu in.; thio bra nch of ot11dy in the common schuuls, or .of the juniOt'
cil.Uldes in 11cndc111i <""· It e111l11·n<:es nil thni is i1npo1tuut ou the subject,
cxp1·e&lcd with nccurncy, brevity, nnd si1npl1city, untl iii peculinrly ndapt.
111 to tL e purpo•es of iustrnctiou in public uclu:.ol•.

This w01·k is i:1t.c11.l.:tl

ITl.-TIIE ANALYTI CAL AND PllACl'J CAL ENGLISH

GRA1!M.AI~.

This' WOl'k, designed fo r th e mo1·e n<l Vfl!Wcd classes in schools nnil
it(•1vle11 1iu8, is prt:pured 011 n. n1ore cx te1ulctl pl.rn tlurn tho prcccdiug,
t.lioug- h not <·~~P11 ti ally difft• i-f' nt frorn it. Tli c hJrn11 gern o11t (except in

d t·l i nit io1~ a1Jd ru le~ n1·t~ th e sa111 e, Ll1t with 111u eh greater
in tli t• i ll11.-it 1·ut io 11M au d exe rei~.H.:: ~, int cnJ cd Lu lead Ll1 e tiLud c11L i11to
n. tlioruug-li n11d l! ri liC1tl a cc1utliL1lance witlJ the sLni..etu re utH] use of thf'
E11gli..,J1 JA:tng 11age.
synt n:\ ), tltl·

fllln e~

IV.-EXF:RCJSES IN ANALYSIS AND PARSING.
TJii, li tt le Wol'k co osi•tR of selections in pl'Ose tllld poetry from stand
ar.l w rit..· 1·~ 1 Elo n1·1·nng-t!d ns tu f11 1·n i~li n co 11 ve 11i c11 t n1ul ('l'Vg l'cs.'livc <'.OUl"Se
of Exe1·ci:;c3 i11 A11a !ys is nnd P1u·fiing, in e vc1·y viui t;'f;y of ~tylt~; wi th sucl,,
OCClt~i·nml n• ft.·l'4.:1u..:c~ to th e g1·u 11 1rnu1 ·13 n~ are deemed nece~·::Ul l'f to expl ain
pecul iar or <liflic11lt coriotl'u c1.io1L'>. To t.his is prefixed tli1·c<:t.10u~ for the
arrnly•is of sc11 tcnces und moclols both of analysis aud parsing.

V. -TI U.: PRINC IPLES OF LATIN GRAMM.AR.
T l1io "'""" io upon the frH11Hl11tio n of At!nm's Latin Gmmmm·, so long
• nrl f1.Lvor1d >ly k 11ow11 1\.9 a tcxt.-lioo k, nnd c·ombin es with ull tliut is excel\eJJt i11 tl1aL wui·k many i111portH11t. eu r1·cctions nnd imp1·ovcn neuts su ggest.-

eel l,y s11li;r 1111 cnt writ ers,"" th e rcs11lts of the autho,.'s own r e!icctiou
OUS<:•rrntioJ1, <luri ng rnnoy yeu,.s, ti" u clMSicnl teacher.

aDj

VI.-,J'A COBS' LATIN READER.
Thia wol'k fo,.ma n seq 11 cl to the Gmmmnr, nn<l an introduction to tJ:ie
1t11 rly of Ln tin el a•sic n11tli orn. It begins wi tb u seri es of simple nn<l
plnin •N• 11·11 ceo mostly sef, ,ct.ed fr om c:l11osio \V-ritel's, to exemplify mu\
/111"trnt~ Ili c l<•ad i11g con stl't1 clions of I.h e language, follow ed by Rending
1•· '-~l'H~ "f pun: 1.wd r1irn1il c L.1t in, cl1i efly n a~Tative, Dy whi ch the pupi(

wl 1i l l~ ht.' lw~ ·o 111t·~ fa 111i!iar wi11i ll1 e co 11stn1 ction of th e li.u1g-ut1j.(e, is nJso
11 111• l l· ncqn11i111t-d w ith n1n11 y nf th e 111o~t. 1•ro111i11 e11t clinrn<~t1?1'S and mytho.

J1.g-ical fal1 !1•:-1 11f 111 11.iqn it_y, 11!:1 well 1L~ wi 1h tlu.~ lending e ve11ta of Homu.n
J1l::i.tc ') '. Thro ng-IH• Ut lh t" work . re fo re 11 cPS n1·e co 11slirntly m1td c, ut tho
(ol1t of th e pag-e, to tli e n 1·u run1~1r nn<l Jntrodnction, when neceseary to

explnin th e conHLl'll ct.ion or ull:ii•t t.lrn pupil in his prepnratiou.s.

'i

SERIES OF ARITHMETICS.

r·

l. SCHELT;::; "1 ;-.;·n:o11 UUTOll\' 1. 1-~..:..'itl 1'~ l :\ AIU'l'li\!l.'lll -

1.1t~ w o rk i!-' 11(•,· 1diurly a!l1q •tt-.1 tu ll 1e w: rnl M i 1f hq~i 1111 PI'~. 'J' lw lanw ~a ~e
lt5 i;i 11q, lt:, t\H· t h:tiuiti o n ~ 1·\l'<ll', tl1 t· 1.::x 1rnq 1le~ ea:-1.y . a11°l tli 1• t r:rn :-.itinn fr. 1r r:
ul 1j1. · 1.·t~ ~ rat111:d 1111d 11a\11r:d .

End 1 ~uci.:e(' .\in~ pu µ; t•

f11n1i '"' l w:-1 u 11 t·W

1~~0 11, tllld ea c l1 l c~~· n CtJ11tai11~ fo 11r dir1 t.i1J l.'t k i11d .., qf l·:~ · · n- i~··, .~iYi 1 1~ n
gr c 1lle r, 11H•l'C plr'11~i11 ~. and UtH:ful V1ll'it~t.y tl.Jau will l.,u fu u11 d <" b :\\' la: n'
i11 1wy wurk vf Lhc ki11<l.
1

BULLIONS' SERIES OF LATIN -CLASSICS.
111is series ~ontJtins the foll owing works, to which others, in course o{
prr.puml 10 11, wil l oooB be nJJ eJ , viz:

1 - Ch:SAR'S

CO.M~!ENTARIBS

ON THE GALLIC WAR

Iu t hi•. work, t he plun of the Lntin R ender is cn rri ed on tl irou holit..
The
f s::1ne mtroduct1011 on the L~tin id iom•" is 1)1·ef'1·xe t I f ur con ver n ~gu ce o r
r~ e. 1·~ ... \ce, n_nd Lhe ~ 1 rnc mudc o f r efere nce to tlie g ramm ur nnJ iu ti·tkl Uc·
twn 1..8 CvL.1t1uuc1l. The Note~ nrc neith er too m eu1, re nor too voln niituiue.
they~ «C 111ten d~d_ 11ut tu _J o _the _ wurk ,,f the :L11 dc11t. fo1 · him, lout t~
<l 11 e n11d 11.~·u~t li11n lll d 111ug 1t. lurnst:IJ: lt. i~ em lJd lic-1lu~d with a i H!uut.i·
ful u •p of (,,, 111, a11<l severnl woo<l-cuta r cpreoentrng the eugi 11.,., of war
D.MI. Loy tJ1e l{um•llls.

IL- CICERO'S SELECT ORATIONS,
Wi t h note.•, c1·it.icnl nnd explnnntory; adopted to B ulli on ' Lat
Orn'.uuinr'. a11ol 1il•o tu the 01:11 111u mr of And1:e.ws u11 d t>tuddui-.~. ·n·:i~
';l~ctw u <~11tH111.1'4. the fuur m·nt1uu:i ogcuust C1ll.ii11J e.-Tlw onl tiu u fo r tlie
l oet Ard1_1ns,-fu r M111·ccllns, -fur Q. Li g1u·iu:i,-fo1· kiug Deiutu i·i ll\- for
the .Mu111l 111n 1.""~ -unJ for Milo. Tlw notes are uiorc ext~ u ,leJ than
Uw~e iu Cl~~u· H. ~C\1 1 111~c u t~11·11'~, "ijpeci.u lly i11 lii8LoricuJ and archreolo<6 icu.l
oot•C<'ll, necc11."111y to CXJ>lum th e ullu~1011s tu persons a r1ll eve nts in wliich
the 01.· ulluns n\Juuod, n knowledge of which is iwl!•pe1ui11l>le to a "" ,er
Ullll ei.ln ll d .ll lg
llH<I to ena'Jc
• to k·ce'" Ill
. p VhH
) Y'
u
. . . ()f t he St1b•c«l,
.J
~
v t ile
- StU•Jo.:. ~,..
H! tnun ol urgHrnen t p ur:;11 ctl.-In other rcspect.s. Lh"' -:?·o11fH~
mcilium
1
l>et.wctn too rn u..:h , 1\lhl l uo Ii i tie flSSistunce h!l.S oee u studi t~d 1w<l conijlat t

2. JKTELLECTUAL AKD rJ~A C'T!CAJ, ARITIDll~Tl C ; or, Fir.i
L cl',rwns in _1 rithm el ica.l Anal 11siA, int ent.le<l us' nu iut r0Jud iu11 to ] ).,i],J'91
Arithmetic. Uy J. L E:io:<, ( <raJunte uf tLe :N . Y. :::lLHhl Nunnul Sc l, ovl.
3. EL1i:l't1E1'TARY AKD Pl1.ACTICAL ARITDo! ETJ C. b y JA'rl':.• BD oon, A. M_, J' rofcB:>orof Mn t.l1 c r11u ti«~ ni1<l Ntltuml l'liih>sv pli y ; .. Tm11; ylv 11 nin.. U niv c~ily, Lcxin gtt •ll, J\l'nl ucky.-Thi!i is n work of ~ui•e rior 1rn.: tiL
The tt1T1H1 g1... 1!1t.: n i is 11n \ Hrul, ll u· ~y~h.: m conq1kt<', and tl1 c noml·1w l:\t11re
g 1·t~ntiy irn111·ovcd. lt is 11.d111iru.t1ly 1tdH1•te<l lo tl1e p urpo:-«>!'I of i11~1nwti1•n
hy it~ cleal' and cou ci ~c ~1.ntc 1 1 1 c11t of priu cipl e~, the Lre Yit y nnd t•• lll J'l' "'·
Ll·11~i veu e~ of i t~ n1 k:\ n11d th e c xce ll cut. tHH.1 tlivroug U <p1ul ity of i11 td ·
l ect11u l di•ciJ>line whi ch it uffurd s.
l'rnf'ci<.~•J l' ])un D lms l""-' l"" ·cd 11 rnoro t1Jvan cc<l Arithm etic for llie
a ccon1 111od nt ioo uf u io~c who i1~:5il'C I\ fu l1 .; r Cll\lf'SC. Abo an Al~1· l1 ra.
T b c:-ic t hn·e Arill1111 e li<·~ lrnv e Leen pre11nr<:J hy tt.•nd11.~ r;, <• f g-n·at )tl't\Cticu.1 cx pe ri t.• nce-e1lch of 1h<'11 1 e1n i11 eut in Lhut, J epartw eut of iu~tn1ctivn
for which his w ork io c\coig 11cJ.
1

0

rt:f~rence

llHtd e

t~,

tlic

Ura1H111ur~

for the

ez:p~1u1uuon of ~lucuu..wuu ~

difhcult co11 stru ctw11s.

SCIENTIFIC SERIES.
'l11i • valunhl e seri es for tl1e use of schools embrnces tlae following - u
lho rt'o nnd su u_ifcta :

l.

Comstock's Seri es of Books of the Sciences, viz.

On the onmc plan.

JNTP,OllUCTION TO NATURAL PlllLOSOl'JJY, for d1il1l1·~ n.
SYSTDl OF N ATURAL PlflLOSOPllY, reviii-Od and cnlar;;oo.
1' EW ELmIBN'l'S OF CHJThllSTl1Y.

Publii!bed nlso by the eame-

TITE \ OUNG l30TA:N !ST, fvr hQg innera, with euta.

ITI.-SALLUSTS CATILINE AND JUGURTHA,

THE WORKS OF

vmcm:.., with oopio1111 uutee, &c.

uf reference ; \Jy P.cv. J. O. Cool'l:ll, A. M.

auJ also a lail\t

'

ELfiltlli\1'::> OF IlOTlllY AND VEGETd.BLE l'HYSIOLOOY with
cuta.

-~l

OUTLTNES OF

PHY~fOLOGY, both oomp:irative and

C~EW) ELF.ME.NTS

hnman.

OF GEOLOGY.

ELF.Ji!EN'IS OF MINERALOGY.
NATlJ]{AL Jrl::iT\/RY ()F Hr:J\,,'HC'\ AND BlltD:", showin g their

ootl>-

parntlve sizr., a.ud containing nnec\luk.-i ~Jlu~tratin~ their l1aliita H.nd
inBtinetB.

The imm rn~e Mle of Dr. Cnmstock 's lJ.:.oka, renders it probttble thnt
"'''"t tenche1·,._ T l1 ey n1·e BO udm irably adopted to
th(' Mdioc11 -rpom, Umt t lrr Philo~nphy'' l1a~ 1,,-..._,.n ro:· l'U!Jjj~bt"J iil ~everid
European cou11t1·i eH.. H.cvi!"CJ editions of scveru l of t.be;e works lu.a.V(

tl1ey nrc familiar to

.1

Lc<'n r ece ntly i.&! ued, in ci th.lin~ late di~co v c ri c~ nnd irn pruve mf"nls.
1
C-<'m~iork'~ N1tturnl l liilo!-iophy l1uving- been carefully e xamin ed hy
the Edinl.>urg h and Lond on J~d1to1'8, p1·cvious to iii! repul.>licat.ion in

~citi es, ull tl1 e conections or additions which t h ey found it ad visnb le
to make ]1av c Leen in co rporated in t he original wor k-so fiJ.r as they
wcr o n•ccrlHinc<l lo oo ju<licious nn<l a<laptc<l to our system of instruoliou. Ti1i:i pliiluouphy uu w nppeurti <.18 in rculi ty Uie work of three ucoomplis hed authors, cmlorsed a nd sanctioned by t h e g r eat mnjority of Amer·
!Ca n tt,nche1"!!, ns well as those of E nglan<l, Scot.land and P1·uRSit1, Th ~
C11>:M1srnv l1>\8 bceo en tirely revised, and coutnius all the late discov0riea,
t-Og .11.h•el' w il h the method• of nnulyzing mi1wrals nnd metals.

'.!. BllOCKLT'.SBY'S E LE.M E~"TS OF MET EOROLOGY, with q11 cilt.1ono for Exnminntion, desig ned for Sch ools and Acntlemies. Of ti1ia
work, Pro( Olmste ad, of Yi1lc College, snys :-" No uatuml scicne<i ia
11101·0 instructi ve, more attractive, and m ore practically usefu l, t h11n Me·
l.Mrology, trented ns you haYe trnflted it.; w h ere t he p hilosophi Cfl! ex
planntinns of the vnrione phenomena of the ntmosphern ai·e fuunclcd
upon n11 e xt(-' 11 r-i.i\·~ iu.lu ct ion of fn1 ·t~.
'1'hi H Hcie11 ce i ~ n1n1·e pndi<_·1du1·ly
i11tt..: r <:P.t i11!-( to I.he yo1 1nh, bcc:rnse it. explni n~ so muny thin~s that n.r'l
l bi.ily oc<:u rrin ~ t1. ro11nd .tli em, 11nd it t!ll_l ~ i11 Q, pi rcs n laMte ~·1,r 1il1 i l11 ~u Jd 1 i cL_d
ob~c rvnt10 11 1 Hlhl w l 1nt ts rn o r e, fo r } l1il0.,111•ll lt•Id n·u.~o H IIL;,!'. .
1 th ink it
oonnon fail t.o be rece ived 11s 11 valuable r.dd1tion to our Text Books. "
1

THE BEGINNER'S SERIES.

3. nrtOCKT.F.C\BY'S V1EWS OF 'lTm MTCRORCOPTC WOrtLn. An <!1€'gantly ill 11 )'\ trat.•·d \\'ni°l•, (•xhib iting n. vnridy uf i11 ~cet~ anin11dc11lcs, s~cti ons uf wood, eryst.nl ir.at.io n•, &c., as tJ1cy nrpcar when h ighly
ml\gu i fied . '1111 0 is one vf the most intcrestiof( nnd useful l>ouks for
Family nud School Lil.>mries ever publisher\. It 1s the only di.etinct. trea.
tiae o·n t he s ubject, is nc1111 irably prepared for tl1e use of cla.se., and
llhoulJ be extensively taught in ou r schools.
4. WHITLOCK 'S GEOMETRY AND SURVEYTNC:.-This is n
higl1ly or iginn.l w<>rk: cornl,in ing, in a counected and 11vnilal.>le forru, ·
•u<'·n a n1tl ogon• foutm es of A r ith metic, Algebra 11nd Gcom et1·y, M are np
pro('ri ..ti1 u_, llrn 8ul.>ject:, nn<l w ill be fount! 1uefu.l in the p!"llcticnl d utiC1
of hfe: g iving Lhe pu p il, in o. comparatively brief course of study, nol
only a full nnd close knowledge of bis 1nbjeot1 but I\ compnihensi're vi•'IP
(Jf Math&nlAtirol SciPnco.
· ·
-~

e
cf la blc• nro •nch, ilrnt. " by lenromg to apPll nn<l define fiv• lh~nJ
.., on l• , the pupil will olitn in u kn uw il-d!-(c ., f tht• Hpclling u11CJ aig 11i6on
ti1111 of aht111t /i(t a n tlw1' Sow i.'' 'l'lii t1 ft· 1d11n· nln11 c 1 11ak<~s it twu hur'I·
ti red pi· r c" n t..chc11pe r, at th e 'an>e price, than any oLlier Spellmg Bouk
no w 111 11 F1( ' .
A ~t·t ,, f H i-: ~\ P Ens. ln· tl1 c nullior of th e S t11 de11t"s Series, is now in
0011 r:-t(' of pu\die: \li o11 , wl; ich will much enhuncc the present great popuLtri lv of thi fl. 1'-lt • r it'~ .

' l'lu· p 11 l,li., l"'r" think it prope r to nrld that., Ru llinns' Analytical and
:P'nu:t il'u l O n u1111 rn r, be!" iJt.'~ bt· i n~ in ext ensive u ~ c in Acnd f' mi e~, hna been
i11tn1d11ct>d into tlH• public i.:icl1ool!-t of DOsto11, nnd "3everal uther large cities.,
witho ut ""l it' itati " n; and tl 1at the •nl e of tl1 e S tud e nt's S e ri e~ hns bee n
euch th a t. tla·y hnve been quit e unnlil e to ~ upp l y the d e mnnd. Read e rs
1, 2, 3, Ar u.I 4. hn ve been i !t~u ed , and such i~ 1he simplicity and un.tural

o rd e r o f t he nr ra 11e;enw 11 t nnd the
grce. with !' rent rapidity and with
'I'h e pu b lication' of F., B. <to
•l.~ntially buunJ , are furni shed at

in tt' rc•t uf the pieces, tl1at pupils prolittl e 11pp11r~11t effort.
Co., nre well printed, neatl,r nnd sublow prices, and fur sale by lluoksE:llers

gene rally.

A ll visiting Ne w-York, inte rested ~ n tho Book trade or S ch ool s, nrc
rn<J uest cd tn CJ.II on the pulili; hers, wh u k ee p con stnntly on hand the
]11l'l(C• t vari e ty uf Scl1 00!, Cl n'8ic11 l. nnd Mi scella neous Bouks, P e ns, Tnk,
Blank B11"k", i.Icmnn111dums, Pnper, FulJcr•, lJil.iles, &c., &c., especiallJ
adiLpl•'<i w the country trade.

FAHMER, BHAOE & CO.,
No. 4 Cou•TU.NDT-ST., N. Y

·'

